Nissan Pathfinder

®
2013 PATH F I N D E R
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN warnings, cautions and instructions concerning Before driving your vehicle, please read this
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with proper use of such accessories prior to operating Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
confidence. It was produced using the latest the vehicle and/or accessory. See a NISSAN iarity with controls and maintenance require-
techniques and strict quality control. dealer for details concerning the particular ac- ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your
cessories with which your vehicle is equipped. vehicle.
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your WARNING
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
manual before operating your vehicle. MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
A separate Warranty Information Booklet Follow these important driving rules to
explains details about the warranties cov- help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service for you and your passengers!
and Maintenance Guide” explains details ● NEVER drive under the influence of al-
about maintaining and servicing your ve- cohol or drugs.
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will ● ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
explain how to resolve any concerns you and never drive too fast for conditions.
may have with your vehicle, as well as ● ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon and avoid using vehicle features or taking
law. other actions that could distract you.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle ● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
best. When you require any service or have any priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the children should be seated in the rear seat.
extensive resources available to them.
● ALWAYS provide information about the
In addition to factory installed options, your ve- proper use of vehicle safety features to
hicle may also be equipped with additional ac- all occupants of the vehicle.
cessories installed by NISSAN or by your
NISSAN dealer prior to delivery. It is important ● ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures, for important safety information.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
For descriptions specified for four-wheel drive MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This manual includes information for all options
models, a 4WD mark is placed at the beginning available on this model. Therefore, you may find
of the applicable sections/items. This vehicle should not be modified. some information that does not apply to your
Modification could affect its vehicle.
As with other vehicles with features for performance, safety or durability, and
off-road use, failure to operate four-wheel All information, specifications and illustrations in
may even violate governmental this manual are those in effect at the time of
drive models correctly may result in loss of
regulations. In addition, damage or per- printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
control or an accident. Be sure to read
formance problems resulting from modi- specifications or design without notice and with-
“Driving safety precautions” in the “Start-
fications may not be covered under out obligation.
ing and driving” section of this manual.
NISSAN warranties.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
ING THIS MANUAL
This vehicle will handle and maneuver You will see various symbols in this manual. They
differently from an ordinary passenger are used in the following ways:
car because it has a higher center of
gravity for off-road use. As with other WARNING
vehicles with features of this type, fail- This is used to indicate the presence of a
ure to operate this vehicle correctly may hazard that could cause death or serious
result in loss of control or an accident. personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
Be sure to read “On-pavement and off- precisely.
road driving precautions”, and “Avoid-
ing collision and rollover”, and “Driving CAUTION
safety precautions”, in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual. This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 BLUETOOTH® is a
WARNING
trademark owned by
WARNING Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and licensed to
and certain vehicle components contain Visteon and Clarion.
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de- SiriusXM Satellite
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi- Radio requires
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear subscription, sold
contain or emit chemicals known to the separately. Not
State of California to cause cancer and available in Alaska,
APD1005 birth defects or other reproductive harm. Hawaii or Guam.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this” CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE For more
or “Do not let this happen.” information, visit
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter- www.siriusxm.com.
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra- ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
vehicle. Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.
© 2012 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
indicate movement or action. Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
call attention to an item in the illustration.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . . The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
following information:
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedi- For U.S. customers
cated to serving all your automotive needs. Your – Your name, address, and telephone number Nissan North America, Inc.
satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department
dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN – Vehicle identification number (attached to the
P.O. Box 685003
dealer is always available to assist you with all top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
your automobile sales and service needs. side)
or via e-mail at:
However, if there is something that your NISSAN – Date of purchase nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to – Current odometer reading For Canadian customers
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
Nissan Canada Inc.
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con- – Your NISSAN dealer’s name
5290 Orbitor Drive
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number: – Your comments or questions Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
For U.S. customers OR
information.centre@nissancanada.com
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261) If you prefer, visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
For Canadian customers www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
1-800-387-0122
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of Illustrated table of contents 0
Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1
Instruments and controls 2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4
Starting and driving 5
In case of emergency 6
Appearance and care 7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8
Technical and consumer information 9
Index 10
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6
Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8
Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
1. Supplemental front-impact air bags

(P.1-49)
2. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor)
3. Seat belts (P. 1-21)
4. Head Restraints (P.1-9)
5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and
rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-49)
6. Folding 3rd row bench (P. 1-8)
7. 3rd row bench seat top tether strap
anchor (located on bottom of seatback)
(P. 1-45 )
8. 2nd row seat top tether strap anchor
(located on bottom of seatback)
(P. 1-44)
9. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) (P. 1-32)
10. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-6)
11. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-49)
12. Seat belt with pretensioners (P. 1-63)
13. Seats (1st row) (P. 1-2)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII2049
0-2 Illustrated table of contents

EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-39)
2. Engine hood (P. 3-22)
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch,
wiper blades (P. 2-29, 8-19)
4. Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-19)
5. Compass display (if so equipped)
(P. 2-6)
6. Power windows (P. 2-51)
7. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key®,
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped),
keys (P. 3-5, 3-2, 3-20 , 3-2)
8. Mirrors (P. 3-32)
9. Side view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-39)
10. Tire pressure monitoring system
(if so equipped) (P. 8-30)
11. Flat tire (P. 6-3)
12. Tire chains (P. 8-37)
13. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-36)
14. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)
15. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-32)
LII2048
Illustrated table of contents 0-3

EXTERIOR REAR
1. Moonroof (if so equipped)/panoramic

sunshade (if so equipped)
(P. 2-53, 2-55)
2. Antenna (P.4-114)
3. Rear window wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-30)
4. Liftgate release (power - P. 3-22,
manual - P. 3-22)
5. Rearview monitor (if so equipped)
(P.4-34)
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-27, P. 9-3 )
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-27)
9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-7)
LII2045

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Glove box, Console box (P. 2-48)

2. Map lights (P. 2-58)
3. Storage (P. 2-44)
4. Moonroof (if so equipped)/Panoramic
sunshade (if so equipped)
(P. 2-53, 2-55)
5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-50)
6. Cup holders (P. 2-46)
7. Seats (P. 1-2, 1-6, 1-8)
8. Sun visors (P. 3-31)
LII2047

INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-29, P. 2-30)
9. Center display (P. 4-16,
4-4)/Navigation system* switches
(if so equipped) / Audio system con-
trols
(P. 4-59)
4-4)/Navigation system*
(if so equipped)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-49)
12. Glove box (P. 2-48)
13. Audio system controls
(P. 4-59)/Automatic heater and air
conditioning controls (P. 4-50, 4-54)
14. Hazard light switch (P. 6-2)
15. Ignition switch (P. 5-10)
16. Cruise control main/set switches
LIC2383 (P. 5-19)
1. Vent (P. 4-49) 5. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn 17. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-29)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn (P.1-49, P. 2-37) 18. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
signal switch (P. 2-32) 6. Meters, gauges, warning/indicator (P. 4-127, 4-141)
3. Control panel and Vehicle Information lights and Vehicle Information Display 19. Hood release (P. 3-22)
Display switches (P.2-18) (P. 2-3, 2-10, 2-18) 20. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF
4. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-35) 7. Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-4) switch (P. 2-41)
Tow mode switch (P. 2-42)
Liftgate release switch (if so equipped)
(P.3-22)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P.2-39)
Power inverter switch (if so equipped)
(P.2-41)
Power liftgate main switch
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
VQ35DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
2. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)
3. Drive belt location (P.8-16)
4. Fuse box (P. 8-21)
5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-9)
6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)
7. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)
8. Fuse box (P. 8-21)
9. Fusible links (P. 8-22)
10. Battery (P. 8-14)
11. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-9)
12. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)
13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-13)
LDI2148

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page

light light light
Anti-lock Braking 2-11 Supplemental air 2-15 Security indicator 2-16

System (ABS) warn- bag warning light light
ing light
4WD warning light 2-14 Slip indicator light 2-16
Brake warning light 2-11 (if so equipped)
or Indicator Name Page Tow mode ON indi- 2-16

light cator light (if so
equipped)
Fog light indicator 2-15
Charge warning 2-11 light (if so equipped) Turn signal/hazard 2-16
light indicator lights
Front passenger air 2-15
Low tire pressure 2-12 bag status light Vehicle Dynamic 2-16
warning light Control (VDC) off
High beam indicator 2-15 indicator light
Master warning light 2-13 light (blue)
4WD AUTO indica- 2-17
Malfunction Indica- 2-15 tor light (if so
Power steering 2-13 tor Light (MIL) equipped)
warning light
Overdrive off indica- 2-16 4WD LOCK indica- 2-17
Seat belt warning 2-14 tor light (if so tor light (if so
light and chime equipped) equipped)

MEMO

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

Front manual seat adjustment Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Front power seat adjustment LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 CHildren) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Rear-facing child restraint installation using
3rd row bench seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Head restraints (1st row only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Head restraints (2nd row) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Forward-facing child restraint installation
Adjustable headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 using LATCH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Head restraints (3rd row) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Forward-facing child restraint installation
Flexible seating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 Installing top tether strap
Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21 (2nd row bench seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Installing top tether strap
Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 (3rd row bench seat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-45
Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Precautions on supplemental restraint
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Infants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
SEATS
● The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
ARS1152 FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
WARNING ● For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
be upright. Always sit well back in the
the seatback is reclined. This can be
seat with both feet on the floor and
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
be against your body. In an accident,
tions on seat belt usage” later in this
you could be thrown into it and receive
section.
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and ● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
receive serious internal injuries. to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

LRS2160 LRS2161 LRS2202
Forward and backward Reclining Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean seat)
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in up and lean your body forward. Release the lever the seat height until the desired position is
position. to lock the seatback in position. achieved.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in the P (Park)
position.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

WRS0389 LRS2130
Lumbar support (driver’s seat) FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward
The lumbar support feature provides lower back (if so equipped) Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
support to the driver. Move the lever up or down the seat forward or backward to the desired
to adjust the seat lumbar area.
Operating tips position.
● The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
Reclining
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, Move the recline switch backward until the de-
then reactivate the switch. sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
● Do not operate the power seat switch for a forward again, move the switch forward and
long period of time when the engine is off. move your body forward. The seatback will move
This will discharge the battery. forward.
See “Automatic drive positioner” in “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” for automatic drive po-
sitioner operation.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).
LRS2131 LRS2132
Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Manual (if so equipped)
Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)
down to adjust the angle and height of the seat The lumbar support feature provides lower back
cushion. support to the driver. Move the lever up or down
(manual) or push the front or back end of the
switch (power) to adjust the seat lumbar area.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-
back for occupants of different sizes for added
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit
(see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this
section). Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the shift selector is in P (Park).
WARNING
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
LRS2133 LRS2143 dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
Power (if so equipped) Outboard seats be against your body. In an accident,
2ND ROW BENCH SEAT neck or other serious injuries. You
ADJUSTMENT could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
Forward and backward
● For the most effective protection when
Pull the center of the bar 䊊
1 up and hold it while
you slide the seat forward or backward to the be upright. Always sit well back in the
desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat seat and adjust the seat belt properly.
in position. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
Reclining later in this section.
To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever 䊊 2

and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull
the lever 䊊 2 up and lean your body forward.
Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
lease the seat tracks so you will be able to slide Child seat access mode
the seat forward or backward.
WARNING
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the
rear seat. Do not leave a child in the child safety seat
when operating the Child seat access
To return the seat to a locked position, push the mode.
upper seatback rearward until the seatback and
tracks are locked. Push the seat cushion down. The passenger’s side of the 2nd row seat can be
slid forward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row
CAUTION bench seat without a child safety seat being
removed.
● When returning the seat to its original
position, confirm that the seat and seat- To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift
back are locked properly. up on the seatback lever located on the upper
outboard side of the seatback on the 2nd row
LRS2142 ● Be careful not to pinch your hand or bench seat. This will release the seatback, tilt the
One touch walk-in function foot or bump your head when operating seat, and then release the tracks so you will be
the walk-in seat. able to slide the seat forward or backward.
The 3rd row can be accessed from outside the
● Do not drive with the 2nd row seat Slide the entire seat forward for access to the
vehicle by using the seatback release lever lo-
tipped up. rear seat.
cated on the 2nd row seatback. If a child safety
seat is installed on the passenger’s side of the ● Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat To return the seat to a locked position, push the
2nd row seat, the 3rd row can be accessed to pinch, hit any part of your body or upper seatback rearward until the seatback and
without removing the child safety seat. other people when operating the 2nd track are locked.
row seat. Make sure the seat path is
Multi-mode clear of all objects before moving the
To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift seat.
up on the seatback lever located on the upper
outboard side of the seatback on the 2nd row
bench seat. This will release the back of the seat
and fold up the seat cushion. This will also re-

CAUTION CAUTION
● When returning the seat to its original ● When returning the seat to its original
position, confirm that the seat and seat- position, confirm that the seat and seat-
back are locked properly. back are locked properly.
● Be careful not to pinch your hand or ● Be careful not to pinch your hand or
foot or bump your head when operating foot or bump your head when operating
the walk-in seat. the walk-in seat.
● Do not drive with the 2nd row seat
tipped up.
● Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat
to pinch, hit any part of your body or
other people when operating the 2nd
row seat. Make sure the seat path is LRS2147
clear of all objects before moving the Outboard seats
seat. 3RD ROW BENCH SEAT
Exiting the 3rd row ADJUSTMENT
To exit the 3rd row from either seating position, lift Reclining
the upper seatback release lever to the upper-
most position. This will release the back of the To recline the seatback, pull up on the latch
located on the outside corner of each seatback.
seat, fold the seat cushion up and release the
Lean back until the desired angle is obtained.
tracks.
To bring the seatback forward again, pull up on
Slide the entire seat forward. the latch and pull the seatback upright until the
To return the seat to a locked position, push the desired angle is obtained.
upper seatback rearward until the seatback and The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-
track are locked. back for occupants of different sizes for added
comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit.
See “Precautions on seat belt usage” later in this HEAD RESTRAINTS (1st row only)
section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to
allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is WARNING
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park).
Head restraints supplement the other ve-
hicle safety systems. They may provide
WARNING
additional protection against injury in cer-
● After adjustment, gently rock in the seat tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
to make sure it is securely locked. restraints properly, as specified in this
● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when section. Check the adjustment after
the seatback is reclined. This can be someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not anything to the head restraint stalks or
be against your body. In an accident, remove the head restraint. Do not use the
you could be thrown into it and receive seat if the head restraint has been re-
neck or other serious injuries. You moved. If the head restraint was removed, LRS2134
could also slide under the lap belt and reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seat- The illustration shows the seating positions
receive serious internal injuries. equipped with head restraints. The first row head
ing position. Failure to follow these in-
● For the most effective protection when structions can reduce the effectiveness of restraints are adjustable.
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should the head restraints. This may increase the 䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
be upright. Always sit well back in the risk of serious injury or death in a a head restraint.
seat and adjust the seat belt properly. collision.
See “Precautions on seat belt usage”
later in this section.

LRS0887 WRS0134 LRS0888
Components Adjustment To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
1. Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seating
position.
LRS0889 LRS0890
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push Removal (head restraints without Dual
the head restraint down.
head restraint DVD system only)
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (2nd row)
WARNING
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been re-
LRS0891
moved. If the head restraint was removed, LRS2135
reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
Install straint before an occupant uses the seat- The illustration shows the seating positions
ing position. Failure to follow these in- equipped with head restraints. The second row
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes head restraints are removable and adjustable.
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is structions can reduce the effectiveness of
facing the correct direction. The stalk with the head restraints. This may increase the 䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
the adjustment notches 䊊 1 must be installed risk of serious injury or death in a a head restraint.
in the hole with the lock knob 䊊 2 . collision.
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the an adjustable headrest.
head restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.

LRS2079 WRS0134 LRS0888
Components Adjustment To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
1. Head restraint Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.
2. Lock knob
3. Stalks

LRS0889 LRS2080 LRS2081
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push Removal Install
the head restraint down.
Use the following procedure to remove the head 1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
restraints. in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
1. Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary. facing the correct direction.
2. Push and hold the lock knob(s). 2. Push the head restraint down until it locks in
place.
3. Pull the head restraint up until it is removed
from the seat.
5. Reinstall the head restraint and properly ad-
just the seat or seatback before an occupant
uses the seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEADREST
WARNING
The adjustable headrests supplement the
other vehicle safety systems. They may
provide additional protection against in-
jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust
the headrests properly, as specified in this
anything to the adjustable headrest stalks
or remove the adjustable headrests. Do
not use the seat if the adjustable head-
rests have been removed. If the headrest LRS2135 LRS2203
was removed, reinstall and properly adjust
the headrest before an occupant uses the The illustration shows the seating positions Components
seating position. Failure to follow these equipped with adjustable headrests. All of the
headrests are adjustable. 1. Adjustable headrest
instructions can reduce the effectiveness
of the adjustable headrests. This may in- 䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with 2. Adjustment notches
crease the risk of serious injury or death in an adjustable headrest. 3. Lock knob
a collision.
4. Stalks

WRS0134 LRS2204 LRS2205
Adjustment To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the headrest down.
Adjust the headrest so the center is level with the
center of the seat occupant’s ears.

HEAD RESTRAINTS (3rd row)
WARNING
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been re-
LRS2206 LRS2207
moved. If the head restraint was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
Removal Install straint before an occupant uses the seat-
Use the following procedure to remove the ad- 1. Align the headrest stalks with the holes in ing position. Failure to follow these in-
justable headrests. the seat. Make sure the headrest is facing structions can reduce the effectiveness of
the correct direction. The stalk with the ad- the head restraints. This may increase the
1. Pull the headrest up to the highest position. risk of serious injury or death in a
justment notches must be installed in the
2. Push and hold the lock knob. hole with the lock knob 䊊1 . collision.
3. Remove the headrest from the seat. 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
headrest down.
4. Store the headrest properly so it is not loose
in the vehicle. 3. Properly adjust the headrest before an oc-
cupant uses the seating position.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the headrest
before an occupant uses the seating posi-
tion.

LRS2136 LRS2073 LRS2074
The illustration shows the seating positions Components Removal
equipped with head restraints. The third row
head restraints do not adjust but are removable . 1. Head restraint Use the following procedure to remove the head
restraints.
䉱 Indicates the seating position is equipped with 2. Lock knobs
a head restraint. 1. Adjust the seat or seatback as necessary.
3. Stalks
2. Push and hold both lock knobs.
䡲 Indicates the seating position is equipped with
an adjustable headrest. 3. Pull the head restraint up until it is removed
from the seat.
5. Reinstall the head restraint to the locking
position and properly adjust the seat or seat-
back before an occupant uses the seating
position.
FLEXIBLE SEATING ● If the head restraints are removed for
any reason, they should be securely
WARNING stored to prevent them from causing
● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo injury to passengers or damage to the
area or on the rear seats when they are vehicle in case of sudden braking or an
in the fold-down position. In a collision, accident.
people riding in these areas without ● When returning the seatbacks to the
proper restraints are more likely to be upright position, be certain they are
seriously injured or killed. completely secured in the latched posi-
● Do not allow people to ride in any area tion. If they are not completely secured,
of your vehicle that is not equipped with passengers may be injured in an acci-
seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone dent or sudden stop.
in your vehicle is in a seat and using a ● Properly secure all cargo to help pre-
LRS2075 seat belt properly. vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
Install ● Do not fold down the rear seats when place cargo higher than the seatbacks.
occupants are in the rear seat area or In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes any luggage is on the rear seats. cargo could cause personal injury.
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
facing the correct direction. ● Head restraints should be adjusted
properly as they may provide significant
2. Push the head restraint down until it locks in protection against injury in an accident.
place. Always replace and adjust them prop-
erly if they have been removed for any
reason.

3. Lift up on the recline lever on the side of the
outboard seats to fold the seatbacks flat.
4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a
seating position, push up on the seatback
until it latches in place.
LRS2144 LRS2145
Folding the 2nd row bench seat Folding the 3rd row seats
To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo
cargo hauling: capacity:
1. Make sure that the head restraints are low- 1. Pull the strap 䊊 1 to release the head re-
ered. For maximum cargo hauling, remove straint forward.
the center head rest. To remove the head 2. Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat belt
rest, push and hold the lock knob while hooks 䊊4 found on the sides of the cargo
moving the head rest in an upward direction. area.
Store the head rest properly so it is not loose
3. Pull up on the latch 䊊
2 located in the upper
in the vehicle.
corner of each seatback and lower the seat-
2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt back forward over the seat base.
hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.

SEAT BELTS
To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position:

1. Use the pull straps 䊊3 to raise each seat-
back. Pull back until the seatback latches
into position. Make sure to properly raise
each seatback to an upright and se-
cured position.
2. Do not use the pull strap to return the head
restraint to the upright position. Pull back on
the head restraint until it latches in the up-
right position.
WARNING
When the seat is returned to the normal
SSS0136
seating position, the head restraints must
be returned to the upright position to PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
properly protect vehicle occupants. USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0134 SSS0016
WARNING WARNING
● Every person who drives or rides in this ● The seat belt should be properly ad-
vehicle should use a seat belt at all justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
times. Children should be properly re- reduce the effectiveness of the entire
strained in the rear seat and, if appro- restraint system and increase the
priate, in a child restraint. chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely ● Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-
fastened to the proper buckle. vated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
● Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
See your NISSAN dealer.
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness. ● Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be
● Do not allow more than one person to
done by a NISSAN dealer.
use the same seat belt.
● All seat belt assemblies, including re-
● Never carry more people in the vehicle
tractors and attaching hardware,
than there are seat belts.
should be inspected after any collision
● If the seat belt warning light glows con- by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
tinuously while the ignition is turned mends that all seat belt assemblies in
ON with all doors closed and all seat use during a collision be replaced un-
SSS0014 belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- less the collision was minor and the
function in the system. Have the system belts show no damage and continue to
WARNING checked by a NISSAN dealer. operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
● Always route the shoulder belt over ● No changes should be made to the seat not in use during a collision should also
your shoulder and across your chest. belt system. For example, do not modify be inspected and replaced if either
Never put the belt behind your back, the seat belt, add material, or install damage or improper operation is noted.
under your arm or across your neck. The devices that may change the seat belt ● All child restraints and attaching hard-
belt should be away from your face and routing or tension. Doing so may affect ware should be inspected after any col-
neck, but not falling off your shoulder. the operation of the seat belt system. lision. Always follow the restraint
● Position the lap belt as low and snug as Modifying or tampering with the seat manufacturer’s inspection instructions
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE belt system may result in serious per- and replacement recommendations.
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could sonal injury. The child restraints should be replaced
increase the risk of internal injuries in if they are damaged.
an accident.

PREGNANT WOMEN ● Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
be against your body. In an accident,
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder neck or other serious injuries. You
belt over your shoulder and across your chest. could also slide under the lap belt and
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab- receive serious internal injuries.
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations. ● For the most effective protection when
INJURED PERSONS be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use adjust the seat belt properly.
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations. ● Do not allow children to play with the LRS2148
seat belts. Most seating positions are Front seat shown
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT equipped with Automatic Locking Re- Fastening the seat belts
WITH RETRACTOR tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the
seat belt becomes wrapped around a 1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
child’s neck with the ALR mode acti- section.
WARNING
vated, the child can be seriously injured
● Every person who drives or rides in this or killed if the seat belt retracts and
vehicle should use a seat belt at all becomes tight. This can occur even if
times. the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat
belt to release the child. If the seat belt
cannot be unbuckled or is already un-
buckled, release the child by cutting the
seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a
knife or scissors) to release the seat
belt.

The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
WRS0137 WRS0138 after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
䊊
2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor 䊊
3 Position the lap belt portion low and snug straints” later in this section for more information.
and insert the tongue into the buckle until on the hips as shown. The ALR mode should be used only for
you hear and feel the latch engage.
䊊
4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
● The retractor is designed to lock dur- retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder should not be activated. If it is activated, it
slow pulling motion permits the seat and across your chest. may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
belt to move and allows you some sion.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
freedom of movement in the seat.
positions three-point seat belts have two modes WARNING
● If the seat belt cannot be pulled from of operation:
its fully retracted position, firmly pull When fastening the seat belts, be certain
● Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) that the seatbacks are completely se-
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the re- ● Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) cured in the latched position. If they are
tractor. not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.
WRS0139 SSS0896
Unfastening the seat belts Shoulder belt height adjustment (front
䊊
1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on and 2nd row outboard seats)
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re- The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
tracts. justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-
Checking seat belt operation tions on seat belt usage”).
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt To adjust, push the button 䊊 A , and then move the
movement by two separate methods: shoulder belt anchor to the desired position, so
that the belt passes over the center of the shoul-
● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the der. The belt should be away from your face and
retractor.
neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release
● When the vehicle slows down rapidly. the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt
anchor into position.

200 mm (8 in) of length and may be used for
WARNING
either the driver or front passenger seating posi-
● After adjustment, release the adjust- tion.
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make Seat belt extenders are available for the:
sure it is securely fixed in position. ● Driver and front passenger seating position
● The shoulder belt anchor height should ● 2nd and 3rd row seating position
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec- See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
tiveness of the entire restraint system chasing an extender if an extender is required.
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident. WARNING
● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
LRS2157
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
3rd row shown; 2nd row similar be used with NISSAN seat belts.
Seat belt hook ● Adults and children who can use the
When the seat belt is not in use and when folding standard seat belt should not use an
down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on extender. Such unnecessary use could
the seat belt hooks. result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS ● Never use seat belt extenders to install
If, because of body size or driving position, it is child restraints. If the child restraint is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt not secured properly, the child could be
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
the installed seat belts is available that can be den stop.
purchased. The extender adds approximately

CHILD SAFETY
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE ● Forward-facing child restraint

WARNING
● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a Do not allow children to play with the seat ● Booster seat
mild soap solution or any solution recom- belts. Most seating positions are The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac- Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the becomes wrapped around a child’s neck child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
seat belts to retract until they are completely with the ALR mode activated, the child can are available for children who outgrow rear-
dry. be seriously injured or killed if the seat facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
● If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt belt retracts and becomes tight. This can Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un- lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder buckle the seat belt to release the child. If use a forward-facing child restraint.
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth. the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is
already unbuckled, release the child by WARNING
● Periodically check to see that the seat cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool
belt and the metal components, such as (such as a knife or scissors) to release the Infants and children need special protec-
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires seat belt. tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, them properly. The shoulder belt may
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the Children need adults to help protect them. come too close to the face or neck. The
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as- They need to be properly restrained. lap belt may not fit over their small hip
sembly should be replaced. bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
In addition to the general information in this ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
manual, child safety information is available from injury. Always use appropriate child
many other sources, including doctors, teachers, restraints.
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
to learn the best way to transport your child. tories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. See “Child re-
There are three basic types of child restraint straints” later in this section.
systems:
● Rear-facing child restraint

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by SMALL CHILDREN properly, the booster seat should raise the child
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth- so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at across the chest and the top, middle portion of
belt. See “Child restraints” later in this section for least 20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross
more information. child restraint as long as possible up to the height the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-
or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear- lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old booster seat can only be used in seating posi-
Studies show that children are safer when
should be secured in a forward-facing child re- tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
straint with a harness. Refer to the manufactur- booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have
the front seat.
er’s instructions for minimum and maximum a label certifying that it complies with Federal
This is especially important because your weight and height recommendations. NISSAN Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys- recommends that small children be placed in tor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the child has
tem (air bag system) for the front passen- child restraints that comply with Federal Motor grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on or near
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system” Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Ve- the face and neck and the lap belt can be posi-
later in this section. tioned properly across the lower hips or upper
hicle Safety Standards. You should choose a
thighs use the seat belt without the booster seat.
INFANTS child restraint that fits your vehicle and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed WARNING
lation and use.
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom- Never let a child stand or kneel on any
mends that infants be placed in child restraints LARGER CHILDREN seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety area. The child could be seriously injured
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Children should remain in a forward-facing child
restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi- or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu- mum height or weight limit allowed by the child
facturer’s instructions for installation and use. restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit
of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-
straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be
placed in a commercially available booster seat to
obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit
CHILD RESTRAINTS
– Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
ARS1098 WRS0256 “Forward-facing child restraint in-
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD stallation using the seat belts” later
WARNING in this section.
RESTRAINTS
● Failure to follow the warnings and in- – Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
structions for proper use and installa- Bag System, never install a rear-
tion of child restraints could result in facing child restraint in the front
serious injury or death of a child or seat. An inflating air bag could seri-
other passengers in a sudden stop or ously injure or kill a child. A rear-
collision: facing child restraint must only be
– The child restraint must be used and used in the rear seat.
installed properly. Always follow all – Be sure to purchase a child restraint
of the child restraint manufacturer’s that will fit the child and vehicle.
instructions for installation and use. Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchor points are de- This vehicle is equipped with a universal child ● If the child restraint is compatible with your
signed to withstand loads from child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
restraints that are properly fitted. (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- and check the various adjustments to be
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or sure the child restraint is compatible with
– Never use the anchor points for adult webbing-mounted attachments that can be con- your child. Choose a child restraint that is
seat belts or harnesses. nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH designed for your child’s height and weight.
– A child restraint with a top tether (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys- Always follow all recommended procedures.
strap should not be used in the front tem” later in this section. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
passenger seat. territories require that infants and small
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- children be restrained in an approved child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
sible after fitting the child restraint. restraint at all times while the vehicle is
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for being operated. Canadian law requires the
– Infants and children should always infants and children of various sizes. When se- top tether strap on forward-facing child
be placed in an appropriate child re- lecting any child restraint, keep the following restraints be secured to the designated an-
straint while in the vehicle. chor point on the vehicle.
points in mind:
● When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system ● Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli- that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
sion, loose objects can injure occu- Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
pants or damage the vehicle. Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
CAUTION sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can and seat belt system.
become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.

The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to
install child restraints in the following positions only:
● 2nd row bench seat – outboard seating
positions
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
LRS2137 – Attach LATCH system compatible WRS0700
LATCH system lower anchor locations - child restraints only at the locations LATCH lower anchor location
bench seat shown in the illustration.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers – Do not secure a child restraint in the
for CHildren) SYSTEM center rear seating position using
the LATCH system anchors. The child
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor restraint will not be secured properly.
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible – Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
child restraints. This system may also be referred ing your fingers into the lower anchor
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. area. Feel to make sure there are no
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle obstructions over the anchors such
seat belt to secure the child restraint. as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower an-
chors are obstructed.

LRS2146 LRS0661 LRS0662
LATCH label locations 2nd row bench LATCH webbing-mounted attachment LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LATCH lower anchor location Installing child restraint LATCH lower When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear anchor attachments those supplied with the child restraint.
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is LATCH compatible child restraints include two
attached to the seatback to help you locate the rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
LATCH lower anchors. be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.

Top tether anchor
WARNING
Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the top
tether anchor. Properly secure the cargo
so it does not contact the top tether strap.
Cargo that is not properly secured or
cargo that contacts the top tether strap
may damage it during a collision. A child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is
damaged.
LRS2138 LRS2139
2nd row bench seat 3rd row bench seat
1. Top tether strap Top tether anchor point locations
2. Anchor point Anchor points are located in the following loca-
tions:
● 2nd row bench on the bottom of the seat-
back in the seating positions shown.
● 3rd row bench on the bottom of the seat-
back on the passenger side seating position
as shown.
If you have any questions when installing a top
tether strap, consult your NISSAN dealer for de-
tails.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH
system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
WRS0801 WRS0802
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 4.
LRS0673 LRS0674
Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4
3. For child restraints that are equipped with 4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
additional slack from the anchor attach- to side while holding the child restraint near
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
in the center of the child restraint with your straint should not move more than 1 inch
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it
and seatback while tightening the webbing forward and check to see if the LATCH at-
of the anchor attachments. tachment holds the restraint in place. If the
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint
in another seat and test it again. You may
need to try a different child restraint or try
installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if
applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all
types of vehicles.
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
WRS0256 WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 1
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
BELTS stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.

WRS0761 LRS0669 LRS0670
Rear-facing – step 2 Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
structions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Safety” and “Child Restraints” sections before
WRS0762 WRS0763 installing a child restraint.
Rear-facing – step 5 Rear-facing – step 6
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat 6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in fore you place the child in it. Push it from side LATCH system:
the center of the child restraint to compress to side while holding the child restraint near
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while the seat belt path. The child restraint should 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
pulling up on the seat belt. ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

WRS0799 WRS0800 LRS0671
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 2 Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 Forward-facing – step 4
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach- 3. The back of the child restraint should be 4. For child restraints that are equipped with
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check secured against the vehicle seatback. webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop- additional slack from the anchor attach-
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
erly attached to the lower anchors. ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If
in the center of the child restraint with your
If the child restraint is equipped with a top the head restraint is removed, store it in a
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head
and seatback while tightening the webbing
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor restraint when the child restraint is re-
of the anchor attachments.
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this moved. See “Head restraints” in this section
for head restraint adjustment information. 5. Tighten the tether strap according to the
section. Do not install child restraints that
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
require the use of a top tether strap in seat- If the seating position does not have an
slack.
ing positions that do not have a top tether adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
anchor. with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 6.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
WRS0697 use the ALR mode will result in the child WRS0699
restraint not being properly secured. The
Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
restraint could tip over or be loose and
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be- step 1
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side collision. Also, it can change the opera- Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
to side while holding the child restraint near tion of the front passenger air bag. See Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
the LATCH attachment path. The child re- “Front passenger air bag and status light” stalling a child restraint.
straint should not move more than 1 inch later in this section. Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
forward and check to see if the LATCH at- rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
tachment holds the restraint in place. If the
1. If you must install a child restraint in
restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH
the front seat, it should be placed in a
attachment as necessary, or put the restraint forward-facing direction only. Move
in another seat and test it again. You may the seat to the rearmost position. Child
need to try a different child restraint. Not all restraints for infants must be used in
child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. the rear-facing direction and, there-
fore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. See “Head restraints” in this
section for head restraint adjustment, re-
moval and installation information.
WRS0680 LRS0667
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4
with the proper child restraint fit, try another 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
seating position or a different child restraint. restraint and insert it into the buckle until you extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in- mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
structions for belt routing. Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.

LRS0668 WRS0681 WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 5 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the 6. Remove any additional slack from the seat 8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt. belt; press downward and rearward firmly in fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
the center of the child restraint with your to side while holding the child restraint near
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion the seat belt path. The child restraint should
and seatback while pulling up on the seat not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
belt. side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
slack. belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
LRS0865 LRS2138
Forward-facing – step 10 2nd row bench seat
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front 1. Top tether strap
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag 2. Anchor point
status light should illuminate. If this INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
light is not illuminated see “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section.
(2nd row bench seat)
Move the child restraint to another First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
seating position. Have the system lower anchors (2nd row bench outboard seating
checked by a NISSAN dealer. positions only) or the seat belt, as applicable.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat 1. OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled. If necessary, raise or remove the head re-
straint to position the top tether strap 䊊
1
over the top of the seatback. If the head
restraint is removed, store it in a secure The passenger side of the 3rd row bench seat is
place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint the seating position that can use a top tether
when the child restraint is removed.See strap.
“Head restraint adjustment” in this
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt,
section for head restraint adjustment,
as applicable.
removal and installation information.
1. Position the top tether strap 䊊
1 to the out-
CENTER SEATING POSITION
board side of the head restraint as shown.
Remove the headrest and position the top
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
tether strap 䊊 1 over the seatback or adjust
point 䊊2 on the bottom of the seatback
the headrest to the lowest position and po-
behind the child restraint.
sition the top tether strap over the headrest.
If the headrest is removed, store it in a se- 3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
cure place. Be sure to reinstall the headrest manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
when the child restraint is removed.See LRS2139 slack. Make sure the head restraint does not
“Adjustable headrest” in this section 3rd row bench seat contact the top tether strap.
for headrest adjustment, removal and
1. Top tether strap If you have any questions when installing a
installation information.
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor 2. Anchor point
dealer for details.
point 䊊2 on the bottom of the seatback
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
behind the child restraint.
(3rd row bench seat)
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any WARNING
slack. Make sure the head restraint does not
contact the top tether strap. In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint
with a top tether strap can only be used on
If you have any questions when installing a the passenger side seating position. Do
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN not place in the driver’s side seating posi-
dealer for details. tion and attempt to angle the tether strap
to the passenger side seating position.

BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured
in a sudden stop or collision greatly
increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not LRS0455 LRS0453
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properly Booster seat installation
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the CAUTION
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
low back booster seat 䊊 1 is chosen, the Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
high back booster seat 䊊 2 should be used. Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”
sections before installing a child restraint.
● If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
and check the various adjustments to be rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
LRS0464 child. Always follow all recommended pro-
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by cedures.
several manufacturers. When selecting any All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
booster seat, keep the following points in mind: territories require that infants and small
● Choose only a booster seat with a label children be restrained in an approved child
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor restraint at all times while the vehicle is
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian being operated.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The instructions in this section apply to booster
● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be seat installation in the rear seats or the front
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat passenger seat.
and seat belt system.

If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
WRS0699 LRS0454 manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
1. If you must install a booster seat in the Front passenger position seat belt routing.
front seat, move the seat to the rear- 3. The booster seat should be positioned on 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
most position. the vehicle seat so that it is stable. tions for properly fastening a seat belt
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only If necessary, adjust or remove the head re- shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
place it in a front-facing direction. Always straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If retractor” earlier in this section.
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in- the head restraint is removed, store it in a
structions. secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. See “Head restraints” in this sec-
tion for head restraint adjustment, removal
and installation information.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

RESTRAINT SYSTEM rollover supplemental air bag system: This
system can help cushion the impact force to the
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec- head of occupants in front and rear outboard
tion contains important information concerning seating positions in certain side-impact or roll-
the following systems: over collisions. In a side impact, the curtain and
rollover air bags are designed to inflate on the
● Driver and passenger supplemental front-
side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover,
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
both curtain and rollover air bags are designed to
System)
inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
● Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
mental air bag
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
● Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll- vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
over supplemental air bag and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
LRS0865 should always be correctly worn and the occu-
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front ● Seat belt with pretensioner
pant seated a suitable distance away from the
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in Supplemental front-impact air bag system: steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-
the ON position. The front passenger air bag The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help ers. See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for
status light may or may not illuminate, cushion the impact force to the head and chest of instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.
depending on the size of the child and the the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
The supplemental air bags operate only
type of booster seat being used. See “Front collisions.
when the ignition switch is placed in the
passenger air bag and status light” later in ON position.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
this section.
mental air bag system: This system can help
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
cushion the impact force to the chest area of the
position, the supplemental air bag warning
driver and front passenger in certain side-impact
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
collisions. The side air bags are designed to
warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
onds if the system is operational.

● The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags as
needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
● The front passenger seat is equipped
with an Occupant Classification Sensor
(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-
senger air bag OFF under some condi-
WRS0031 tions. This sensor is only used in this
seat. Failure to be properly seated and
WARNING ● The seat belts and the front air bags are wearing the seat belt can increase the
most effective when you are sitting well risk or severity of injury in an accident.
● The front air bags ordinarily will not
back and upright in the seat. The front See “Front passenger air bag and sta-
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
air bags inflate with great force. Even tus light” later in this section.
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tal collision. Always wear your seat ● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
belts to help reduce the risk or severity ing wheel. Placing them inside the
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
of injury in various kinds of accidents. steering wheel rim could increase the
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
risk that they are injured when the front
● The front passenger air bag will not injury or death in a crash. You may also
air bag inflates.
inflate if the passenger air bag status receive serious or fatal injuries from the
light is lit or if the front passenger seat front air bag if you are up against it
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air when it inflates. Always sit back against
bag and status light” later in this the seatback and as far away as practi-
section. cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

ARS1133 ARS1041
WARNING
● Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for
details.
ARS1045 ARS1046
WARNING
● Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain and rollover air bags
inflate if they are not properly re-
strained. Pre-teens and children should
be properly restrained in the rear seat, if
possible.

WRS0431 SSS0162 SSS0159
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact and rollover supplemental air
bags:
● The side air bags and curtain and roll-
over air bags ordinarily will not inflate in
the event of a frontal impact, rear im-
pact, or lower severity side collision.
Always wear your seat belts to help
reduce the risk or severity of injury in
various kinds of accidents.

WARNING
● The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain and rollover air bags are most
effective when you are sitting well back
and upright in the seat with both feet on
the floor. The side air bag and curtain
and rollover air bag inflate with great
force. Do not allow anyone to place
their hand, leg or face near the side air
bag on the side of the seatback of the
front seat or near the side roof rails. Do
not allow anyone sitting in the front
seats or rear outboard seats to extend
their hand out of the window or lean WRS0032
against the door. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown WARNING
in the previous illustrations.
● When sitting in the 2nd row rear seat, do
not hold onto the seatback of the front
seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may
be seriously injured. Be especially care-
ful with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations
● Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.

1. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-
ules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor)
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
rollover supplemental air bags
rollover supplemental air bag inflators
7. Satellite sensors
8. Seat belt with pretensioner
9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side
shown; passenger side similar)
10. Crash zone sensor
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passen-
ger’s advanced air bag system, please ob-
serve the following items.
● Do not allow a passenger in the rear
seat to push or pull on the seatback
pocket.
LRS2187

● Do not place heavy loads heavier than ● If you notice that the front passenger air Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback, head re- bag status light is not operating as de- indication of proper front air bag system opera-
straint or in the seatback pocket. scribed later in this section, please take tion.
your vehicle to your NISSAN dealer to
● Do not store luggage behind the seat The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
check the occupant classification stage inflators. It also monitors information from
that can press into the seatback.
system. the crash zone sensor and the Air bag Control
● Do not position the front passenger
● Until you have confirmed with your Unit (ACU). Inflator operation is based on the
seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the
dealer that your passenger seat occu- severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the
front seat does contact the rear seat,
pant classification system is working driver. For the front passenger, the occupant
the air bag system may determine a
properly, position the occupants in the classification sensors are also monitored. Based
sensor malfunction has occurred and
rear seating positions. on information from the sensors, only one front air
the front passenger air bag status light
may illuminate and the supplemental bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad- crash severity. Additionally, the front passenger
air bag warning light may flash. vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front air bag may be automatically turned OFF under
● If a forward-facing child restraint is in- passenger seats. This system is designed to some conditions, depending on the weight de-
stalled in the front passenger seat, do meet certification requirements under U.S. regu- tected on the passenger seat and how the seat
not position the front passenger seat so lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However, belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,
the child restraint contacts the instru- all of the information, cautions and warn- the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-
ment panel. If the child restraint does ings in this manual still apply and must be nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not
contact the instrument panel, the sys- followed. be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See
tem may determine the seat is occupied “Front passenger air bag and status light” later in
and the passenger air bag may deploy The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is this section for further details. One front air bag
in a collision. Also the front passenger located in the center of the steering wheel. The inflating does not indicate improper performance
air bag status light may not illuminate. passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is of the system.
See “Child restraints” earlier in this sec- mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.
tion for information about installing The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher If you have any questions about your air bag
and using child restraints. severity frontal collisions, although they may in- system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
flate if the forces in another type of collision are dealer. If you are considering modification of your
● Confirm the operating condition with vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
the front passenger air bag status light. similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise After placing the ignition switch in the ON
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. position, the supplemental air bag warning
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history onds if the system is operational.
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
LRS0865
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
Front passenger air bag and status light
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
senger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The WARNING
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help The front passenger air bag is designed to
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the automatically turn OFF under some con-
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the ditions. Read this section carefully to
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is learn how it operates. Proper use of the
against, the front air bag module during inflation. seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-
essary for most effective protection. Fail-
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
ure to follow all instructions in this
The front air bags operate only when the manual concerning the use of seats, seat
ignition switch is placed in the ON position. belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-
vehicle are not part of this system. tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental
The front passenger air bag status light is air bag.
located near the radio controls. After the ignition The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙ position, the front the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
passenger air bag status light on the instrument to certain front passenger seat occupants, such dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto- NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
turns off or remains illuminated depending on the matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used restraints and booster seats be properly installed
front passenger seat occupied status. The light to meet the requirements. in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
operates as follows: classification sensor is designed to operate as
One sensor used is the occupant classification
described above to turn the front passenger air
● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is sensor (weight sensor). It is designed to detect
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF an occupant and objects on the seat by weight.
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure
and will not inflate in a crash. For example, if a child is in the front passenger
child restraints and to use the ALR mode may
seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed
● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult, allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or
to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance
child or child restraint as outlined in this sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-
with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the
section: The illuminates to indicate ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being
type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in this section
weight and the child’s weight can be detected
will not inflate in a crash. for proper use and installation.
and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
● Occupied passenger seat and the passen- Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
ger meet the conditions outlined in this sec- passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
tion: The light is OFF to indicate that crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
the front passenger air bag is operational. seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
the object’s weight detected by the occupant
Front passenger air bag small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
classification sensor. Other conditions could also
occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto- result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out
under some conditions as described below in seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
of position), this could cause the sensor to turn
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can until you have confirmed with your dealer that ● Immediately after inflation, several
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au- your air bag is working properly, reposition the front air bag system components will be
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
The light will not illuminate when the front pas- verely burn yourself.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
senger seat is unoccupied.
light will take a few seconds to register a change ● No unauthorized changes should be
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen- in the passenger seat status. For example, if a made to any components or wiring of
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating large adult who is sitting in the front passenger the supplemental air bag system. This is
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the seat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bag to prevent accidental inflation of the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat status light will go from OFF to ON for a few supplemental air bag or damage to the
properly or not using the seat belt properly. seconds and then to OFF. This is normal system supplemental air bag system.
operation and does not indicate a malfunction. ● Do not make unauthorized changes to
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child bag system, the supplemental air bag warning pension system or front end structure.
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air This could affect proper operation of
light , located in the meter and gauges area the front air bag system.
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that of the instrument panel, will blink. Have the sys-
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be tem checked by a NISSAN dealer. ● Tampering with the front air bag system
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being may result in serious personal injury.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag Tampering includes changes to the
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
precautions steering wheel and the instrument
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air panel assembly by placing material
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the WARNING over the steering wheel pad and above
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. ● Do not place any objects on the steer- the instrument panel or by installing
ing wheel pad or on the instrument additional trim material around the air
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu- bag system.
minate even though you believe that the child panel. Also, do not place any objects
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are between any occupant and the steering ● Removing or modifying the front pas-
properly positioned, the system may be sensing wheel or instrument panel. Such ob- senger seat may affect the function of
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is jects may become dangerous projec- the air bag and result in serious per-
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the tiles and cause injury if the front air sonal injury.
system is OFF by using a special tool. However, bags inflate.

● Modifying or tampering with the front ● Work on and around the front air bag
passenger seat may result in serious system should be done by a NISSAN
personal injury. For example, do not dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
change the front seats by placing mate- ment should also be done by a NISSAN
rial on the seat cushion or by installing dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
additional trim material, such as seat System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should
covers, on the seat that are not specifi- not be modified or disconnected. Unau-
cally designed to assure proper air bag thorized electrical test equipment and
operation. Additionally, do not stow any probing devices should not be used on
objects under the front passenger seat the air bag system.
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
● A cracked windshield should be re-
objects may interfere with the proper
placed immediately by a qualified re-
operation of the occupant classifica-
pair facility. A cracked windshield could
tion sensor (weight sensor).
affect the function of the supplemental WRS0381
● No unauthorized changes should be air bag system.
made to any components or wiring of Front seat-mounted side-impact
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
the seat belt system. This may affect the
yellow and orange for easy identification.
supplemental air bag and roof-
front air bag system. Tampering with mounted curtain side-impact and
the seat belt system may result in seri- When selling your vehicle, we request that you
ous personal injury. inform the buyer about the front air bag system
rollover supplemental air bag systems
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections The side air bags are located in the outside of the
in this Owner’s Manual. seatback of the front seats. The curtain and roll-
over air bags are located in the side roof rails in all
3 rows. These systems are designed to meet
voluntary guidelines to help reduce the risk of
injury to out-of-position occupants. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed. The side air bags and curtain and
rollover air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity side collisions, although they may inflate cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags
WARNING
if the forces in another type of collision are similar and curtain and rollover air bags do not provide
to those of a higher severity side impact. They are restraint to the lower body. ● Do not place any objects near the seat-
designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle back of the front seats. Also, do not
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side
driver and passenger seated upright as far as etc.) between the front door finisher
collisions.
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat and the front seat. Such objects may
Curtain and rollover air bags are also designed to passengers should be seated as far away as become dangerous projectiles and
inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near practical from the door finishers and side roof cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements rails. The side air bags and curtain and rollover air
(for example, during severe off roading) may ● Right after inflation, several side air bag
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the and curtain and rollover air bag system
cause the curtain and rollover air bags to inflate. occupants. Because of this, the force of the side components will be hot. Do not touch
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an air bags and curtain and rollover air bags inflating them; you may severely burn yourself.
indication of proper side air bag and curtain and can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is
too close to, or is against, these air bag modules ● No unauthorized changes should be
rollover air bag operation.
during inflation. The side air bag will deflate made to any components or wiring of
When the side air bags and curtain and rollover quickly after the collision is over. the side air bag and curtain and rollover
air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, air bag systems. This is to prevent dam-
followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not The curtain and rollover air bag will remain in- age to or accidental inflation of the side
harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should flated for a short time. air bag and curtain and rollover air bag
be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation systems.
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing The side air bags and curtain and rollover
air bags operate only when the ignition ● Do not make unauthorized changes to
condition should get fresh air promptly.
switch is placed in the ON position. your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, pension system or side panel. This
help to cushion the impact force on the chest of After placing the ignition switch in the ON could affect proper operation of the
the front occupants. Curtain and rollover air bags position, the supplemental air bag warning curtain and rollover air bag systems.
help to cushion the impact force to the head of light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
occupants in the front and rear outboard seating warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-
positions in all rows. They can help save lives and onds if the system is operational.
reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating
side air bag or curtain and rollover air bag may
● Tampering with the side air bag system Seat belts with pretensioners (Front The pretensioner system may activate with the
may result in serious personal injury. seats) supplemental air bag system in certain types of
For example, do not change the front collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,
seats by placing material near the seat- WARNING the pretensioner helps tighten the seat belt when
backs or by installing additional trim the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of
material, such as seat covers, around ● If the vehicle becomes involved in a collisions, helping to restrain front seat occu-
the side air bag. collision but a pretensioner is not acti- pants.
vated, be sure to have the pretensioner
● Work around and on the side air bag system checked and, if necessary, re- The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
and curtain and rollover air bag systems placed by your NISSAN dealer. retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
should be done by a NISSAN dealer. as conventional seat belts.
Installation of electrical equipment ● No unauthorized changes should be
should also be done by a NISSAN made to any components or wiring of When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* the pretensioner system. This is to pre- leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
should not be modified or discon- vent damage to or accidental activation smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
nected. Unauthorized electrical test of the pretensioners. Tampering with Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
equipment and probing devices should the pretensioner system may result in cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
not be used on the side air bag or cur- serious personal injury. of a breathing condition should get fresh air
tain and rollover air bag systems. ● Work around and on the pretensioner promptly.
system should be done by a NISSAN
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
yellow or orange for easy identification. the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test reduce forces against the chest.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bags and equipment and probing devices should The supplemental air bag warning light is
curtain and rollover air bag system and guide the not be used on the pretensioner system. used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner
buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner’s ● If you need to dispose of a pretensioner system. (See ⬙SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
Manual. or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN WARNING LIGHT⬙ in this section for more de-
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures tails.) If the operation of the supplemental air bag
could cause personal injury. warning light indicates there is a malfunction,
have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
LRS2158 LRS0100
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
The warning labels are located on the sur- WARNING LIGHT
face of the sun visor. The supplemental air bag warning light,
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG displaying in the instrument panel, moni-
WARNING LABELS tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-
sioners and all related wiring.
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
shown in the illustration. position, the supplemental air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front Repair and replacement procedure ● The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag and rollover air bag systems and the
and pretensioner systems need servicing: The front air bags, side air bags, curtain and
pretensioner system should be in-
rollover air bags and pretensioners are designed
● The supplemental air bag warning light re- to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder,
spected by a NISSAN dealer if there is
mains on after approximately 7 seconds. any damage to the front end or side
unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag portion of the vehicle.
● The supplemental air bag warning light warning light remains illuminated after inflation
flashes intermittently. has occurred. Repair and replacement of these ● If you need to dispose of a supplemen-
supplemental air bag systems should be done tal air bag or pretensioner or scrap the
● The supplemental air bag warning light does vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-
not come on at all. only by a NISSAN dealer.
rect disposal procedures could cause
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air When maintenance work is required on the ve- personal injury.
bag, curtain and rollover air bag or pretensioner hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain and
systems may not operate properly. They must be rollover air bags, pretensioners and related parts
checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the should be pointed out to the person performing
nearest NISSAN dealer. the maintenance. The ignition switch should al-
ways be in the LOCK position when working
WARNING under the hood or inside the vehicle.
If the supplemental air bag warning light
WARNING
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag ● Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
and/or pretensioner systems will not op- curtain and rollover air bag has inflated,
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury the air bag module will not function
to yourself or others, have your vehicle again and must be replaced. Addition-
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as ally, the activated pretensioners must
possible. also be replaced. The air bag module
and pretensioner should be replaced by
a NISSAN dealer. The air bag module
and pretensioner cannot be repaired.

2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Rear window wiper and washer switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-34
Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-10 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Heated rear seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . 2-18 Climate controlled seat switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . 2-40
Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch. . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 Power inverter switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Vehicle information display warnings and Tow mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 12v outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 120v outlet (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29 Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Operating the HomeLink® universal
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Cargo area storage bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button. . . . . . 2-62
Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 HomeLink® universal transceiver (Type B)
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Programming HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Automatic moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian
Panoramic sunshade (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 customers and gate openers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Operating the HomeLink® universal
Console light (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 transceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button. . . . . . 2-66
HomeLink® universal transceiver (Type A)
If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-4)

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch and
rear window wiper/washer switch
(P. 2-29, P. 2-30)
4-4)/Navigation system* switches
(if so equipped) / Audio system
controls (P. 4-59)
4-4)/Navigation system*
(if so equipped)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-49)
12. Glove box (P. 2-48)
13. Audio system controls (P. 4-59)/
Automatic heater and air conditioning
controls (P. 4-50, 4-54)
14. Hazard light switch (P. 6-2)
15. Ignition switch (P. 5-10)
16. Cruise control main/set switches
LIC2383 (P. 5-19)
1. Vent (P. 4-49) 4. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-35) 17. Tilt steering wheel control (P. 3-29)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn 5. Driver supplemental air bag/Horn 18. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
signal switch (P. 2-32) (P.1-49, P. 2-37) (P. 4-127, 4-141)
3. Control panel and Vehicle Information 6. Meters, gauges, warning/indicator 19. Hood release (P. 3-22)
Display switches (P.2-18) lights and Vehicle Information Display
(P. 2-3, 2-10, 2-18)
2-2 Instruments and controls
METERS AND GAUGES
20. Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-41)
Tow mode switch (P. 2-42)
Liftgate release switch (if so equipped)
(P.3-22)
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) (P.2-39)
Power inverter switch (if so equipped)
(P.2-41)
Power liftgate main switch
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
LIC2254
1. Tachometer 7. Engine coolant temperature gauge
2. Warning/indicator lights
3. Vehicle Information Display
4. Speedometer
5. Fuel gauge
6. Odometer/Twin trip odometer
Instruments and controls 2-3
LIC2255 LIC2234 LIC2219
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER Changing the display: TACHOMETER

Pushing the TRIP RESET 䊊 3 switch on the right The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
Speedometer of the instrument panel to change the display as lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed. follows: the red zone 䊊1 .
Odometer/Twin trip odometer Trip → Trip → Trip CAUTION

The odometer 䊊 1 and the twin trip odometer 䊊 2 Resetting the trip odometer: When engine speed approaches the red
are displayed below the Vehicle Information Dis-
play when the ignition switch is placed in the ON Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊 3 for more zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the
than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip engine in the red zone may cause serious
position. engine damage.
odometer to zero.
The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven. Average fuel economy and distance to empty
information is also available. See “Vehicle Infor-
The twin trip odometer records the distance of mation Display” in this section.
individual trips.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required.
LIC2220 LIC2222
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FUEL GAUGE

GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera- in the tank.
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the The gauge may move slightly during braking,
normal range 䊊 1 when the gauge needle points
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
within the zone shown in the illustration.
The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the
The engine coolant temperature varies with the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters 0 (Empty).

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
The indicates that the fuel-filler door is This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in- For information about the automatic anti-glare
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle. dicates the heading direction of the vehicle. feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press ments” section.
CAUTION
the or button as described in the
● If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the charts below to activate various features of the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
come on. Refuel as soon as possible. Type A
After a few driving trips. the light
should turn off. If the light remains on Push and hold Feature:
after a few driving trips, have the ve- the (Push button again for about 1 sec-
hicle inspected by a NISSAN dealer. button for about: ond to change settings)
1 second Compass display toggles on/off
● For additional information, see “Mal-
Automatic anti-glare/indicator light
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in 8 seconds
toggles on/off
this section.
Compass zone can be changed to
11 seconds
correct false compass readings
13 seconds Compass enters calibration mode
Type B
Push and hold Feature:
the (Push button again for about 1 sec-
button for about: ond to change settings)
1 second Compass display toggles on/off
Compass zone can be changed to
8 seconds
correct false compass readings
10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

WIC0904 LIC1487
Type A Type B
COMPASS DISPLAY If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
Push the or button for about 1 sec- less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
ond when the ignition switch is placed in the ON You can also calibrate the compass by driving
position to toggle the compass direction display your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
䊊1 on or off. The display will indicate the direction pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
that the vehicle is heading. complete circles.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West

Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Press and hold the button for about
11 seconds or the button for about
8 seconds. The current zone number will
appear in the display. Release the button.
2. Find your current location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration.
3. Press the or the button repeat-

edly to toggle through the zone numbers
until the desired number appears in the dis-
play. Once you have selected a zone num-
ber, the display will show a compass direc-
tion within a few seconds.
WIC0355

Inaccurate compass direction:
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the button for about 13 seconds or
the for about 10 seconds. The “C”
icon in the compass display will illuminate.
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles, the display
should return to normal.
CAUTION
● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
● When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light
or Brake warning light 4WD warning light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light
Charge warning light Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Tow mode ON indicator light (if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Master warning light High beam indicator light (blue) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator
light
Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) 4WD AUTO indicator light (if so equipped)
Seat belt warning light and chime Overdrive off indicator light (if so equipped) 4WD LOCK indicator light (if so equipped)
CHECKING BULBS The following lights come on briefly and then go WARNING LIGHTS
off:
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake For additional information on warnings and indi-
and place the ignition switch to the ON position cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
without starting the engine. The following lights , , , , , this section.
will come on: If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
, or , , , , electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.

Anti-lock Braking System Low brake fluid warning light ● If the brake fluid level is below the
(ABS) warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON If the light comes on while the engine is running brake system has been checked at a
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) NISSAN dealer.
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This
hicle and perform the following: Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicates the ABS is operational.
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid indicator
If the ABS light comes on while the engine is
running, it may indicate the anti-lock braking sys- as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main- When the parking brake is released and the
tem is not functioning properly. Have the system tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
checked by a NISSAN dealer. manual. warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func- 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates warning system checked by a NISSAN system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See dealer. NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-
“Brake system” in the “Starting and driving” sec- ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking
tion. WARNING System (ABS) warning light” in this section.)
or Brake warning light ● Your brake system may not be working Charge warning light
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
This light functions for both the parking brake and ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest If this light comes on while the engine is running,
the foot brake systems. it may indicate the charging system is not func-
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
Parking brake indicator have your vehicle towed because driv- tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
ing it could be dangerous. the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
position, the light comes on when the parking ● Pressing the brake pedal with the en- dealer immediately.
brake is applied. gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

Low tire pressure warning: TPMS malfunction:
CAUTION
● Do not ground electrical accessories If the vehicle is being driven with low tire If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
directly to the battery terminal. Doing pressure, the warning light will illuminate. tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
so will bypass the variable control sys- A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
tem and the vehicle battery may not appears in the vehicle information display. placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
charge completely. Refer to “Variable after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
When the low tire pressure warning light
voltage control system (if so equipped) NISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
” in the “Maintenance and do-it- warning does not appear if the low tire pressure
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-
yourself” section later in this manual. warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
● Do not continue driving if the generator function.
Tire and Loading Information label located
belt is loose, broken or missing. in the driver’s door opening. The low tire For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
pressure warning light does not automati- Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
Low tire pressure warning light cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad- driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec- tenance and do-it-yourself” section in this
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure ommended pressure, the vehicle must be manual.
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
pressure of all tires except the spare. to activate the TPMS and turn off the low WARNING
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres- ● Radio waves could adversely affect
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not sure gauge to check the tire pressure. electrical medical equipment. Those
functioning properly. who use a pacemaker should contact
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is active
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON as long as the low tire pressure warning light the electric medical equipment manu-
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second remains illuminated. facturer for the possible influences be-
and turns off. fore use.
For additional information, see “Vehicle informa-
● If the light does not illuminate with the
tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”
ignition switch in the ON position, have
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
the vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealer
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and as soon as possible.
in the “In case of emergency” section.

● If the light illuminates while driving, ● Replacing tires with those not originally Power steering warning light
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or specified by NISSAN could affect the
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, proper operation of the TPMS. WARNING
pull off the road to a safe location and
● If the engine is not running or is turned
stop the vehicle as soon as possible. CAUTION off while driving, the power assist for
Driving with under-inflated tires may per-
manently damage the tires and increase ● The TPMS is not a substitute for the the steering will not work. Steering will
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to be harder to operate.
the likelihood of tire failure. Serious ve-
hicle damage could occur and may lead check the tire pressure regularly. ● When the power steering warning light
to an accident and could result in serious ● If the vehicle is being driven at speeds illuminates with the engine running,
personal injury. Check the tire pressure of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the there will be no power assist for the
for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure TPMS may not operate correctly. steering. You will still have control of
to the recommended COLD tire pressure the vehicle, but the steering will be
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa- ● Be sure to install the specified size of much harder to operate. Have the
tion label located in the driver’s door tires to the 4 wheels correctly. power steering system checked by a
opening to turn the low tire pressure Master warning light NISSAN dealer.
warning light OFF. If the light still comes
on while driving after adjusting the tire When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
When the ignition is in the ON position, the master
pressure, a tire may be flat. If you have a the power steering warning light illuminates. After
warning light illuminates if any of the following are
flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as starting the engine, the power steering warning
displayed on the vehicle information display.
soon as possible. light turns off. This indicates that the electric
● No key warning power steering system is operational. If the
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
● Low fuel warning power steering warning light illuminates while the
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function engine is running, it may indicate the power
● Low windshield-washer fluid warning steering system is not functioning properly and
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute. ● Parking brake release warning may need servicing. Have the hydraulic pump
The light will remain on after 1 minute. electric power steering system checked by a
● Door/liftgate open warning NISSAN dealer. See “Power steering system” in
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or ● Loose fuel cap the “Starting and driving” section.
system resetting.
● Check tire pressure warning
Seat belt warning light and and pretensioner systems need servicing and 4WD warning light (if so
your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
chime equipped)
● The supplemental air bag warning light re-
The light and chime remind you to fasten your mains on after approximately 7 seconds. The 4WD warning light comes on when the igni-
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the tion switch is placed in the ON position. It turns
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START ● The supplemental air bag warning light off soon after the engine is started.
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s flashes intermittently.
If the engine or vehicle is not functioning properly,
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime ● The supplemental air bag warning light does the warning light will either remain illuminated or
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s not come on at all. blink. See “4WD warning light” in the “Starting
seat belt is securely fastened.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental and driving” section.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if restraint system (air bag system) and/or the seat
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened belts with pretensioner system may not function CAUTION
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For properly. For additional details see “Supplemen- ● If the warning light comes on or blinks
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in tal restraint system” in the “Safety—Seats, seat during operation, have your vehicle
the ON position, the system does not activate the belts and supplemental restraint system” section checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
warning light for the front passenger. of this manual. possible.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat ● Do not drive on dry hard surface roads
belts and supplemental restraint system” section WARNING in the 4H or 4LO position. If the 4WD
for precautions on seat belt usage. If the supplemental air bag warning light warning light turns on when you are
is on, it could mean that the front air bag, driving on dry hard surface roads:
Supplemental air bag warning
side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag – in the AUTO or 4H position, shift the
light and/or pretensioner systems will not op- 4WD shift switch to 2WD.
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or – in the 4LO position, stop the vehicle,
to yourself or others, have your vehicle
START position, the supplemental air bag warn- move the shift selector to the N posi-
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then tion and shift the 4WD shift switch to
possible.
turns off. This means the system is operational. 2WD.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag,
● If the warning light is still on after the High beam indicator light inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-
above operation, have your vehicle nical and consumer information” section of this
(blue) manual.
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible. This blue light comes on when the headlight high Operation
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
INDICATOR LIGHTS are selected. The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
one of two ways:
For additional information on warnings and indi- The high beam indicator light also comes on
cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in when the passing signal is activated. ● Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
this section. emission control system malfunction has
Malfunction Indicator Light been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if
Front fog light indicator light (if (MIL) the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
so equipped) If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
the vehicle information display. If the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when while the engine is running, it may indicate a
the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
the front fog lights are ON. See “Fog light switch” potential emission control malfunction.
The light should turn off after a few
later in this section. The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come driving trips. If the light does not turn
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
Front passenger air bag status or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not
light sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons need to have your vehicle towed to the
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. dealer.
and the passenger front air bag will be OFF ● Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
depending on how the front passenger seat is After a few driving trips, the light should
engine misfire has been detected which may
being used. turn off if no other potential emission control
damage the emission control system. To re-
system malfunction exists.
For front passenger air bag status light operation, duce or avoid emission control system dam-
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec- age:
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle
restraint system” section of this manual. (72 km/h).
is not ready for an emission control system
inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for – avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades. Security indicator light Tow mode ON indicator light
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo (if so equipped)
being hauled or towed. This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position. This light comes on when the tow mode function
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking is ON.
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected The blinking security indicator light indicates that
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have the security systems equipped on the vehicle are Turn signal/hazard indicator
your vehicle towed to the dealer. operational. lights
For additional information, see “Security sys- The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
CAUTION
tems” later in this section. switch is activated.
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked Slip indicator light Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
and repaired as necessary could lead to on.
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, This indicator will blink when the VDC system is Vehicle Dynamic Control
and possible damage to the emission con- operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that
trol system. (VDC) off indicator light
the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is
nearing its traction limits. This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
Overdrive OFF indicator light
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.
(if so equipped) You may feel or hear the system working; this is
This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control sys-
normal.
tem is not operating.
This light comes on when the overdrive function
The light will blink for a few seconds after the Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
is OFF.
VDC system stops limiting wheel spin. again or restart the engine and the system will
The automatic transmission overdrive function is operate normally. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
The indicator light also comes on when
controlled by the overdrive switch. (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
you place the ignition switch in the ON position.
For additional information, see “Driving the ve- tion of this manual.
The light will turn off after approximately 2 sec-
hicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of this onds if the system is operational. If the light does
manual. not come on have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on When selecting 4WD LOCK mode while the Light reminder chime
when you place the ignition switch in the ON engine is running, the 4WD LOCK indicator light
position. The light will turn off after about 2 sec- illuminates simultaneously with the 4WD AUTO With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
onds if the system is operational. If the light stays indicator light illuminating. See “Intelligent 4WD tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
on or comes on along with the indicator system (if so equipped)” in the “Starting and
light while you are driving, have the Vehicle Dy- driving” section. Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
namic Control system checked by a NISSAN ing the vehicle.
dealer. CAUTION
NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is Do not drive on dry hard surface roads in
the LOCK mode. The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when
the system working when starting the vehicle or locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
accelerating, but this is normal. sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent
4WD AUTO indicator light (if Brake pad wear warning Key. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
so equipped) The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) AUTO indicator vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
light illuminates and then turns off. pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
When selecting 4WD AUTO mode while the soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
engine is running, the 4WD AUTO indicator light
illuminates. See “Intelligent 4WD system (if so
Key reminder chime
equipped)” in the “Starting and driving” section. A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
4WD LOCK indicator light (if
OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK
so equipped) position with the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, Make sure the ignition switch is placed in the
the Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK indicator LOCK position, and take the Intelligent Key with
light illuminates and then turns off. you when leaving the vehicle.

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
3. — go back to the previous menu

The ENTER and buttons also control audio
and control panel functions. For additional infor-
mation see, “Steering wheel switch for audio
control” in “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
voice recognition systems” section.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC
position the screens that display in the vehicle
information include:
● Active system status (if so equipped)
LIC2205 LIC2245 ● Trip computer
The vehicle information display is located to the HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE ● Tire pressure information (if so equipped)
left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
INFORMATION DISPLAY ● Fuel economy
● Vehicle settings
The vehicle information display can be changed ● Warnings
● Trip computer information using the buttons and ENTER located on
Warnings will only display if there are any pres-
● Cruise control system information the steering wheel. ent, for more information on warnings and indica-
● NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation informa- 1. — select/enter the Vehicle informa- tors see, “Vehicle information display warnings
tion tion menu items or to change from one dis- and indicators” in this section.
● Indicators and warnings (if so equipped) play screen to the next (i.e. trip, TPMS, Fuel To control what items display in the vehicle infor-
economy) mation display, see “Main menu selection” in this
● Tire Pressure information (if so equipped) section.
2. — navigate through the items in ve-
hicle information
ENTER — change or select an item in the
vehicle information display
SETTINGS Trip Computer 4WD (if so equipped)
The setting mode allows you to change the infor- The trip computer can be enabled/disabled to The 4WD can be enabled/disabled to display in
mation displayed in the vehicle information display: display in the vehicle information display when the vehicle information display when the ignition
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. switch is placed in the ON position.
● Main Menu Selection
From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Trip From the “Main Menu Selection” select “4WD” to
● Body Color
Computer” to display in the vehicle information display the 4WD information when the ignition
● Maintenance display when the ignition is placed in the ON switch is placed in the ON position.
● Alarms position. Body Color
● Vehicle Settings Fuel Economy The color of the vehicle that displays in the ve-
● Language The fuel economy can be enabled/disabled to hicle information display when the ignition switch
display in the vehicle information display when is placed in the ON position can be changed.
● Unit
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
● Welcome Effects
From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Fuel
● Factory Reset Economy” to display in the vehicle information
display when the ignition is placed in the ON
Main Menu Selection position.
The items that display can be enabled/disabled
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON Tire Pressures
position. To change the items that display. The tire pressures can be enabled/disabled to
Use the button to select and the ENTER display in the vehicle information display when
button to change a menu item: the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
● Trip Computer From the “Main Menu Selection” select “Tire
● Fuel Economy Pressures” to display in the vehicle information
display when the ignition is placed in the ON
● Tire Pressures (if so equipped) position.
● 4WD (if so equipped)

Service
WARNING
This indicator appears when the customer set The tire replacement indicator is not a
distance comes for changing the engine oil and substitute for regular tire checks, includ-
filter. You can set or reset the distance for checking tire pressure checks. See “Changing
ing or replacing these items. For scheduled main- Wheels and Tires” in “Maintenance & Do-
tenance items and intervals, see your “NISSAN It-Yourself” section. Many factors includ-
Service and Maintenance Guide.” ing tire inflation, alignment, driving habits
and road conditions affect tire wear and
Tire
when tires should be replaced. Setting the
This indicator appears when the customer set tire replacement indicator for a certain
distance comes for replacing tires. You can set or driving distance does not mean your tires
reset the distance for replacing tires. will last that long. Use the tire replace-
ment indicator as a guide only and always
LIC2370 perform regular tire checks. Failure to per-
form regular tire checks, including tire
1. scheduled service: oil and oil filter
pressure checks could result in tire fail-
2. tires ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
3. other result in serious personal injury or death.
Maintenance Other
The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts
This indicator appears when the customer set
for the reminding of maintenance intervals. To
distance comes for checking or replacing main-
change an item:
tenance items other than the engine oil, oil filter
1. Press the button. and tires. Other maintenance items can include
2. Use the button until “Settings” is se- such things as air filter or tire rotation. You can set
lected, and press ENTER. or reset the distance for checking or replacing
the items.
3. Select “Maintenance” using the but-
tons and press ENTER.
Alarms 3. To change the timer amount, use the Light Off Delay (if so equipped)
buttons and the ENTER button to save the The duration of the automatic headlights can be
This setting allows the customer to set alarms for selected time amount.
outside temperature and a timer alert. changed from 0 to 180 seconds. From the Ve-
Vehicle Settings hicle Settings menu, select “Light Off Delay”. Use
1. Press the button. the ENTER button to change the duration.
The vehicle settings allows the customer to
2. Use the button until “Settings” is se- change settings for interior lights, intelligent key Wiper with Speed
lected, and press ENTER. settings, unlock settings and other vehicle set-
The wiper with speed can be set to be ON or
tings.
3. Select “Alarms” using the buttons and OFF. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select
press ENTER. The vehicle settings can be changed using “Wiper with Speed”. Use the ENTER button to
Outside Temperature the , , and the ENTER buttons. turn this feature ON or OFF.
This setting allows the customer to Welcome light (if so equipped) I-Key Door Lock (if so equipped)
enable/disable the alert for low outside tempera- The welcome light can be set to be ON or OFF. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “I-Key
ture in the vehicle information display. From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Wel- Door Lock”. When this item is turned on, the
1. Use the buttons to select “Outside come Light”. Use the ENTER button to turn this request switch on the door is activated. When
Temperature”. feature ON or OFF. this item is turned off, the request switch on the
door is deactivated. Use the ENTER button to
2. Press the ENTER button to turn ON/OFF Auto Room Lamp
activate this function.
the outside temperature in the vehicle infor- The interior lights can be set to be ON or OFF if
mation display. Selective-Unlock
any door is unlocked. From the Vehicle Settings
Timer Alert menu, select “Auto Room Light”. Use the ENTER When this item is turned on, only the driver’s door
button to turn this feature ON or OFF. is unlocked first after the door unlock operation.
This setting allows the customer to set an alert to When the door handle request switch on the
notify the driver that the set time has been Light Sensitivity (if so equipped)
driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed
reached. The light sensitivity can be set to illuminate earlier to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is
based on the brightness outside the vehicle. unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the
1. Use the buttons to select “Timer
From the Vehicle Settings menu, select “Light door unlock operation is performed again within
Alert”.
Sensitivity”. Use the ENTER button to change the 1 minute. When this item is turned to off, all the
2. Press the ENTER button. sensitivity. doors will be unlocked after the door unlock
operation is performed once. From the Vehicle Exit Seat Slide Language
Settings menu, select “Selective Unlock”. Use
When the Exit seat slide is ON the driver’s seat The language of the vehicle information display
the ENTER button to activate this function.
will move backward for easy exit when the ignition can be changed to:
Auto Door Unlock switch is placed in the OFF position and the
● US English
driver’s door is opened.
The auto door unlock function automatically un-
● French
locks all the doors when the shift selector lever is After getting into the vehicle and placing the
placed in the P (Park) position. From the Vehicle ignition switch in the ACC position, the driver’s ● Spanish
Settings menu, select “Auto Door Unlock”. Use seat will move to the previous set position. For
the ENTER button to enable/disable this func- more information for setting the seat position see Use the , , and the ENTER buttons to
tion. “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving select and change the language of the vehicle
checks and adjustments” section. Use the EN- information display. The language of the center
Answer back horn display/navigation can be changed indepen-
TER button to enable/disable this function.
dently of the vehicle information display. For ve-
When the answer back horn is on the horn will
Exit steering up hicles not equipped with Navigation see “SET-
chirp and the hazard indicators will flash once TING button:” and vehicles equipped with
when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. When the exit steering up is turned ON, the Navigation see, “System” in the “Monitor, climate,
steering wheel moving upward for easy exit when audio, phone and voice recognition systems”
Remote Start (if so equipped)
the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the section of this manual.
The remote start function can be turned on or off. driver’s door is opened.
If the setting is OFF the vehicle cannot be started Units
After getting into the vehicle and placing the
using the intelligent key. From the Vehicle Set- The units that are shown in the vehicle informa-
ignition switch in the ACC position, the steering
tings menu, select “Remote Start”. Use the EN- tion display can be changed:
TER button to enable/disable. wheel moves to the previous position. For more
information for setting the steering wheel posi- ● Mileage
Battery Saver tion, see “Tilt and telescopic operation” in the
“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section. ● Tire pressures
The battery saver automatically turns off the
headlights after a period of time when the ignition Use the ENTER button to enable/disable this ● Temperature
switch is placed in the OFF position when the function.
headlight switch is in the , or posi-
tion.
Use the , , and the ENTER buttons to Temperature Factory Reset
select and change the units of the vehicle infor- The temperature that displays in the vehicle infor- The settings in the vehicle information display can
mation display. The units of the navigation screen mation display can be changed from: be reset back to the factory default. To reset the
can be changed independently of the vehicle vehicle information display:
● °F (Fahrenheit)
information display. For vehicles equipped with
Navigation, see “System” in the “Monitor, climate, ● °C (Celsius) 1. Press the button.
audio, phone and voice recognition systems”
Use the ENTER button to toggle choices. 2. Use the buttons to select “Settings”,
section of this manual. and press the ENTER button.
Mileage
Welcome Effects
3. Select “Factory Reset” using the but-
The welcome screen display can be turned tons and press the ENTER button.
The unit for the mileage that displays in the ve-
ON/OFF to display when the ignition switch is
hicle information display can be changed to:
placed in the ACC or ON position. To 4. Select “YES” to return all settings back to
● miles, MPG, Inch enable/disable the welcome screen: default by pressing the ENTER button.
● km/h, l/100km, cm 1. Press the button.
Use the and the ENTER buttons to select 2. Use the buttons to select “Settings”,
and change the unit. and press ENTER.
Tire Pressures (if so equipped) 3. Select “Welcome Effects” using the
The unit for tire pressure that displays in the buttons and press ENTER to turn this func-
vehicle information display can be changed to: tion ON or OFF.
● psi
● kPa
● bar
● Kgf/cm2
Use the and the ENTER buttons to select
and change the unit.
LIC2531
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 4. Push ignition to OFF 8. Low Fuel
WARNINGS AND INDICATORS 5. Key battery low 9. Low Washer Fluid
1. No Key Detected 6. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key sys- 10. Door Open
2. Key ID Incorrect tem
11. Liftgate Open
3. Shift to Park 7. Release parking brake
12. Timer Alert – Time for a driver break? Shift to Park Engine start operation for Intelligent Key
system
13. Low Outside Temperature This warning illuminates when the ignition switch
14. Power will turn off to save the battery is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift This indicator appears when the battery of the
selector is in any position other than P (Park) Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key
15. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition system and the vehicle are not communicating
16. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights switch is in the OFF position. normally.
17. Low Oil Pressure If this warning illuminates, move the shift selector If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the
to the P (Park) position or start the engine. Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal.
18. Key Registration Complete For more information see, “Intelligent Key battery
For additional information about Intelligent Key, discharge” in the “Starting and driving” section.
19. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air (if so equipped) see “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-
20. TPMS Error driving checks and adjustments” section. Release Parking brake
21. Remote Start (if so equipped) Push ignition to OFF This warning illuminates in the message area of
the vehicle information display when the parking
22. Loose Fuel Cap After the Push ignition to OFF warning illumi- brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
nates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition
Low Fuel
No Key Detected switch is placed in the ACC position when the
shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position. This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the
This warning appears when the intelligent key is
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch is To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
the ON or ACC position. Make sure the Intelli- switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re-
gent Key is inside the vehicle. position. serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
Key ID Incorrect Key Battery Low gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
This warning appears when the ignition switch is This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key Low Washer Fluid
placed from the OFF position and the intelligent battery is running out of power. This warning illuminates when the windshield-
key is not recognized by the system. You can not
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-
start the engine with an unregistered key. If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery
washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield-
with a new one. See “Battery replacement” in the
See “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in “Pre-driving washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
checks and adjustments” for more information. “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. yourself” section of this manual.
Door Open Reminder: Turn OFF headlights sure shown on the Tire and Loading Information
label. See “Low tire pressure warning light” ear-
This warning illuminates when a door has been This warning appears when the headlights are lier in this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring
opened when the engine is running. left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”
Place the headlight switch to OFF or AUTO po- section.
Liftgate open
sition. For additional information, see “Headlight
This warning illuminates when the liftgate has and turn signal switch” in this section. TPMS Error
been opened when the engine is running. This warning appears when there is a error with
Low Oil Pressure
Timer Alert – Time for a driver break? your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the
This warning appears in message area of the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
This indicator appears when the set time is vehicle information display if low oil pressure is
Push to start (if so equipped)
reached. The time can be set up to 6 hours. For detected. This gauge is not designed to indicated
setting the timer see, “Timer alert” in this section. low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is This warning appears in the vehicle information
not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use display when the vehicle has been started using
Low Outside Temperature the remote start function. To start the vehicle,
the dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil”
This warning appears if the outside temperature in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section. apply the brake and place the ignition switch in
is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be the ON position.
Key registration complete
changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit, see Loose Fuel Cap
“Temperature” earlier in this section. This appears when a new intelligent key is regis-
tered to the vehicle. This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
Power will turn off to save the battery not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air warning (if so refueled. See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
This warning appears in message area of the
equipped) checks and adjustments” section of this manual.
vehicle information display after a period of time if
the shift selector has not moved from the P (Park) This warning appears when the low tire pressure
position. warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
pressure is detected. The warning appears each
CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual
time the ignition switch is placed in the ON
This warning illuminates when the there is a prob- position as long as the low tire pressure warning
lem with the CVT system. If this warning comes light remains illuminated. If this warning appears,
on, have the system checked by a NISSAN stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of
dealer. all 4 tires to the recommended COLD tire pres-
SECURITY SYSTEMS
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al- onds the vehicle security system automati-
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a cally shifts into the armed phase. The
brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in security light begins to flash once every
the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when 3 seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm
unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by
park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position, the sys-
Many devices offering additional protection, such
tem will not arm.
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply ● Even when the driver and/or passen-
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer gers are in the vehicle, the system will
may also offer such equipment. Check with your activate with all the doors, hood and
insurance company to see if you may be eligible trunk lid locked with the ignition
for discounts for various theft protection features. switch placed in the LOCK position.
LIC2385 When placing the ignition switch in the
How to arm the vehicle security ACC or ON position, the system will be
Your vehicle may has two types of security sys-
tems: system released.
● Vehicle security system 1. Close all windows. (The system can be Vehicle security system activation
armed even if the windows are open.)
● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System The vehicle security system will give the following
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle. alarm:
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk/liftgate. ● The headlights blink and the horn sounds
The vehicle security system provides visual and Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with
intermittently.
audible alarm signals if someone opens the the Intelligent Key, door handle request
doors, trunk lid or the hood when the system is switch (if so equipped), power door lock ● The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-
armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type switch or mechanical key. riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates if
system that activates when a vehicle is moved or the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
when a vibration occurs. can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door
comes on. The security light stays on for
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys- with the key, or by pressing the button
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec- on the Intelligent Key.
The alarm is activated by: FCC Notice:
● opening the door or hood without using the For USA:
key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is
This device complies with part 15 of the
unlocked by releasing the door inside lock
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
switch).
lowing two conditions; (1) This device may
How to stop an activated alarm not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re-
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s ceived, including interference that may
door or the trunk/liftgate with the key, pressing cause undesired operation of the device.
the button on the Intelligent Key, or press-
ing the request switch on the driver’s or passen- NOTE:
ger’s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the
door handle. Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
LIC0474
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ance could void the user’s authority to op-
SYSTEM erate the equipment. Security indicator light
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not For Canada: The security indicator light blinks whenever the
allow the engine to start without the use of a This device complies with RSS-210 of In- ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC
registered key. dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-
following two conditions; (1) This device hicle Immobilizer System is operational.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
may not cause harmful interference, and (2) If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
this device must accept any interference functioning, the light will remain on while the
received, including interference that may ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
cause undesired operation of the device.
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by

WARNING
snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect
In freezing temperatures the washer solu- its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to
tion may freeze on the window and ob- the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that
scure your vision which may lead to an is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately
accident. Warm the window with the de- 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the
froster before you wash the window. wiper.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir tank is empty.
● Do not fill the window washer reservoir WIC1434
with washer fluid concentrates at full SWITCH OPERATION
strength. Some methyl alcohol based
washer fluid concentrates may perma- The windshield wiper and washer operates when
nently stain the grille if spilled while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
filling the window washer reservoir. Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with following speed:
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid 䊊
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
into the window washer reservoir. Do can be adjusted by turning the knob toward
not use the window washer reservoir to 䊊A (Slower) or 䊊 B (Faster). Also, the inter-
mix the washer fluid concentrate and mittent operation speed varies in accor-
water. dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-
tent operation speed will be faster.)

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
䊊
2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation
WARNING
䊊
3 High (HI) — continuous high speed opera- In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion tion may freeze on the window and ob-
Push the lever up 䊊 4 to have one sweep opera- scure your vision. Warm the rear window
tion (MIST) of the wiper. with the defroster before you wash the
rear window.
Pull the lever toward you 䊊 5 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
● Do not operate the washer if the reser-
voir is empty.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid LIC2398
reservoir with washer fluid concen- If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted
trates at full strength. Some methyl al- by snow etc., the wiper may stop moving to
cohol based washer fluid concentrates protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper
may permanently stain the grille if switch to OFF and remove the snow etc. on and
spilled while filling the windshield- around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn
washer fluid reservoir. the switch ON again to operate the wiper.
● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with The rear window wiper and washer operate when
water to the manufacturer’s recom- the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the
mended levels before pouring the fluid switch clockwise from the OFF position to oper-
into the windshield-washer fluid reser- ate the wiper.
voir. Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid 䊊
1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation
concentrate and water. (not adjustable)
䊊
2 Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-
tion
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
Push the switch forward 䊊 3 to operate the
washer. Then the wiper will also operate several
times.
WIC1554 WIC1460
Type A Type B
To defrost the rear window glass and outside NOTE:
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and The top and bottom few rows of wires on
push the rear window defroster switch on. The the rear window are not part of the rear
rear window defroster indicator light on the window defroster system. These wires
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn make up the antenna for the audio system.
the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
WIC1435 WIC1436 WIC1510

Type A Type B Type C
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
䊊
1 When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
䊊
2 When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.

NOTE:
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine run- Autolight activation sensitivity and the
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle time delay for autolight shutoff can be ad-
battery. justed. See “Vehicle information display” in
this section.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion 䊊1 .
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
LIC2351 Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a
door is opened and left open, the headlights
Autolight system remain ON for a period of time. If another door is
The autolight system allows the headlights to turn opened while the headlights are on, then the
on and off automatically. The autolight system timer is reset.
can: To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, the OFF, , or position.
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
tomatically when it is dark.
● Turn off all the lights when it is light.
● Keep all the lights on for a period of time after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.

Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or position, the headlights will turn off after
a period of time.
After the headlights automatically turn off with the
headlight switch in the or position,
the headlights will illuminate again if the headlight
switch is moved to the OFF position and then
turned to the or position.
CAUTION
LIC2237 WIC1438
Even though the battery saver feature au-
Be sure you do not put anything on top of Headlight beam select tomatically turns off the headlights after a
the autolight sensor located in the top side period of time, you should turn the head-
䊊1 of the instrument panel. The autolight 䊊
1 To select the high beam function, push the light switch to the OFF position when the
sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov- lever forward. The high beam lights come on engine is not running to avoid discharging
ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is and the light illuminates. the vehicle battery.
dark out and the headlights will illuminate.
If this occurs while parked with the engine 䊊
2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam. DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON 䊊
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the (Canada only)
position, your vehicle’s battery could be- headlight high beams on and off.
come discharged. The daytime running lights automatically illumi-
nate when the engine is started with the parking
brake released. The daytime running lights oper-
ate with the headlight switch in the OFF position
or in the position. Turn the headlight switch
to the position for full illumination when
driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
LIC2389 WIC1439
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
CONTROL Turn signal
Push the “+” button 䊊A to increase the bright-
ness of instrument panel lights when driving at 䊊
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
night.
pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.
Push the “-” button 䊊
B to decrease the bright-
ness of instrument panel lights when driving at Lane change signal
night. 䊊
2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
The turn signal will flash three times automati-
cally.

The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.
WIC1440 WIC1513
Type A Type B
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the position, then turn the fog light
switch to the position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on,
then turn the fog light switch to the posi-
tion.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.

HORN HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
monitor elevated seat temperatures or
have an inability to feel pain in body parts
that contact the seat. Use of the seat
heater by such people could result in se-
rious injury.
CAUTION
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
LIC2227 LIC1543
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon of the The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. ● Do not use the seat heater for extended
steering wheel. periods or when no one is using the
1. Start the engine. seat.
WARNING 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as ● Do not put anything on the seat which
desired. The indicator light in the switch will insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
illuminate. ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
could affect proper operation of the
may become overheated.
supplemental front air bag system. Tam- The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
pering with the supplemental front air bag automatically turning the heater on and off. ● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
system may result in serious personal The indicator light will remain on as long as the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
injury. object. This may result in damage to the
the switch is on.
heater.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you ● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch should be removed immediately with a
off. dry cloth.

HEATED REAR SEATS (if so
equipped)
● When cleaning the seat, never use WARNING ● When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials. Do not use or allow occupants to use the
lar materials.
seat heater if you or the occupants cannot
● If any malfunctions are found or the monitor elevated seat temperatures or ● If any malfunctions are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the have an inability to feel pain in body parts heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked that contact the seat. Use of the seat switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer. heater by such people could result in se- by a NISSAN dealer.
rious injury.
CAUTION
● The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
● Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
● Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if so
equipped)
3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
LIC1543 LIC0421
The rear seats are warmed by built-in heaters. The heated steering wheel system is designed to
The switches are located on the rear of the front operate only when the surface temperature of the
center console and can be operated indepen- steering wheel is below approximately 68°F
dently of each other. (20°C).
1. Start the engine. Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm
the steering wheel after the engine starts. The
2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as
indicator light will come on.
desired. The indicator light in the switch will
illuminate. If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is
below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
steering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C),
automatically turning the heater on and off.
then turn off automatically.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on. Push the switch again to turn the heated steering
wheel off manually. The indicator light will go off.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT
SWITCH (if so equipped)
NOTE: 3. Adjust the desired amount of air using the

control knob. The climate controlled seat
The heated steering wheel switch is
blower remains on low speed for approxi-
equipped with a 30 minute timer. After the
mately 60 seconds after turning the switch
switch has been activated for 30 minutes,
on or selecting the desired temperature.
the system will automatically turn off. If the
surface temperature of the steering wheel 4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or
is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch is cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be
turned on, the system will not heat the sure to turn the control knob to the Off
steering wheel. This is not a malfunction. (center) position. The indicator light 䊊
B on
the control knob goes off with the switch in
the off (center) position.
To check the air filter for the climate controlled
seat, contact a NISSAN dealer.
SIC4334
The climate controlled seat warms up or cools WARNING
down the front seat by blowing warm or cool air Do not use or allow occupants to use the
from under the surface of the seat. The climate climate controlled seats if you or the oc-
control switch is located on the center console. cupants can not monitor seat tempera-
The climate controlled seat can be operated as tures or have an inability to feel pain in
follows: those body parts in contact with the seat.
Use of the climate controlled seats by
1. Start the engine. such people could result in serious injury.
2. Turn the control knob 䊊 A to the heat side 䊊
1
or the cool side 䊊
2 . The indicator light 䊊B on
the control knob will illuminate.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so
OFF SWITCH equipped)
CAUTION
● The battery could run down if the cli-
mate control seat is operated while the
engine is not running.
● Do not use the climate control seat for
extended periods or when no one is
using the seat.
● Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
● Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
LIC2315 LIC2231
objects. This may result in damage to
the climate controlled seat. The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle To use the outlets for devices that require 120v
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv- power, place the ignition in the ON position and
● Any liquid spilled on the seat should be
ing conditions. push the power inverter switch.
removed immediately with a dry cloth
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC The switch will illuminate when enabled.
● The climate controlled seat has an air system reduces the engine output to reduce
filter. Do not operate the climate con- wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced CAUTION
trolled seat without an air filter. This even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
may result in damage to the system. maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck ● Use power outlets with the engine run-
● When cleaning the seat, never use vehicle, turn the VDC system off. ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi- battery.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
lar materials. switch. The indicator will come on. ● Do not attempt to use this while driving.
● If any malfunctions are found or the Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the ● Do not use double adapters or more
climate controlled seat does not oper- engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy- than one electrical accessory, doing so
ate, turn the switch off and have the namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and could significantly drain the battery of
system checked by your NISSAN dealer. driving” section. your vehicle.

TOW MODE SWITCH POWER OUTLETS
For additional information, refer to “Tow mode” in

the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion later in this manual.
LIC2390 LIC2391
Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy Instrument Panel
trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle 12V OUTLETS
in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light
trailer/light load will not cause any damage. How- The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
ever, fuel economy may be reduced, and the
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
transmission/engine driving characteristics may
feel unusual. The front and center console power outlets are
powered only when the ignition switch is in the
Press the tow mode switch to activate tow mode. ACC or ON position.
The indicator light on the instrument panel illumi-
nates when tow mode is selected. Press the tow
mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF.
Tow mode is automatically canceled when the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquid to contact the outlet.
LIC2408 LIC2236
Center Console Cargo Area
CAUTION ● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
battery.
or immediately after use.
● Avoid using power outlets when the air
● Only certain power outlets are designed
conditioner, headlights or rear window
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
defroster is on.
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN ● Before inserting or disconnecting a
dealer for additional information. plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
● Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.

STORAGE
● Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
● Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
● Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
● When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
LIC2407 liquid to contact the outlet. LIC2392
2nd Row Front Console
120V OUTLET (if so equipped) MAP POCKETS
CAUTION
● The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
● Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
● Do not use double adaptors or more
than one electrical accessory.

CAUTION
● Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
LIC2232 LIC2312
SEATBACK POCKETS SUNGLASSES HOLDER
There are two seatback pockets located on the To open the sunglasses holder, push and release
back of the driver and passenger seats. The 䊊1 .
pockets can be used to store maps.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.

LIC2387 LIC2395 LIC2212
Front console Rear door Bench seat
CUP HOLDERS CAUTION
Do not recline the rear seatback when you
use the cup holders on the rear armrest.
Doing so may cause the beverages to spill
over, and if they are hot, they may scald
the passengers.

LIC2242 LIC2393 LIC2394
3rd row Bottle holder — front Bottle holder — rear
CAUTION CAUTION
● Avoid abrupt starting and braking when ● Do not use bottle holder for any other
the cup holder is being used to prevent objects that could be thrown about in
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it the vehicle and possibly injure people
can scald you or your passenger. during sudden braking or an accident.
● Use only soft cups in the cup holder. ● Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
Hard objects can injure you in an containers.
accident.

LIC2243 WIC1120 LIC0702
GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX Lower half
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the Upper half Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the
master key when locking 䊊 1 or unlocking 䊊 2 the lower half of the console box. A power outlet is
glove box. Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the located inside the console box and there is stor-
upper half of the console box. age for compact discs.
WARNING The upper half of the console box may be used for
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to storage of cellular phones. An access hole is
help prevent injury in an accident or a provided at the front of the upper half of the
sudden stop. console box for a phone or iPod® cord routing to
the power outlet.

WARNING
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
● Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure
cargo.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-
gage area. It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.
LIC2214 LIC2208 In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
STORAGE TRAY LUGGAGE HOOKS injured or killed.
WARNING When securing items using luggage hooks lo- ● Do not allow people to ride in any area
cated on the back of the seat or side finisher do of your vehicle that is not equipped with
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs (29 N) to seats and seat belts.
help prevent injury in an accident or sud- a single hook.
den stop. ● The child restraint top tether strap may
The luggage hooks that are located on the floor be damaged by contact with items in
should have loads less then 110 lbs (490 N) to a the cargo area. Secure any items in the
single hook. cargo area. Your child could be seri-
ously injured or killed in a collision if
The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo the top tether strap is damaged.
with ropes or other types of straps.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.

Do not apply any load directly to the roof side
rails. Cross bars must be installed before apply-
ing load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the vehicle.
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and
rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the
F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-
cated on the driver’s door pillar). For more infor-
mation regarding GVWR and GAWR, see “Ve-
hicle loading information” in the “Technical and
customer information” section.
LIC2244 LIC2386 WARNING

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN ROOF RACK (if so equipped) ● Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
loaded at or near the cargo carrying
To access the floor storage area, push down 䊊 1 Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are avail- capacity, especially if the significant
to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle to able through your NISSAN dealer. Contact an portion of that load is carried on the
lift the luggage board. NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equipment cross bars.
information.
● Heavy loading of the cross bars has the
Always distribute the luggage evenly on the cross potential to affect the vehicle stability
bars. Do not load more than 150 lb (68 kg) on the and handling during sudden or unusual
cross bars. Observe the maximum load limit handling maneuvers.
shown on the cross bars or roof carriers when ● Roof rack cross bars should be evenly
you attach them on the roof cross bars. Contact distributed.
an NISSAN dealer for crossbar or other equip-
ment information. ● Do not exceed maximum roof rack
cross bars load.

WINDOWS
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or POWER WINDOWS

straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, WARNING
unsecured cargo could cause personal ● Make sure that all passengers have
injury. their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
CAUTION windows. Use the window lock switch
Always install the cross bars onto the roof to prevent unexpected use of the power
side rails before loading cargo of any kind. windows.
Loading cargo directly onto the roof side ● Do not leave children unattended inside
rails or the vehicle’s roof may cause ve- the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
hicle damage. tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious LIC2396
accidents. 1. Window lock button
The power windows operate when the ignition 2. Power door lock switch
switch is placed in the ON position, or for a 3. Front passenger side automatic switch
period of time after the ignition switch is placed in 4. Right rear passenger side
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s 5. Left rear passenger side
door is opened during this period of time, the 6. Driver side automatic switch
power to the windows is canceled.

Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold down until the de-
sired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold up until the desired window
position is reached.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock LIC2397 LIC2311
function. Front passenger’s power window Rear power window switch
switch The rear power window switches open or close
The passenger’s window switch operates only only the corresponding windows. To open the
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊1 . To
the window partially, push the switch down lightly close the window, pull the switch up 䊊2 .
until the desired window position is reached. To
close the window partially, pull the switch up until
the desired window position is reached.

MOONROOF (if so equipped)
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
LIC0410 cannot be detected. Make sure that all LIC2313
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
Automatic operation the vehicle before closing the window. AUTOMATIC MOONROOF
To fully open a window, press the window switch If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced, The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
down to the second detent and release it; it need or jump started, the power window auto-reverse switch is placed in the ON position. The auto-
not be held. The window automatically opens all function may not operate properly. If this occurs, matic moonroof is operational for a period of time,
the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up please contact the dealer to re-initialize the even if the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
while the window is opening. power window auto-reverse system. OFF position. If the driver’s door or the front
passenger’s door is opened during this period of
To fully close a window, pull the switch up to the If the control unit detects something caught in a time, the power to the moonroof is canceled.
second detent and release it; it need not be held. window equipped with automatic operation as it
To stop the window, press the switch down while is closing, the window will be immediately low-
the window is closing. ered.

Sliding the moonroof 6. Release the switch, initialization is complete When closing:
if the moonroof operates normally.
To fully open or close the moonroof, push the If the control unit detects something caught in the
switch to the open 䊊2 or close 䊊 1 position and If the moonroof does not operate properly after moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
release it; it need not be held. The roof will performing the procedure above, have your ve- will immediately open backward.
automatically open or close all the way. To stop hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.
When tilting down:
the roof, push the switch once more while it is
Auto-reverse function (when closing or If the control unit detects something caught in the
opening or closing.
tilting down the moonroof) moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
Tilting the moonroof mediately tilt up.
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto- If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
switch to the tilt up position 䊊1 and release it; it matic operation when the ignition switch is peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push placed in the ON position or for a period of time pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
the switch to the tilt down position 䊊 2 . after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
position. gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
Restarting the moonroof switch
Depending on the environment or driving moonroof.
If the moonroof does not operate properly, per-
form the following procedure to initialize the WARNING
be activated if an impact or load similar to
moonroof operation system.
something being caught in the moonroof ● In an accident you could be thrown from
1. Turn ignition switch ON. occurs. the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
2. Press and hold the moonroof tilt switch for-
WARNING restraints.
ward until the moonroof stops.
There are some small distances immedi- ● Do not allow anyone to stand up or
3. Release the moonroof switch.
ately before the closed position which extend any portion of their body out of
4. Press and hold the tilt up switch within cannot be detected. Make sure that all the moonroof opening while the vehicle
6 seconds. passengers have their hands, etc., inside is in motion or while the moonroof is
the vehicle before closing the moonroof. closing.
5. The roof glass will Tilt-Down, Slide-Close,
Slide-Open, Slide-Close, Tilt-Up, Tilt-
Down.
To close the sunshade:
CAUTION
● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand ● To fully close the sunshade, push the switch
from the moonroof before opening. 䊊2 toward the close position.
● Do not place heavy objects on the WARNING

moonroof or surrounding area.
● To avoid personal injury, keep your
Sunshade hands, fingers and head away from the
sunshade arm, the arm rail and sun-
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for- shade inlet port.
ward or backward.
● Do not allow children near the rear sun-
If the moonroof does not close shade system. They could be injured.
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the ● Do not place objects on or near the rear
moonroof. LIC2228 sunshade. This could cause improper
operation or damage it.
PANORAMIC SUNSHADE (if so
equipped) ● Do not pull or push the rear sunshade.
This could cause improper operation or
The panoramic sunshade operates when the ig- damage it.
nition switch is in the ON position. The sunshade
switch is located near the roof console. When CAUTION
opening or closing the sunshade the switch need
not be held. ● Do not place objects (such as newspa-
pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the sun-
To open the sunshade: shade inlet port. Doing so may entangle
● To fully open the sunshade, push the switch these objects in the sunshade when it is
䊊1 toward the open position. extending or retracting, causing im-
proper operation or damage to the
sunshade.

● Do not push the sunshade arm with 5. Sunshade drive cable will travel in the open
WARNING
your hands, etc., as this may deform it. direction for .394 in. (10 mm) than reverse
Improper operation or damage to the direction and stop at the normal close posi- There are some small distances immedi-
sunshade may result. tion. ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all of
● Do not put any object into the sunshade 6. Release the sunshade close switch. Initial- the passengers have their hands, etc., in-
inlet port as this may result in improper ization procedure is complete. side the vehicle before closing the
operation or damage the sunshade. sunshade.
If the moonroof does not operate properly after
● Do not hang any object on the arm rail performing the procedure above, have your ve-
as this may result in improper operation hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer.
or damage the sunshade.
Auto-reverse function (when closing
● Do not forcefully pull the sunshade. Do-
ing so may elongate the sunshade. Im- the sunshade)
proper operation or damage to the sun- The auto-reverse function can be activated when
shade may result. the sunshade is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
Restarting the sunshade switch
position or for a period of time after the ignition
If the sunshade does not operate properly, per- switch is placed in the OFF position.
form the following procedure to initialize the sun-
shade operation system. Depending on the environment or driving
1. Switch the vehicle ignition to the ACCES- be activated if an impact or load similar to
SORY or RUN mode. something being caught in the sunshade
2. Press and hold the sunshade close switch. occurs.
3. Sunshade will begin moving towards the
close position only while the switch is con-
tinually pressed. (this disables the obstacle
detection).
4. Sunshade will stop for about 4 seconds.
INTERIOR LIGHT
NOTE:
The footwell lights and step lights illumi-
nate when the driver and passenger doors
are open regardless of the interior light
switch position. These lights will turn off
automatically after a period of time while
doors are open to prevent the battery from
becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
LIC2302 LIC2303
When the ON switch 䊊 1 is pressed, the footwell CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so
equipped), map lights and rear personal lights The console light will turn on whenever the park-
ing lights or headlights are illuminated.
will automatically turn on and stay on for a period
of time when: The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the illumination brightness control.
● The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent
Key, a key or the request switch (if so
equipped) while all doors are closed and the
ignition switch is in the OFF position.
● When individually pushed.
When the OFF switch 䊊 2 is pushed, the interior
lights do not illuminate even when pushed.

PERSONAL LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS CARGO LIGHT
LIC1413 LIC2304 SIC2063A

To turn on the personal lights, press and release Push the button to turn the map lights on. To turn The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-
the switch 䊊1 . them off, press the button again. position switch. To operate, push the switch to
To turn the personal lights off, press and release the desired position.
the switch 䊊 CAUTION
1 .
䊊
1 ON: The light is illuminated.
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result 䊊
2 DOOR: The light illuminates when the lift-
in a discharged battery. gate is opened. The light turns off when the
liftgate is closed.
䊊
3 OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless
of liftgate position or lock status.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (Type A) (if so
equipped)
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time ● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
with the engine stopped. This could result devices such as garage doors, gates, home
in a discharged battery. and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
curity systems.
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehi-
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-
nected, HomeLink® will retain all program-
ming.
Once the HomeLink® Universal Trans-
ceiver is programmed, retain the original
LIC2363 transmitter for future programming proce-
The Type A system does not have an IV 䊊 1 on the dures (Example: new vehicle purchases).
back of the mirror. Move the mirror to see if the IV Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed
is present. If the IV is not on the mirror, use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons
procedure in this section to program the should be erased for security purposes. For
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. If the IV is on additional information, refer to “Program-
the mirror, use the procedure in “HomeLink® ming HomeLink®” later in this section.
universal transceiver (Type B) (if so equipped)”.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides
a convenient way to consolidate the functions of
up to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.

WARNING
● Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
verse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards be-
came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
rage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features in- SIC3612 SIC3613
creases the risk of serious injury or
death. PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® 3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold both the HomeLink® button you want
● During the programming procedure If you have any questions or are having difficulty to program and the hand-held transmitter
your garage door or security gate will programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to
button.
open and close (if the transmitter is the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or
within range). Make sure that people or call 1-800-355-3515. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
objects are clear of the garage door, 1. To begin, press and hold the two outer been completed.
gate, etc. that you are programming. HomeLink® buttons (to clear the memory) 4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned until the indicator light 䊊
A blinks slowly (after light on the HomeLink® flashes, changing
off while programming the HomeLink® 20 seconds). Release both buttons. from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing
Universal Transceiver. 2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both
HomeLink® surface. buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-
ing light indicates successful programming.
To activate the garage door or other pro-
grammed device, press and hold the pro- quickly and firmly press and release the NOTE:
grammed HomeLink® button — releasing HomeLink® button you’ve just programmed.
When programming a garage door opener,
when the device begins to activate. Press and release the HomeLink® button up
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-
to 3 times to complete the training.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink® ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns 8. Your HomeLink® button should now be pro- sible damage to the garage door opener
solid, HomeLink® has picked up a “rolling grammed. (To program the remaining components.
code” garage door opener signal. You will HomeLink® buttons for additional door or
need to proceed with the next steps to train gate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.) OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
the HomeLink® to complete the program- UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
ming which may require a ladder and an- 9. If you have any questions or are having diffi-
culty programming your HomeLink® buttons, The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver (once
other person for convenience.
refer to the HomeLink® web site at: programmed) may now be used to activate the
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro- www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515 garage door, etc. To operate, simply press the
gram button located on the garage door appropriate programmed HomeLink® Universal
opener’s motor to activate the “training NOTE: Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will
mode”. This button is usually located near illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
the antenna wire that hangs down from the
motor. If the wire originates from under a
“clear” all previously programmed PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
HomeLink® buttons. DIAGNOSIS
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to
access the program button. PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
NOTE:
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS hand-held transmitter information:
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand- ● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
Once you have pressed and released the
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec- with new batteries.
program button on the garage door open-
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you ● position the hand-held transmitter with its
HomeLink®, continue to press and hold the
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7. battery area facing away from the
HomeLink® button (see steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-
Use the help of a second person for conve- HomeLink® surface.
gramming HomeLink®”) while you press and re-
nience to assist when performing this step.
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every ● press and hold both the HomeLink® and
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas- 2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ing the garage door opener program button, (indicating successful programming). ruption.
● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 2. When the indicator light begins to flash FCC Notice:
3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
For USA:
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in hand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 -
that position for up to 15 seconds. If 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. This device complies with Part 15 of the
HomeLink® is not programmed within that FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
time, try holding the transmitter in another
button. not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times. 4. The HomeLink® indicator light will flash, first device must accept any interference re-
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator ceived, including interference that may
If you have any questions or are having difficulty cause undesired operation.
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to
buttons.
the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com NOTE:
or call 1-800-355-3515. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
has now been reprogrammed. The new device proved by the party responsible for compli-
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED can be activated by pushing the HomeLink® ance could void the user’s authority to op-
INFORMATION button that was just programmed. This procedure erate the equipment.
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, will not affect any other programmed HomeLink®
buttons. For Canada:
to clear all programming, press and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the following two conditions: (1) this device
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE codes of any non-rolling code device that has may not cause interference, and (2) this
HOMELINK® BUTTON been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the device must accept any interference, in-
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu- cluding interference that may cause unde-
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Trans- facturer or dealer of those devices for additional sired operation of the device.
ceiver button, complete the following. information.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but- When your vehicle is recovered, you will
ton. Do not release the button until step 4 need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-
has been completed. sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (Type B) (if so
equipped)
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:
WARNING
● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF) ● Do not use the HomeLink® Universal
devices such as garage doors, gates, home Transceiver with any garage door
and office lighting, entry door locks and se- opener that lacks safety stop and re-
curity systems. verse features as required by federal
● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No safety standards. (These standards be-
separate batteries are required. If the vehi- came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-
rage door opener which cannot detect
nected, HomeLink® will retain all program-
an object in the path of a closing garage
ming. door and then automatically stop and
Once the HomeLink® Universal Trans- reverse, does not meet current federal
ceiver is programmed, retain the original safety standards. Using a garage door
LIC2363 transmitter for future programming proce- opener without these features in-
creases the risk of serious injury or
The Type B system can be identified by the IV 䊊 1 dures (Example: new vehicle purchases).
Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed death.
on the back of the mirror. Move the mirror to see
if the IV is present. If the IV is on the mirror, use the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons ● During the programming procedure
procedure in this section to program the should be erased for security purposes. For your garage door or security gate will
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . Otherwise, additional information, refer to “Program- open and close (if the transmitter is
use the procedure in “HomeLink® universal ming HomeLink®” later in this section. within range). Make sure that people or
transceiver (Type A) (if so equipped)”. objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides
a convenient way to consolidate the functions of ● Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
up to three individual hand-held transmitters into off while programming the HomeLink®
one built-in device. Universal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
NOTE:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-
tion when programming HomeLink®. It is
also recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink®
for quicker programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency. LIC2365 LIC2366
1. Position the end of your hand-held transmit- 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and 3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink®
ter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm) away from the hold the desired HomeLink® button and button and observe the indicator light.
handheld transmitter button. DO NOT re-
HomeLink® surface,
HomeLink® indicator light 䊊
keeping
1 in view.
the
lease until the HomeLink® indicator light 䊊1
● If the indicator light 䊊1 is
solid/continuous, programming is
flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the
indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons complete and your device should acti-
may be released. (The rapid flashing indi- vate when the HomeLink® button is
cates successful programming.) pressed and released.
● If the indicator light 䊊
1 blinks rapidly for
NOTE: two seconds and then turns to a
solid/continuous light, continue
Some devices may require you to replace
with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device.
Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in
A second person may make the following
the “Programing HomeLink® for Canadian
steps easier. Use a ladder or other device.
customers and gate openers” section.
Do not stand on your vehicle to perform
the next steps.
4. At the receiver located on the garage door during training. Similar to this Canadian law, flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the
opener motor in the garage, locate the some U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim- indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons
“learn” or “smart” button (the name and color eout” in the same manner. may be released. The rapid flashing indi-
of the button may vary by manufacturer but it cates successful training.
If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties
is usually located near where the hanging Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”
antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there training a gate operator or garage door opener
step 3 to complete.
is difficulty locating the button, reference the by using the “Training” procedures, replace
If the device was unplugged during the pro-
garage door opener’s manual. “Programming HomeLink®” Step 2 with the fol-
gramming procedure, remember to plug it
lowing:
5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” but- back in when programming is completed.
ton. NOTE: OPERATING THE HOMELINK®
6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and When programming a garage door opener, UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
hold the trained HomeLink® button for two etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”
seconds and release. Repeat the process to prevent possible damage to the The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is
“press/hold/release” sequence up to 3 garage door opener components. programmed, can be used to activate the pro-
times to complete the training process. grammed device. To operate, simply press and
HomeLink® should now activate your rolling 1. See “Programing HomeLink®” step 1 earlier release the appropriate programmed
code equipped device. in this section. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The
7. If you have any questions or are having diffi- 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and amber indicator light will illuminate while the sig-
culty programming your HomeLink® buttons, hold the desired HomeLink® button and the nal is being transmitted.
refer to the HomeLink® web site at: hand-held transmitter button. During train-
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. ing, your hand-held transmitter may auto-
matically stop transmitting. Continue to device may also be used at any time.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR press and hold the desired HomeLink® but- PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND ton while you press and re-press (“cycle”)
your hand-held transmitter every two sec- DIAGNOSIS
GATE OPENERS
onds until the frequency signal has been If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit- learned. The HomeLink® indicator light will hand-held transmitter information:
ter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several flash slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be long seconds upon successful training. DO NOT ● replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal release until the HomeLink® indicator light with new batteries.
● position the hand-held transmitter with its To clear all programming: button that was just programmed. This procedure
battery area facing away from the will not affect any other programmed HomeLink®
HomeLink® surface. 1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®
buttons.
buttons until the indicator light begins to
● press and hold both the HomeLink® and flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter- hold for longer than 20 seconds.
ruption. If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
2. Release both buttons. codes of any non-rolling code device that has
● position the hand-held transmitter 1 -
HomeLink® is now in the programming mode been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the
3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmitter in and can be programmed at any time beginning Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
that position for up to 15 seconds. If with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1. facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
HomeLink® is not programmed within that information.
time, try holding the transmitter in another REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
position – keeping the indicator light in view HOMELINK® BUTTON need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-
at all times. sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Trans-
If you have any questions or are having difficulty ceiver button, complete the following: information.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but- FCC Notice:
the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515. ton. DO NOT release the button. For USA:
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED 2. The indicator light will begin to flash after This device complies with Part 15 of the
20 seconds. Without releasing the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
INFORMATION HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro- lowing two conditions: (1) This device may
The following procedure clears the programmed gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1. not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
information from both buttons. Individual buttons device must accept any interference re-
cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®
at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515. ceived, including interference that may
can be reprogrammed, see “Reprogramming a
cause undesired operation.
single HomeLink® button” in this section. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button
has now been reprogrammed. The new device
can be activated by pushing the HomeLink®

NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Operating the manual liftgate
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Operating the power liftgate (if so equipped) . . . . . 3-24
Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Power liftgate main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Liftgate release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Liftgate position setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Opening the fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Tilt/telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Manual operation (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
How to use the remote keyless entry Automatic operation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Rearview mirror (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Remote engine start operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Canceling a remote start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Conditions the remote start will not work . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Setting memory function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
KEYS
LPD0350 WPD0427 LPD2052

Type A Type B Type C
1. Intelligent Key (2 sets) NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
2. Mechanical key
3. Key number plate (1 plate) Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-
ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System components. As many
as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and used
with one vehicle. The new keys must be regis-
tered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the
Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the reg-
istration process requires erasing all memory in
the Intelligent Key components when registering
new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that
you have to the NISSAN dealer.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
A key number plate is supplied with your keys. ● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record ● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
key numbers so it is very important to keep track extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
of your key number plate.
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
A key number is only necessary when you have key holder that contains a magnet.
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer ● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
can duplicate it. equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
CAUTION personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, SPA1951
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code Mechanical key
Key: of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
This may prevent the unauthorized use of The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle.
contains electrical components, to For information regarding the erasing To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
come into contact with water or salt procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer. knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
water. This could affect the system To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
function.
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
● Do not drop the Intelligent Key. the lock position.
● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
against another object. driver’s door and glove box.
● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration.
CAUTION
SYSTEM KEYS Any key that is not given to your dealer at the time
Always carry the mechanical key installed of registration will no longer be able to start your
in the Intelligent Key slot. You can only drive your vehicle using the master vehicle.
or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN
See “Doors” in this section and “Storage” in the
“Instruments and controls” section of this manual. Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your CAUTION
vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in Do not allow the immobilizer system key,
Valet hand-off the key head. which contains an electrical transponder,
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give The master key can be used for all the locks. to come into contact with water or salt
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me- water. This could affect system function.
The valet key cannot be used for the glove box
chanical key with you to protect your belongings.
lock.
To prevent the glove box from being opened
To protect your belongings when you leave a key
during valet hand-off, follow the procedure be-
with someone, give them the valet key only.
low.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key. Additional or replacement keys:
2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key. If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
keep the mechanical key with you.
cate your existing key. As many as five NISSAN
See “Storage” in the “Instruments and controls” Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used
section of this manual. with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN
Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to
your NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-
cause the registration process will erase the
memory of all key codes previously registered
into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.
After the registration process, these components
will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN
DOORS
When the doors are locked using one of the Opening and closing windows
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The The driver’s door key operation allows you to
doors must be unlocked to open the doors. open and close windows equipped with auto-
matic operation at the same time.
WARNING ● To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
● Always have the doors locked while key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
driving. Along with the use of seat belts, than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
this provides greater safety in the event ● To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
of an accident by helping to prevent key toward the front of the vehicle for longer
persons from being thrown from the than 1 second after the door is locked.
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open- Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
ing the doors, and will help keep out
LPD0461 NOTE:
intruders.
Driver’s side
● Before opening any door, always look When the window lock button is pressed
for and avoid oncoming traffic. LOCKING WITH KEY the key will not operate the window open or
close function.
● Do not leave children unattended inside The power door lock system allows you to lock or
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- unlock all doors at the same time.
tivate switches or controls. Unattended Turning the key toward the front 䊊
1 of the vehicle
children could become involved in seri-
locks all doors.
ous accidents.
Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊
2 of the
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
returning the key to neutral 䊊
3 (where the key can
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again 䊊 4 within 5 seconds un-
locks all doors.

Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch is moved to the
lock position and any door is open, all doors will
lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent
Key left in the vehicle and any door is open, all
doors will unlock automatically and a chime will
sound after the door is closed.
These functions help to prevent the Intelligent
Key from being accidentally locked inside the
vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
LPD2092 LPD2093 ● All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
Inside lock speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK LOCK SWITCH ● All doors unlock automatically when the ig-
KNOB To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
nition is placed in the OFF position.
To lock the door without the key, move the inside lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to The automatic unlock function can be de-
lock knob to the lock position 䊊
1 , then close the the lock position 䊊1 . When locking the door this activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-
door. way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vate the automatic door unlock system, perform
vehicle. the following procedure:
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
2 . To unlock all the doors without a key, push the 1. Close all doors.
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
side) to the unlock position 䊊
2 . 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
the position (UNLOCK) for more than
5 seconds.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will

WARNING
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once. ● Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the use a pacemaker should contact the
OFF and ON position again between each electric medical equipment manufac-
setting change. turer for the possible influences before
When the automatic door unlock system is deac- use.
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition ● The Intelligent Key transmits radio
switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock waves when the buttons are pressed.
the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the The FAA advises the radio waves may
power door lock switch (driver’s or front passen- affect aircraft navigation and communi-
ger’s side). cation systems. Do not operate the In-
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make
NOTE: LPD2049 sure the buttons are not operated unin-
The automatic door unlock function can be CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK tentionally when the unit is stored for a
changed using the Vehicle Settings in the flight.
vehicle information display. The “Auto Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
Door Unlock” choices are: from being opened accidentally, especially when The Intelligent Key system can operate all the
small children are in the vehicle. door locks using the remote controller function or
● Off pushing the request switch on the vehicle without
The child safety lock levers are located on the
● IGN OFF edge of the rear doors. taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The
operating environment and/or conditions may af-
● Shift into P When the lever is in the LOCK position, the fect the Intelligent Key system operation.
door can be opened only from the outside.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parking
CAUTION CAUTION
meter.
● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with Listed below are conditions or occur-
you when operating the vehicle. In such cases, correct the operating conditions rences which will damage the Intelligent
before using the Intelligent Key function or use Key:
● Never leave the Intelligent Key in the the mechanical key.
vehicle when you leave the vehicle. ● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
Although the life of the battery varies depending contains electrical components, to
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is come into contact with water or salt
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel- approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis- water. This could affect the system
ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves. charged, replace it with a new one. function.
Environmental conditions may interfere with the
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indi- ● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
operation of the Intelligent Key system under the
following operating conditions: cator illuminates in the Vehicle Information Dis- ● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
play. See “Vehicle Information Display” in the against another object.
● When operating near a location where “Instruments and controls” section.
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as ● Do not change or modify the Intelligent
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving Key.
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
station. ● Wetting may damage the Intelligent
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig- Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
● When in possession of wireless equipment, nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat- mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, tery life may become shorter.
and CB radio. ● Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
For information regarding replacement of a bat- extended period in an area where tem-
● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte- peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
covered by metallic materials. nance and do-it-yourself” section.
● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
● When any type of radio wave remote control As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered key holder that contains a magnet.
is used nearby. and used with one vehicle. For information about ● Do not place the Intelligent Key near
● When the Intelligent Key is placed near an the purchase and use of additional Intelligent equipment that produces a magnetic
electric appliance such as a personal com- Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer. field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
puter. personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli- strong radio waves are present near the operat-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing not function properly.
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
from each request switch 䊊1 .
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.
LPD2103
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch 䊊1 .

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.
● Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
WPD0375 LPD2104
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

PRECAUTION OPERATION
● Do not push the door handle request switch You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.
illustrated. The close distance to the door When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli- handle request switch within the range of opera-
gent Key is outside the vehicle. tion.
● After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the me-
chanical key even if any door is open.
● Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
● After locking the doors using the re-
LPD2105 LPD2106
quest switch, make sure that the doors
Locking doors NOTE: have been securely locked by operating
the door handles or the rear liftgate
1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi- ● Request switches for all doors and lift-
opener switch.
tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK gate can be deactivated when the I-Key
position and make sure you carry the Intelli- Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in ● When locking the doors using the re-
gent Key with you. the Vehicle Settings of the vehicle in- quest switch, make sure to have the
formation display. For additional infor- Intelligent Key in your possession be-
2. Close all doors. mation, see “Vehicle information dis- fore operating the request switch to
play” in the “Instruments and controls” prevent the Intelligent Key from being
3. Push any door handle request switch while left in the vehicle.
carrying the Intelligent Key with you. section of this manual.
● The request switch is operational only
4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock. ● Doors lock with the door handle request
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
switch while the ignition switch is not in the
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and tected by the Intelligent Key system.
LOCK position.
the outside buzzer sounds once.

Lockout protection
CAUTION
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci- The lockout protection may not function
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection under the following conditions:
is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed on
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors are top of the instrument panel.
locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the
vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will ● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds. side the glove box or a storage bin.
● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
NOTE: side the door pockets.
The doors may not lock when the Intelli- ● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper- side or near metallic materials.
ating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or LPD2105
your other hand. Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch again
within 1 minute to unlock all doors.
For power liftgate opening:
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Press the power liftgate request switch.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
of the following operations is performed within KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
1 minute after pushing the request switch.
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
● Opening any door. door locks using the remote keyless function of
● Pushing the ignition switch. the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
The interior light timer illuminates for a period of from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
time when a door is unlocked and the room light pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
switch is in the DOOR position.
The remote keyless entry function will not func-
The interior light can be turned off without waiting tion under the following conditions:
by performing one of the following operations.
● When the Intelligent Key is not within the
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi- operational range.
tion.
LPD2106 ● When the doors or the rear liftgate are open
NOTE: ● Locking the doors with the remote controller. or not closed securely.
Request switches for all doors and liftgate ● Switching the room light switch to the OFF ● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
can be deactivated when the I-Key Door Lock position. charged.
setting is switched to OFF in the Vehicle ● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF
Settings of the vehicle information display. position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle CAUTION
For additional information, see “Vehicle in- information display. See “Vehicle information When locking the doors using the Intelli-
formation display” in the “Instruments and display” in the “Instruments and controls” gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
controls” section of this manual. section. the vehicle.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-
quest switch to unlock the door.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.
WPD0359 WPD0360
Locking doors Unlocking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- 1. Press the button on the Intelligent
tion. Key.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button again within 5 sec-
3. Press the button on the Intelligent onds to unlock all doors.
Key.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and NOTE:
the horn beeps once. The unlocking operation can be changed in
Selective door unlock in the Vehicle Set-
5. All doors will be locked.
tings of the vehicle information display. For
additional information, see “Vehicle infor-
mation display” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one Opening windows
of the following operations is performed within
1 minute after pressing the button: The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously
open windows equipped with automatic opera-
● Opening any doors. tion.
● Pushing the ignition switch. ● To open the windows, press the but-
The interior light illuminates for a period of time ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than
when a door is unlocked and the room light 3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.
switch is in the DOOR position. The door windows will open while pressing
The light can be turned off without waiting by the button on the Intelligent Key.
performing one of the following operations: The door windows cannot be closed by
● Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi- using the Intelligent Key.
tion. WPD0414
● Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key. Releasing the rear liftgate (if so
● Switching the room light switch to the OFF equipped)
position.
The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by
● Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF performing the following:
position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle
information display. See “Vehicle information ● Press the button for longer than
display” in the “Instruments and controls” 0.5 seconds to open the rear liftgate.
section. ● Press the button again for longer than
0.5 seconds to close the rear liftgate.
When the button is pressed during the
open or close process the liftgate will reverse.

Linking the keyfob to automatic drive
positioner memory
If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive
positioner, the keyfob can be linked to a memory
setting.
See “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
WPD0415 WPD0362
Using the panic alarm Answer back horn feature
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, If desired, the answer back horn feature can be
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When de-
by pressing and holding the button on the activated and the LOCK button is
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds. pushed the hazard indicator flashes twice and
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a when the UNLOCK button is pushed, nei-
period of time. ther the hazard indicator nor the horn operates.
The panic alarm stops when:
● It has run for a period of time, or
● Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
● The request switch on the driver or passen-
ger door has been pushed and the Intelligent
Key is in range of the door handle.
NOTE: WARNING SIGNALS
If you change the answer back horn and To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
light flash feature with the Intelligent Key, pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
the vehicle information display screen will Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
show the current mode after the ignition stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
switch has been cycled from the OFF to the outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
ON position. The vehicle information dis- the instrument panel.
play screen can also be used to change the
answer back horn mode. See “Answer back When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
horn” in the “Instruments and controls” displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
section. Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the See the “Troubleshooting guide” in this section
and “Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-
and buttons for at least 2 seconds. ments and controls” section of this manual.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the answer back horn feature has
been deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
The Shift to Park warning appears on the Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
The shift selector is not in the P (Park)
When stopping the engine display and the inside warning chime position.
position.
sounds continuously.
When shifting the shift selector to the P The Push ignition to OFF warning appears The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
(Park) position in the display. position. position.
The Door Open warning appears on the
When opening the driver’s door to get out The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
display and the inside warning chime
of the vehicle position. position.
sounds continuously.
The No Key Detected warning appears on
the display, the outside chime sounds 3 The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF
times and the inside warning chime sounds position. position.
When closing the door after getting out of
for approximately 3 seconds.
the vehicle
The Shift to Park warning appears on the The ignition switch is in the ACC position Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
display and the outside chime sounds and the shift selector is not in the P (Park) tion and place the ignition switch in the
continuously. position. OFF position.
When closing the door with the inside lock The outside chime sounds for approximately
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
knob turned to LOCK 3 seconds and all the doors unlock.
When pushing the door handle request
The outside chime sounds for approximately
switch or the LOCK button on the Intelli- The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
2 seconds.
gent Key to lock the door

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
Replace the battery with a new one. (See
The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears
The battery charge is low. “Battery replacement” in the “Maintenance
on the display.
and do-it-yourself” section.)
When pushing the ignition switch to start
The No Key Detected warning appears on
the engine
the display, the outside chime sounds 3
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
times and the inside warning chime sounds
for approximately 3 seconds.
The Intelligent Key system warning light in It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent
When pushing the ignition switch Contact a NISSAN dealer.
the meter illuminates in yellow. Key system.

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so
equipped)
Laws in some local communities may restrict the REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
use of remote starters. For example, some laws
require a person using remote start to have the To use the remote start feature to start the engine
vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any perform the following:
requirements. 1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
Other conditions may affect the function of the
Remote Engine Start feature. See “Conditions 2. Press the LOCK button to lock all
the remote start will not work” in this section for doors.
additional information. 3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the
Other conditions can affect the performance of remote start button until the turn signal lights
the Intelligent Key transmitter. See “NISSAN In- illuminate. If the vehicle is not within view
telligent Key®” in this section for additional infor- press and hold the remote start but-
mation. ton for about 2 seconds.
LPD2060
REMOTE ENGINE START The following events will occur when the engine
The button will be on the NISSAN Intelli- OPERATING RANGE starts:
gent Key® if the vehicle has remote engine start.
This feature allows the engine to start from out- The remote engine start function can only be ● The parking lights will turn on and remain on
side the vehicle. used when the Intelligent Key is within the speci- as long as the engine is running.
fied operating range from the vehicle.
The following features may be affected when the ● The doors will be locked and the climate
remote start feature is used: When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or control system may come on.
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
● Vehicles with manual or automatic climate ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range ● The engine will continue to run for 10 min-
control systems will default to the last used becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for
heating or cooling mode. not function properly. an additional 10 minutes. See “Extending
engine run time” in this section.
● Vehicles equipped with heated seats may The remote engine start operating range is ap-
have this feature come on during a remote proximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle. Depress the brake and place the ignition switch
start. See “Heated seats” in the “Instruments in the ON position before driving. For further
instructions see “Driving the vehicle” in the
and controls” section for more information.
“Starting and driving” section.
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME ● Turn on the hazard warning flashers. ● The Remote Start function has been
switched to the OFF position in Vehicle Set-
The remote start feature can be extended one ● Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF. tings of the vehicle information display. For
time by performing the steps listed in “Remote additional information, see “Vehicle informa-
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START
starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will tion display” in the “Instruments and con-
be calculated as follows: WILL NOT WORK trols” section of this manual.
● The first 10 minute run time will start when The remote start will not operate if any of the The remote engine start may display a warning or
the remote start function is performed. following conditions are present: indicator in the vehicle information display. For an
● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po- explanation of the warning or indicator please see
● The second 10 minutes will start immedi- “Vehicle information display warning and indica-
ately when the remote start function is per- sition.
tors” in the “Instruments and controls” section.
formed. For example, if the engine has been ● The hood is not securely closed.
running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are
added, the engine will run for a total of ● The hazard warning lights are on.
15 minutes. ● The I–Key Indicator Light remains
A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start solid in the vehicle information display.
with an extension, are allowed between ignition
● The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the
cycles.
vehicle.
The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON
position and then back to the OFF position be- ● The ignition switch is pushed without an
fore the remote start procedure can be used Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
again. ● The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelli-
CANCELING A REMOTE START gent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is
not depressed.
To cancel a remote start, perform one of the
following: ● Two remote vehicle starts, or a single remote
start with an extension, have already been
● Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and used.
press and hold until the parking lights
turn off. ● The vehicle is not in P (Park).

HOOD LIFTGATE
WARNING
● Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from open-
ing while driving.
● Do not drive with the liftgate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
● Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
LPD2107 children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
䊊
1 Pull the hood lock release handle located WARNING
below the driver side instrument panel. The ● Always be sure that hands and feet are
hood will spring up slightly. ● Make sure the hood is completely clear of the door frame to avoid injury
closed and latched before driving. Fail- while closing the liftgate.
䊊
2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to the ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
side as illustrated with your fingertips and open and result in an accident.
raise the hood.
● If you see steam or smoke coming from
When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make the engine compartment, to avoid injury
sure it locks into place. do not open the hood.

LPD2108 LPD2063 LPD0249
OPERATING THE MANUAL Liftgate switch Instrument panel switch

LIFTGATE (if so equipped)
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors including the liftgate simultane-
ously.
To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle.
To close, lower and push the liftgate down se-
curely.

NOTE: Power Close:
The power liftgate automatically moves from the
To open, close or reverse the power lift-
fully open position to the secondary position.
gate, the shift selector must be in P (Park).
When the liftgate reaches the secondary posi-
Also, the power liftgate will not operate if
tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the
battery voltage is low.
liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close
Power Open: takes approximately 7 – 10 seconds. The power
The power liftgate automatically moves from the close feature can be activated by the switch on
fully closed position to the fully open position in the keyfob, the instrument panel and the liftgate
approximately 5 – 8 seconds. The power open opener switch 䊊 A . The hazard lights flash and a
feature can be activated by the switch on the chime sounds to indicate the power close se-
keyfob, the instrument panel switch and the lift- quence has been started.
gate request switch. The hazard lights flash and a
● If the liftgate opener switch 䊊
A is activated
LPD2109
chime sounds to indicate the power open se-
while the cinching motor is engaged, the
quence has been started.
Liftgate opener switch cinching motor will disengage and release
OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE ● The liftgate can be opened by the instrument the latch.
panel switch, liftgate request switch and the
(if so equipped) ● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-
keyfob even if the vehicle is locked. The
ond before the liftgate closes.
liftgate will individually unlock and open.
WARNING Once the liftgate is closed, its lock will align ● The switch on the liftgate can only be used
● Make sure that all passengers have to the vehicle’s lock or unlock status. to close the liftgate if the power liftgate main
their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be- switch is in the ON position.
fore closing the liftgate. ● The keyfob button must be held for 0.5 sec-
ond before the liftgate opens. Reverse:
● Do not leave children unattended inside The power liftgate will reverse direction immedi-
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac- ● The liftgate must be unlocked to open it with
ately during power open or power close if the
tivate switches or controls. Unattended the liftgate opener switch 䊊
A.
keyfob, instrument panel or liftgate switch is
children could become involved in seri- A warning chime will sound if the shift selector is pushed or if the liftgate opener switch 䊊 A is
ous accidents. moved out of P (Park) during a power open pushed. A chime will sound to announce the
operation. reversal.
Auto Reverse: To open the liftgate manually, press the liftgate
If an obstacle is detected during power open or opener switch 䊊 A and lift the liftgate.
power close, a warning chime will sound and the
To close, lower and push the liftgate down se-
liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full
curely.
open or full close position. If a second obstacle is
detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the
liftgate will enter manual mode.
A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the
liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip
during power close, the liftgate will reverse direc-
tion and return to the full open position.
NOTE:
If the pinch strip is damaged or removed, LPD2108
the power close function will not operate.
Manual Mode:
If power operation is not available, the liftgate
WARNING may be operated manually. Power operation may
There are some small distances immedi- not be available if the power liftgate main switch
ately before the closed position which is in the ON position, if multiple obstacles have
cannot be detected. Make sure that all been detected in a single power cycle, or if
passengers have their hands, etc., inside battery voltage is low.
the vehicle before closing the liftgate. If the power liftgate opener switch 䊊A is pushed
during power open or close, the power operation
will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated
manually.

LIFTGATE RELEASE
WARNING
● Always be sure the liftgate has been
closed securely to prevent it from open-
ing while driving.
● Do not drive with the liftgate open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
CAUTION
SPA2547 SPA2778
● If the power liftgate does not stay open Manual liftgate release
POWER LIFTGATE MAIN SWITCH or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at
The power liftgate operation can be turned on or any time while a continuous warning Manual liftgate release (if so equipped)
off by the power liftgate main switch on the chime sounds, do not operate the lift- If the liftgate cannot be locked or unlocked with
instrument panel. gate. There may be a pressure loss in the door lock switch or the keyfob due to a
one or both of the liftgate gas stays. discharged battery, follow these steps:
When the power liftgate main switch is pushed to Have the liftgate inspected by a
the OFF position, the power operation is not NISSAN dealer. 1. Remove the cover 䊊
A on the inside of the
available by the power liftgate switch on the liftgate.
liftgate and liftgate opener switch. ● Do not activate the power liftgate if one
or both of the liftgate gas stays are 2. Move the lever 䊊
B as illustrated to open the
Power operation is available when in the OFF removed. Damage to the liftgate or liftgate.
position by the instrument panel switch and the power liftgate mechanisms may occur.
keyfob button. Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for
repair.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR
LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING

The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height
by performing the following:
1. Open the liftgate using the request switch or
the Intelligent Key.
2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired position
and hold the liftgate (the liftgate will have
some resistance when being manually ad-
justed).
3. While holding the liftgate in position, press
and hold the liftgate switch located
on the liftgate for approximately 5 seconds
SPA2778 or until 3 beeps are heard. LPD2110
Power liftgate release (if so equipped) The liftgate will open to the selected position OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR
If the liftgate cannot be opened with the instru- setting. To change the position of the liftgate, The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks when
ment panel switch, liftgate opener switch or key- repeat steps 1-3 for setting the position of the the driver’s door is unlocked.
fob due to a discharged battery, follow these liftgate.
steps: 1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of the
following operations:
1. Remove the cover 䊊
A on the inside of the
liftgate. ● Unlock the driver’s door with the keyfob.
2. Move the lever 䊊

B as illustrated to open the ● Unlock the driver’s door with the key.
liftgate. ● Push the power door lock switch to the
Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for unlock position.
repair. ● Push the door handle request switch.
2. To open the fuel filler door, push the right
side of the fuel filler door to release.
To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and ● Do not fill a portable fuel container in ● The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-
lock the doors. the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
FUEL-FILLER CAP can cause an explosion of flammable tightened. It may take a few driving trips
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or for the message to be displayed. Failure
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly
WARNING injury or death when filling portable fuel after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning ap-
● Gasoline is extremely flammable and containers: pears may cause the Malfunction
highly explosive under certain condi- Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
– Always place the container on the
tions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
ground when filling. ● Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
Always stop the engine and do not – Do not use electronic devices when properly may cause the Malfunc-
smoke or allow open flames or sparks filling. tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.
near the vehicle when refueling. If the light illuminates because
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank with the container while you are fill-
tighten or install the cap and continue
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off ing it.
automatically. Continued refueling may to drive the vehicle. The light
– Use only approved portable fuel con- should turn off after a few driving trips.
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel tainers for flammable liquid.
spray and possibly a fire. If the light does not turn off after a
few driving trips, have the vehicle in-
● Use only an original equipment type CAUTION spected by a NISSAN dealer.
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper ● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your ● For additional information, see the
operation of the fuel system and emis- vehicle. For further information see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
sion control system. An incorrect cap “Fuel Recommendation” in the “Techni- the “Instruments and Controls” section
can result in a serious malfunction and cal and consumer information” section in this manual.
possible injury. It could also cause of this manual.
● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
the Malfunction Indicator Light flush it away with water to avoid paint
(MIL) to come on. damage.
● Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING
WARNING
● Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
● Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for
proper steering operation and comfort.
The driver’s air bag inflates with great
force. If you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
LPD2082 LPD2066 air bag if you are up against it when it
To remove the fuel-filler cap: Loose Fuel Cap warning inflates. Always sit back against the
seatback and as far away as practical
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the from the steering wheel. Always use the
remove. vehicle information display when the fuel-filler seat belts.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
1 cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has
while refueling. been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for
the message to be displayed. To turn off the
To install the fuel-filler cap: warning, perform the following:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel- 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon
filler tube. as possible. See “Fuel-filler cap”.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
single click is heard. 3. Press the next button 䊊
A on the steer-
ing wheel for about 1 second to turn off the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning 䊊 B after tight-
ening the fuel-filler cap.
CAUTION
For vehicles with automatic drive posi-
tioner: Failure to reset the tilt and tele-
scoping functions of the steering wheel,
after the vehicle’s battery has been dis-
charged, may prevent the steering wheel
position from being adjusted.
For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Both
the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be
reset after the vehicle’s battery has been dis-
charged in order to prevent the tilt and telescopic
operation from locking in one position. When the
battery has been recharged or replaced, perform
LPD2111 WPD0366
the following:
MANUAL OPERATION (if so AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so ● For telescopic operation: Adjust the switch
equipped) equipped) 䊊1 so the steering wheel moves to the most
forward and backward position 䊊 3 that can
Tilt and telescopic operation Tilt and telescopic operation be reached.
Pull the lock lever 䊊
1 down: To adjust the steering wheel move the switch 䊊
1 ● For tilt operation: Adjust the switch 䊊
1 so
● Adjust the steering wheel forward or back- in the following directions: the steering wheel moves to the highest
ward in direction 䊊
3 to the desired position.
● Adjust the steering wheel forward or back- position 䊊 2 that can be reached.
● Adjust the steering wheel up or down in ward in direction 䊊 3 to the desired tele- Performing these operations resets the range of
direction 䊊
2 to the desired position. scopic position. the steering wheel’s tilt and telescopic function.
Push the lock lever 䊊 1 up firmly to lock the ● Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
steering wheel in place. direction 䊊
2 to the desired tilt position.

SUN VISORS
Entry/Exit function 䊊
1 To block glare from the front, swing down the
sun visor.
The automatic drive positioner system will make
the steering wheel move up automatically when 䊊
2 To block glare from the side, remove the sun
the driver’s door is opened and the ignition visor from the center mount and swing the
switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver visor to the side.
get into and out of the seat more easily. The
steering wheel moves back into position when
䊊
3 Slide the extension sun visor in or out as
needed.
the driver’s door is closed and the ignition switch
is pushed. CAUTION
For more information, see “Automatic drive posi- ● Do not store the sun visor before return-
tioner” in this section. ing the extension to its original
position.
● Do not pull the extension sun visor
forcedly downward.
WPD0297

MIRRORS
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally dims during night time conditions and ac-
cording to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating.
NOTE:
LPD2067 WPD0126 Do not hang any objects over the sensors
VANITY MIRRORS REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) 䊊1 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor The night position 䊊 1 reduces glare from the sensors, resulting in improper operation.
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
Use the day position 䊊
2 when driving in daylight
mirror cover is open.
hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

For information on the compass display (if so
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
LPD0469 LPD0470
Type A - Without compass Type B - With compass
Type A and Type B To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,
press:
The indicator light 䊊2 will illuminate when the
automatic anti-glare feature is operating. ● the | button for inside mirrors without
compass.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
● the O button for inside mirrors without ● the button for inside mirrors with
compass. compass.
● the button for inside mirrors with The indicator light will turn on.
compass. For information on HomeLink® Universal Trans-
The indicator light will turn off. ceiver (if so equipped) operation, see the
“HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “In-
struments and controls” section of this manual.

WARNING
● Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
You could lose control of your vehicle
and cause an accident.
LPD2083 LPD2112
OUTSIDE MIRRORS Manual folding outside mirrors

The outside mirror remote control will operate Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position. Reverse tilt-down feature (if so
equipped)
Move the small switch 䊊 1 to select the right or left
mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position The reverse tilt-down feature will turn the se-
using the large switch 䊊 2 . lected outside mirror surface downward to pro-
vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
turn the outside mirror control switch to the left or
right position. Only one mirror can be selected at
a time.

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if
so equipped)
Move the shift selector to R (Reverse). The se- The automatic drive positioner system has three
lected mirror will turn downward. features:
The selected mirror surface will return to its origi- ● Memory storage function
nal position when any of the following have oc-
● Entry/exit function
curred:
● Seat synchronization function
● The shift selector is moved to any position
other than R (Reverse).
● The outside mirror control switch is set to the
neutral or center position.
● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
NOTE: LPD2113
If the outside mirror control switch is in the MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION
neutral position, neither mirror will turn
downward when the shift selector is moved Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering col-
to R (Reverse). umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in the
automatic drive positioner memory. Follow these
For more information regarding this feature, refer procedures to use the memory system.
to “Automatic drive positioner” in this section.
1. Set the Continuously Variable Transmission
Heated mirrors (if so equipped) (CVT) shift selector to the P (Park) position.
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, 2. Place the ignition in the ON position.
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, see “Rear window and outside 3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column,
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and and outside mirrors to the desired positions
controls” section of this manual. by manually operating each adjusting
switch. For additional information, see
“Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section, and The indicator light will blink. After the indica- 6. Move the shift selector to R (Reverse).
“Tilt/Telescopic Steering” and “Outside mir- tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to that
memory setting. 7. Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing po-
rors” in this section.
sition for backing up by operating the out-
During this step, do not place the ignition With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi- side mirror control switch.
switch in any position other than ON. tion, press the button on the keyfob. The
driver’s seat, steering wheel and outside mirrors 8. Push the SET switch and, within five sec-
4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds, will move to the memorized position. onds, push the memory switch 1 or 2 se-
push the memory switch (1 or 2). lected in step 3.
The indicator light for the pushed memory NOTE: ● The indicator light for the pushed memory
switch will come on and stay on for approxi- If a new memory position is saved to the switch will come on and stay on for approxi-
mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch. memory switch, the keyfob automatically mately five seconds after pushing the
After the indicator light goes off, the se- re-links. switch. After the indicator light goes off, the
lected positions are stored in the selected selected mirror position is stored in the se-
memory (1 or 2). Procedure for storing the outside lected memory (1 or 2).
mirror positions for best visibility when
If a new memory is stored in the same memory 9. Turn the outside mirror control switch to R
backing up
switch, the previous memory will be deleted. (Right). Repeat the above procedure to ad-
An outside mirror position for backing up can be just the right mirror position and store in the
Linking a keyfob to a stored memory stored for each memory switch (1 and 2): selected memory.
position 1. Set the parking brake. ● When the driver’s seat and outside mirrors
Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memory 2. Place the ignition in the ON position. (Do not are not in the memorized position, the out-
position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow- start the engine.) side mirror will move with the initial tilt-down
ing procedure. angle.
3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for at
1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi- least one second to operate the automatic Seat synchronization function
tion. drive positioner.
The seat synchronization function automatically
2. While the indicator light for the memory 4. Turn the outside mirror control switch to L adjusts the positions of the steering wheel and
switch being set is illuminated for 5 sec- (Left). outside mirrors when the seat is adjusted using
onds, press the button on the keyfob. 5. Depress the brake pedal. the power seat switches.
However, the steering wheel and outside mirrors Cancel or activate seat synchronization Once the memory storage function has been
will not move if the seat is adjusted over the function restarted, you can store a memory position.
maximum thresholds. The system considers that See “Memory storage function” in this sec-
The shift selector must be in the P (Park) position
the steering wheel and outside mirror adjust- tion.
with the ignition switch placed in the ACC posi-
ments are not necessary because the seat may
not be adjusted for the driving position. Note that
tion. Selecting the memorized position
the function is set to disabled as the factory Confirming memory storage Set the shift selector to the P (Park) position,
default setting. then:
● Place the ignition switch in the ON position
The seat synchronization function operates under and push the SET switch. If the main memory ● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’s
the following conditions: has not been stored, the indicator light will door, push the memory switch (1 or 2) or
● The ignition switch is in the ON position. come on for approximately 0.5 seconds.
● Place the ignition switch in the ON position
When the memory has stored the position,
● The shift selector is in the P (Park) position. and push the memory switch (1 or 2).
the indicator light will stay on for approxi-
If the outside mirrors or the steering wheel mately 5 seconds. The driver’s seat, steering column, and outside
mirrors will move to the memorized position with
reaches its maximum adjustment, the function is ● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
automatically disabled. Restart the function by the indicator light blinking, and then the light will
fuse opens, the memory storage function will
selecting a previously stored seat memory posi- stay on for approximately 5 seconds.
be canceled and must be restarted before a
tion using the memory switches (1 or 2). An stored memory position can be set again. ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION
Intelligent Key that was previously linked to the Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to
stored seat memory can also be used to restart restart the memory storage function. You This system is designed so that the driver’s seat
the function. can also restart the memory storage function and automatic operation steering column will au-
using the following procedure. tomatically move when the shift selector is in the
If a seat position was not previously stored in the P (Park) position. This allows the driver to get into
seat memory, restart the function by adjusting the 1. Connect the battery cable or replace the and out of the driver’s seat more easily.
steering wheel and outside mirrors manually for fuse.
your best driving position and then drive the The driver’s seat will slide backward and the
vehicle above 4 MPH (7 km/h). 2. Open and close the driver’s door more than steering column will move up:
2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK
position. ● When the driver’s door is opened with the
ignition switch placed in the LOCK position.
● When the ignition switch is turned from The entry/exit function should now work properly. 3. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-
ACC to LOCK with the driver’s door open. tion. The settings linked to the Intelligent Key
SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION will start.
The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to
the previous position: The position of the following settings can be For further instructions on using the Climate con-
linked to the Intelligent Key and the memorized trol system see “Heater and air conditioner (au-
● When the driver’s door is closed with the settings can be available for each Intelligent Key.
ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. tomatic)” in “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and
● Climate control system voice recognition systems”.
● When the ignition switch is turned from
ACC to ON while the shift selector is in the P ● Navigation system (if so equipped) For further instructions on using the Navigation
(Park) position. System see the separate Navigation System
● Audio system Owner’s Manual.
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-
celed through the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle To use the memory function, set the climate, For further instructions on using the Audio sys-
information display by performing the following: navigation and audio systems to the driver’s pre- tem see “Audio system” in “Monitor, climate, au-
ferred settings. Lock the doors with the Intelligent dio, phone and voice recognition systems”.
● Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF. Key. Each Intelligent Key may be set with the
● Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to driver’s individual preferences. When a new In- SYSTEM OPERATION
OFF. telligent Key is used, “Connection with the key
The automatic drive positioner system will not
has been done” will be displayed on the screen
Restarting the entry/exit function work or will stop operating under the following
and the memorized settings are available.
conditions:
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse To engage the memorized settings, perform the
opens, the entry/exit function will be disabled. Drive ● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH
following:
the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) to restart the (7 km/h).
entry/exit function. You can also restart the 1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to the
● When any of the memory switches are
entry/exit function using the following procedure. memorized settings.
pushed while the automatic drive positioner
1. Connect the battery cable or replace the 2. Unlock the doors by pushing the driver’s is operating.
fuse. door handle request switch or the
● When the adjusting switch for the driver’s
2. Open and close the driver’s door more than UNLOCK button on the Intelligent seat and steering column is turned on while
2 times with the ignition switch in the LOCK Key. the automatic drive positioner is operating.
position.
● When the seat has already been moved to
the memorized position.
● When no seat position is stored in the
memory switch.
● When the shift selector is moved from P
(Park) to any other position.
● When the driver’s door remains open more
than 45 seconds and the ignition switch is
not in the ON position.
● The seat synchronization function is auto-
matically disabled if the outside mirrors or
steering wheel reaches its maximum adjust-
ment.
● The seat synchronization function will not
operate if the seat is adjusted over one of the
following maximum thresholds:
– Seat sliding: 3.0 in (76 mm)
– Seatback reclining: 9.1 degrees
– Seat lifter (rear side): 0.8 in (20 mm)
The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-
celed through the Vehicle Settings in the vehicle
information display by performing the following:
● Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.
● Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to
OFF.

MEMO

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen without Difference between predicted and actual
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Predictive course line settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 How to adjust the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Available views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Difference between predictive and actual
Control panel buttons — color screen with distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
How to use the NISSAN controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 Camera aiding sonar (parking sensor). . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
How to use the touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17 How to adjust the screen view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
How to select menus on the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 View malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
How to use the STATUS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
How to use the INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (Type A) . . . . . . 4-50
OFF button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Image viewer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
Using the image viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
RearView Monitor (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
How to read the displayed lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (Type B) . . . . . . 4-54
How to park with predictive course lines . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 iPod®* player operation with Navigation
Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-105
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so equipped) . . . .4-108
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . .4-112
FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114
AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Dual head restraint DVD system (if so equipped) . . . .4-114
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-60 System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-115
Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 Before operating dual head restraint DVD
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-120
changer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Playing a digital versatile disc (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . .4-121
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-125
player (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80 Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-126
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player
Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127
(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System without
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player
Operation (models with Navigation System) . . . . . . 4-95 Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127
USB interface (models without Navigation Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129
System) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-98 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-129
USB interface (models with Navigation Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-131
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99 Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-132
iPod®* player operation without Navigation List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-134
System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103 Voice Adaptation (VA) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-138
Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-139 Bluetooth settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-151
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-140 Call volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-152
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with NISSAN Voice Recognition System
Navigation System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-141 (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-152
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143 NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode . . . . .4-153
Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-156
Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-143 Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-156
Vehicle phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-145 Giving voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-156
Handset phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-147 NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate
Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-148 Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-164
Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-148 Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-169
During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-149
Speaker Adaptation function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-172
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-150
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-174
Phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-150
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — COLOR
SCREEN WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
WARNING
● Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
● Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
● In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock. LHA2469
1. STATUS button (P. 4-6) 5. BRIGHT + (brightness control) button
2. INFO button (P. 4-6) 6. BRIGHT – (brightness control) button
3. NISSAN controller (P. 4-5) 7. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-5)
4. OFF brightness control button 8. SETTING button (P. 4-9)
(P. 4-15)
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
● Finish setup.
CAUTION
● The glass display screen may break if it In some screens pressing the BACK button 䊊
4
is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the accepts the changes made during setup.
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.
Doing so could result in an injury.
● To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to LHA2470
malfunction.
HOW TO USE THE NISSAN
When you use this system, make sure the engine CONTROLLER
is running.
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long the display screen. Highlight an item on the dis-
time, it will discharge the battery, and the play using the main directional buttons 䊊 2 or the
engine will not start. center dial 䊊3 . Then press the ENTER button 䊊 1
to select the item or perform the action.
Reference symbols:
The BACK button 䊊
4 has two functions:
ENTER button — This is a button on the control
panel. ● Go back to the previous display (cancel).
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a If you press the BACK button 䊊 4 during setup,
key shown on the display. These keys can only be the setup will be canceled and/or the display will
selected using the NISSAN controller. return to the previous screen.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen (for example, Pacific time zone,
Mountain time zone, etc.).
3. UP/DOWN Movement Indicator:
Shows that the NISSAN controller may be
used to move UP/DOWN on the screen and
select more options.
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections avail-
able for that screen (for example, 1/9).
5. Footer/Information Line:
Provides more information (if available)
LHA1300 WHA1149
about the menu selection currently high-
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE lighted (for example, Manually set the time HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON
SCREEN zone).
Press the INFO button. The display screen
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis- HOW TO USE THE STATUS shows vehicle information for your convenience.
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec- BUTTON The information shown on the screen should be a
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different guide to determine the condition of the vehicle.
areas on the screen provide you with important To display the status of the audio, climate control
system and fuel consumption, press the STATUS See the following for details.
information. See the following for details:
button.
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current The following information will appear when the
screen (for example, press the SETTING STATUS button is pressed multiple times:
button > then select the “Clock” key, then Audio → Audio and climate control system →
select the “Time Zone” key). Audio and fuel consumption → Audio

NOTE:
● If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-
play just before the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position may con-
tinue to be displayed.
● When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
LHA1301 display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi LHA0922
(500 m). After a reset or connecting the battery Fuel economy record
Fuel economy cables, the display might show (**.*).
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
Resetting fuel economy Economy” key, then select the “View” key using
Economy” key using the NISSAN controller to
display Average Fuel Economy, Distance to The average fuel economy calculation can be the NISSAN controller.
Empty and Fuel Economy History. reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the The average fuel consumption history will be
“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset” key displayed in a graph form along with the average
Distance to empty (MI or km) using the NISSAN controller. fuel for the previous reset-to-reset period.
The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

LHA1302 LHA1303 LHA0839
Maintenance items Changing the maintenance interval Displaying the maintenance notice re-
Select one of the Reminder keys (Engine Oil, Oil minder
Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte-
nance” key using the NISSAN controller; the Filter, Tire or Other Reminder) using the NISSAN Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key to display
maintenance information will be displayed on the controller to display the screen to change the the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati-
screen. maintenance interval. cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica-
Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN con- tor light will illuminate when it is ON.
troller. Use the NISSAN controller to change the The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-
maintenance interval. To accept the changes, tomatically displayed as shown when both of the
press the BACK button.
following conditions are met:
Resetting the maintenance interval
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using the
NISSAN controller. ● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition the next time the vehicle is driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAIN-
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
the BACK button.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the
following conditions are met:
● The “Reset” key is selected.
● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).
● The maintenance interval is set again.
LHA1304 LHA0929
HOW TO USE THE SETTING Display settings
BUTTON Select the “Display” key. The Display settings
When the SETTING button is pressed, the Set- screen will appear.
tings screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use
the NISSAN controller to select each item to be
set.
Audio settings
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in this
section.

To turn the screen on:
● Press the SETTING button, select the “Dis-
play” key and then select the “Display ON”
key. Then set the screen to on by pressing
the ENTER button, or
● Hold the OFF button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds and the message “resum-
ing display” will appear and the “Display ON”
key will be automatically turned on (no am-
ber indicator).
Background color:
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
LHA0930 WHA0823 color changes between day and night.
Brightness/contrast: Display off: The new settings are automatically saved when
Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key Select the “Display ON” key. The amber indicator you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the map next to “Display ON” turns off and the message button or any other mode button.
background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust above will be displayed briefly. When the audio,
the brightness to darker or brighter and the con- HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any mode
trast to lower or higher. button on the control panel is operated, the dis-
play turns on for that operation. If one of the
The new settings are automatically saved when
control panel buttons is pressed, the display will
you exit the setting screen by pressing the BACK
not automatically turn off until that operation is
button or any other mode button.
finished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-
matically after 5 seconds.

LHA1305 LHA1306 LHA1307
Switch beeps settings Camera settings Clock
Select the “Switch Beeps” key to adjust the Select the “Camera” key. The Camera settings The following display will appear after pressing
switch beeps settings. screen will appear. the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
key using the NISSAN controller.
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a When this option is on (indicator light illumi-
beep will sound if any control panel button is nated), predictive course lines will be displayed On-screen Clock:
pressed. when the RearView monitor is displayed on the
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
screen. See “RearView Monitor” in this section
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
for more information.
right corner of the screen.
Clock Format:
Choose either the 12h (12-hour) clock display or
the 24h (24-hour) clock display.

Daylight Savings Time: ● Newfoundland
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi- ● Aleutian
nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the
● Hawaii
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the
amber indicator light will go out. ● Alaska
LHA0933
Time Zone:
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone
screen will appear.
Select one of the following zones, depending on
the current location, by selecting the correct time
zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light
will illuminate for that location).
● Pacific
● Mountain
● Central
● Eastern
● Atlantic
LHA1308 WHA1151 WHA1152
Adjust Clock: Comfort & Convenience settings Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when
To adjust the time, select the + or - key for the Select the “Comfort & Conv.” key by using the any door is unlocked.
hour until the desired number is reached. Repeat NISSAN controller. The comfort and conve-
the process for the minutes on the line below. nience option screen will be displayed. Auto Headlights Sensitivity: Select to adjust
the sensitivity of the automatic headlights higher
To accept the changes made and return to the You can set the following operating conditions by (right) or lower (left).
Clocks Settings screen, select the OK key. highlighting the desired item using the NISSAN
controller. The amber indicator (box at the right of Auto Headlights Off Delay: Select to change
the selected item) alternately turns on and off the duration of the automatic headlight off timer
each time the ENTER button is pressed. from 0-, 30-, 45-, 60-, 90-, 120-, 150- and
180-second periods.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turn
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati- on or turn off the driver’s seat moving backward
cally according to the vehicle speed. for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
position and the driver’s door is opened. After
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is
getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
switch to the ACC position, the driver’s seat
after the door unlock operation. When the door
moves to the previous position.
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, Return All Settings to Default: Select to
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All change all the comfort and convenience systems
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock to their default settings.
operation is performed again within 1 minute.
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is
performed once. LHA0934
Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn Language / Units
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by
pushing the door handle request switch. Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan-
guage / Units” key. Select which setting you want
Lift Steering Wheel on Exit: Select to turn on to change using the NISSAN controller.
or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for
easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
getting into the vehicle and pushing the ignition
switch to the ACC position, the steering wheel

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
Press and hold the OFF button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.
LHA0935 LHA0936
Select Language: Select Units:
Select the “English” key, the “Français” key or the Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”
“Español” key to change the language shown on (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
the display. shown on the display.
OFF BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the OFF button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day or the
night display. The brightness can then be
adjusted using the NISSAN controller.
The display brightness can also be adjusted us-
ing the + (brighter) button or the ⫺ (dimmer)
button.
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
10. - (brightness control) button
11. VOICE button*
12. SETTING button (P. 4-23)
13. MAP button*
14. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-17)
15. ZOOM IN button*
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
**For information on the CAMERA button, see
“AroundView Monitor” in this section.
When using this system, make sure the engine is
running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
LHA2446
ENTER button — This is a button on the control
1. ZOOM OUT button* 6. STATUS button (P. 4-20)
panel.
2. CAMERA button** 7. INFO button (P. 4-20)
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
3. DEST button* 8. + (brightness control) button key shown only on the display. These keys can be
4. ROUTE button* selected by touching the screen or using the
9. OFF brightness control button (P. NISSAN controller.
5. NISSAN controller (P. 4-17) 4-30)
If you press the BACK button 䊊 4 during setup, To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-
the setup will be canceled and/or the display will not be operated while driving.
return to the previous screen. The on-screen functions that are not available
● Finish setup. while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
In some screens, pressing the BACK button 䊊
4 Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-
accepts the changes made during setup. ate the navigation system.
For the VOICE button 䊊 5 functions, refer to the WARNING

separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
● ALWAYS give your full attention to
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH driving.
SCREEN ● Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
LHA2496 CAUTION lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.
HOW TO USE THE NISSAN ● The glass display screen may break if it
CONTROLLER is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the
glass screen breaks, do not touch it.
Use the NISSAN controller to choose an item on Doing so could result in an injury.
the display screen. Highlight an item on the dis- ● To clean the display, never use a rough
play using the main directional buttons 䊊2 (cer-
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
tain Navigation System functions use the addi- kind of solvent or paper towel with a
tional directional buttons 䊊
6 ) or the center dial chemical cleaning agent. They will
䊊3 . Then press the ENTER button 䊊 1 to select scratch or deteriorate the panel.
the item or perform the action.
● Do not splash any liquid such as water
The BACK button 䊊
4 has two functions: or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
● Go back to the previous display (cancel).
malfunction.

LHA1227 LHA1228 LHA1230
Touch screen operation Adjusting the item: Inputting characters:
With this system, the same operations as those Touch the “+” key 䊊 1 or the “⫺” key 䊊
2 to adjust Touch the letter or number key 䊊
1 .
for the NISSAN controller are possible using the the settings of an item.
There are some options available when inputting
touch screen operation. Touch the up arrow 䊊 3 to scroll up the page one characters.
Selecting the item: item at a time, or touch the double up arrow 䊊4 to
scroll up an entire page. ● Uppercase:
Touch an item to select. To select the “Naviga- Shows uppercase characters.
tion” key, touch the “Navigation” key 䊊1 on the Touch the down arrow 䊊 to scroll down the
5
screen. Touch the “BACK” key 䊊 2 to return to the page one item at a time, or touch the double ● Lowercase:
previous screen. down arrow 䊊6 to scroll down an entire page. Shows lowercase characters.
● Space:
Inserts a space.

● Delete: 2. Menu Selections:
Deletes the last inputted character with one Shows the options to choose within that
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-
delete all of the characters. mination, etc.).
● OK: 3. Up/Down Movement Indicator:
Completes the character input. Shows that the NISSAN controller may be
used to move up or down on the screen and
Touch screen maintenance select more options.
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft 4. Screen Count:
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a Shows the number of menu selections avail-
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft able for the current menu, even if they are on
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de- multiple pages (for example, 1/9).
tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the
screen. 5. Footer/Information Line:
LHA1229
Provides more information (if available)
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE about the menu selection currently high-
SCREEN lighted (for example, Cabin lighting when
unlocking doors).
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different
areas on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details.
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen (for example, press the SETTING
button > then select the “Comfort” key).

HOW TO USE THE STATUS
BUTTON
The STATUS button is used to display system infor-
mation. Three different split screens of information
are available. Press the STATUS button multiple
times to cycle through these screens as follows:
Audio with Turn Information for Navigation →
Audio with Fuel Economy Information → Audio
with Climate Control Information → Audio with
Turn Information for Navigation
LHA1231 LHA1232
HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON Fuel economy
Press the INFO button; the display screen shows Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel
vehicle and navigation information for your con- Economy” key using the NISSAN controller to
venience. display Distance to Empty, Average Fuel
The information shown on the screen should be a Economy and Fuel Economy History.
guide to determine the condition of the vehicle. Distance to empty (MI or km)
See the following for details:
The Distance to Empty (DTE) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The DTE is constantly
calculated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel
tank and the actual fuel consumption. The display
is updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel level
is low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:
● If the amount of fuel added while the
ignition switch is OFF is small, the dis-
play just before the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position may con-
tinue to be displayed.
● When driving uphill or rounding curves,
the fuel in the tank shifts, which may
momentarily change the display.
Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)
The Average Fuel Economy is calculated based
on fuel consumption since the last reset. The
display is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3 mi LHA1233 LHA1234
(500 m). After a reset or connecting the battery Fuel economy record
cables, the display might show (**.*).
Maintenance items
Press the INFO button, then select the “Fuel Press the INFO button and select the “Mainte-
Resetting fuel economy Economy” key, then select the “Fuel Eco History” nance” key using the NISSAN controller; the
The average fuel economy calculation can be key using the NISSAN controller. maintenance information will be displayed on the
reset to 0. Press the INFO button and select the The average fuel consumption history will be screen.
“Fuel Economy” key, then select the “Reset Fuel displayed in a graph form along with the average
Eco” key using the NISSAN controller. fuel for the previous Reset-to-Reset period.

Resetting the maintenance interval
To reset the reminder schedule (distance) to 0 mi
(km), select the “Reset Distance” key using the
NISSAN controller.
LHA1235 LHA0839
Changing the maintenance interval Displaying the maintenance notice re-
minder
Select one of the maintenance reminder keys
using the NISSAN controller to display the Select the “Interval Reminder ON” key to display
screen to change the maintenance interval. You the MAINTENANCE INFORMATION automati-
can choose between Engine Oil, Oil Filter, Tire cally at the set maintenance interval. The indica-
and Other Reminder. tor light will illuminate when it is ON.
Select the “Interval” key using the NISSAN control- The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen will be au-
ler. Touch the “+” or “-” keys or turn the NISSAN tomatically displayed as shown when both of the
controller to choose the desired distance. To ac- following conditions are met:
cept the changes, press the BACK button.
● The vehicle is driven the set distance and the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
● The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-
sition the next time the vehicle is driven.
To return to the previous display after the MAIN- Navigation Version
TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, press
the BACK button. Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displays
each time the key is turned ON until one of the Other options
following conditions are met: For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
● The “Reset” key is selected. Voice Recognition system” in this section.
● The “Interval Reminder ON” key is set to For GPS Position, refer to the separate Naviga-
tion System Owner’s Manual.
OFF (indicator light not illuminated).
● The maintenance interval is set again.
Where am I?
LHA1236
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item. HOW TO USE THE SETTING
BUTTON
Traffic Info
When the SETTING button is pressed, the Set-
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- tings screen will appear on the display. You can
er’s Manual for information regarding this item. select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle. Use
Weather Info the NISSAN controller to select each item to be
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- set.
Map Update
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

LHA1237 WHA1502 LHA1239
Display settings Brightness/contrast:
Select the “Display” key. On the screen above, Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key
select the “Display Adjustment” key. The Display to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display
Adjustment screen will appear. background. Use the NISSAN controller to adjust
the brightness to darker or brighter and the con-
trast to lower or higher.
The new settings are automatically saved when
button or any other mode button.

To turn the screen on:
● Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
ON” key, or
● Press the OFF button and the mes-
sage “resuming display” will appear and the
“Display ON” key will be automatically
turned on (no amber indicator).
Background color:
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
color changes between day and night.
LHA2562
The new settings are automatically saved when LHA1240
Display off: button or any other mode button. Color theme:
Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the Select the “Display” key, then select the “Color
“Display ON” turns off and the message above Theme” key. The Color Theme select screen will
will be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC appear.
(Heater and air conditioner), or any mode button
Select the key for the desired color. The appear-
on the control panel is operated, the display turns
ance of the background, arrows and bars will
on for that operation. If one of the control panel
change for all screens accordingly. You can
buttons is pressed, the display will not automati-
choose a black, blue or red color theme.
cally turn off until that operation is finished. Oth-
erwise, the screen turns off automatically after
5 seconds.

Clock Format (24h):
nated), the clock format will change from the
default 12-hour display to a 24-hour display.
Offset (hour):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
hours.
Offset (minute):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
minutes.
Daylight Savings Time:
LHA2563 LHA1243
Clock nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the Time Zone:
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone
The following display will appear after pressing
amber indicator light will go out.
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock” screen will appear.
key using the NISSAN controller.
Select one of the following zones, depending on
On-screen Clock: the current location, by selecting the correct time
zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light
will illuminate for that location).
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen. ● Pacific
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly ● Mountain
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.
● Central
● Eastern
● Atlantic
● Newfoundland
● Hawaii
● Alaska
After selection/settings, press the BACK button
or any other mode button to accept the changes.
LHA1248 LHA1246
Others settings Comfort settings
Select the “Others” key using the NISSAN con- Select the “Others” key using the NISSAN con-
troller. Voice recognition, language and units set- troller, then select the “Comfort” key. The Com-
ting screen will be displayed. fort settings screen will be displayed.
You can set the following operating conditions by
selecting the desired item using the NISSAN
controller. The indicator light (box at the right of
the selected item) alternately turns on and off
each time the item is touched or the ENTER
button is pressed.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit: Select to turn
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati- on or turn off the driver’s seat moving backward
cally according to the vehicle speed. for easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is
getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
switch in the ACC position, the driver’s seat
after the door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked, Return All Settings to Default: Select to
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All change all the comfort systems to their default
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock settings.
operation is performed again within one minute.
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is
LHA1247 performed once.
Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by
any door is unlocked. pushing the door handle request switch.
Light Sensitivity: Select to adjust the sensitivity Lift Steering Wheel on Exit: Select to turn on
of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower or turn off the steering wheel moving upward for
(left). After selecting the item, turn the NISSAN easy exit when the ignition switch is in the OFF
controller or touch the “+” or “-” key to change position and the driver’s door is opened. After
the setting. getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition
switch in the ACC position, the steering wheel
Light Off Delay: Select to change the duration moves to the previous position.
of the automatic headlight off timer. After select-
ing the item, turn the NISSAN controller or touch
the “+” or “-” key to change the setting. The
available delays are 0, 30, 45, 60, 90, 120, 150
and 180 seconds.
LHA1250 LHA1251 LHA1252
Language & Units: Select Language: Select Units:
Use the NISSAN controller to select the “Lan- Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”
guage & Units” key. Select which setting you change the language shown on the display. (km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
want to change using the NISSAN controller and shown on the display.
If you select the “Français” key, French language
selecting either the “Select Language” key or the
will be displayed, so please use the French Own- Voice Recognition:
“Select Units” key.
er’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Or-
Voice Recognition system” in this section.
der Information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section. Camera settings
Select the “Camera” key. The Camera settings
screen will appear.

When this option is on (indicator light illumi- For Bluetooth® audio settings, refer to
nated), predictive course lines will be displayed “Bluetooth® streaming audio” in this section.
when the Around View® Monitor is displayed on
the screen. See “Around View® Monitor” in this
Volume & beeps settings
section for more information. Navigation volume
Image viewer settings For navigation volume settings, refer to the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-
For information about these settings, refer to mation regarding these settings.
“Image viewer” in this section.
Phone volume
Navigation settings
For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetooth®
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own- Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-
er’s Manual for information regarding these set- tem” in this section.
tings. LHA1253
Audio settings Switch beeps
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in this With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a
section. beep will sound if any control panel button is
pressed.
Phone settings
OFF BUTTON
For phone settings refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-
Free Phone System with Navigation System” in To change the display brightness, press
this section. the OFF button. Pressing the button again
Bluetooth® settings will change the display to the day or the
night display. The brightness can then be
For Bluetooth® phone settings, refer to adjusted using the NISSAN controller.
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” in this section. If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
IMAGE VIEWER (if so equipped)
USING THE IMAGE VIEWER

When a compatible portable storage device is
plugged into the USB jack located in the center
console, compatible image files stored on the
device can be viewed on the control panel de-
vice.
Connecting the portable storage
device
To connect a portable storage device to the sys-
tem so that images stored on it can be viewed,
insert the device into the USB jack located in the
center console.
LHA1254 LHA1309
Press and hold the OFF button for more Viewing images
than two seconds to turn the display off. Press
the button again to turn the display on. To view an image, press the SETTING button and
then select the “Image Viewer” key with the
NISSAN controller. The Image Viewer screen will
be displayed.
A list of compatible images on the storage device
is displayed on the left side of the screen, while
the selected image is displayed on the right side
of the screen. To choose a different picture from
the list, use the NISSAN controller to scroll
through the list once the desired image is high-
lighted.

Select the “Full Screen Display” key and press Select the play key to begin the slideshow.
the ENTER button to view a full screen version of The images shown on the screen will periodically
the image. change at a given interval of time. To skip through
Image requirements: the images without waiting for them to change
automatically, select the key to skip back-
● Image type: JPEG ward or the key to skip forward. Select the
● File extensions: *.jpg, *.jpeg stop key to end the slideshow and return
to the full screen display of the image currently on
● Maximum resolution: 2048 x 1536
the screen.
● Maximum size: 2 MB
● Colors: 32,768 (15-bit)
● Maximum file name length: 253 bytes (dis-
play only shows first 8 characters)
LHA1310
● Maximum folders: 500 Viewing images in a slideshow
● Maximum images per folder: 1024
To view all of the images on the device in a
slideshow, first enter the full screen mode while
viewing one of the images. The slideshow control
buttons are located on the right side of the
screen.

LHA1311 LHA1312 LHA1313
Slideshow settings Slideshow speed: Slideshow order:
While in slideshow mode, select the “Settings” To change the interval of time at which images are Select the “Random” key to display the images in
key. The Slideshow Settings screen will be dis- changed during a slideshow, select the desired a random order during a slideshow. Select the
played. The following settings can be accessed: interval key. The indicator light to the right of the “Order List” key to display the images in the order
interval will come on to show that it is selected. in which they are stored on the storage device.
If the option “No Auto Change” is chosen, the Select the “Back” key or press the BACK button
slideshow will not change images automatically. on the control panel to return to the slideshow
The slideshow can then only be operated using screen.
the manual controls.
To return to the slideshow screen, select the
“Back” key or press the BACK button on the
control panel.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
When the shift selector is shifted into the R ● Do not put anything on the rear view
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows a camera. The rear view camera is in-
rearward view from the vehicle. stalled above the license plate.
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in ● When washing the vehicle with high-
situations such as slot parking or parallel parking. pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
WARNING may enter the camera unit causing wa-
● The RearView Monitor is a convenience ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
but it is not a substitute to check behind function, fire or an electric shock.
the vehicle when backing up. ● Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
● The driver is always responsible for sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
safety during parking and other function or cause damage resulting in a
maneuvers. fire or an electric shock.
LHA1196
● Objects viewed in the RearView Moni- CAUTION HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
tor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used. Do not scratch the camera lens when LINES
cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.
● Objects in the rearview will appear visu- Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
ally opposite than when viewed in the and distances to objects with reference to the
rearview and outside mirrors. vehicle body line 䊊
A are displayed on the monitor.
● Make sure that the liftgate is securely Distance guide lines:

closed when backing up.
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
● Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed ● Red line 䊊
1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)
on the RearView Monitor because of its ● Yellow line 䊊
2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m)
monitoring range limitation.
● Green line 䊊
3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
● Green line 䊊
4 : approx. 10 ft (3 m)

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
5 :
● On a snow-covered or slippery road,
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up. there may be a difference between the
predictive course line and the actual
Predictive course lines 䊊
6 : course line.
Indicate the predictive course when backing up. ● The distance guide line and the vehicle
The predictive course lines will be displayed on width line should be used as a refer-
the monitor when the shift selector is in the R ence only when the vehicle is on a level
(Reverse) position and the steering wheel is paved surface. The distance viewed on
turned. The predictive course lines will move de- the monitor is for reference only and
pending on how much the steering wheel is may be different than the actual dis-
turned and will not be displayed while the steer- tance between the vehicle and dis-
ing wheel is in the neutral position. played objects.
The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the ● When backing up the vehicle up a hill,
predictive course lines are wider than the actual objects viewed in the monitor are fur-
ther than they appear. When backing up
width and course.
the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE in the monitor are closer than they ap-
pear. Use the inside mirror or glance
COURSE LINES over your shoulder to properly judge
distances to other objects.
WARNING
● Always turn and check that it is safe to
do so before backing up. Always back LHA1197
up slowly. 1. Visually check that the parking space is safe
● If the tires are replaced with different before parking your vehicle.
sized tires, the predictive course lines 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on
may be displayed incorrectly. the screen 䊊A when the shift lever is moved
to the R (Reverse) position.

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the
vehicle width guide lines 䊊 D parallel to the
parking space 䊊 C . When the back of the
vehicle enters the parking space 䊊 C , maneu-
ver the steering wheel to make the vehicle
width guide lines 䊊 D parallel to the parking
space 䊊 C.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position and apply the parking brake.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.
LHA1198 LHA1199
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predicted course
lines 䊊
B enter the parking space 䊊 C.

Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis- When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance. lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
place 䊊 A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on place 䊊 A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
the hill is the place 䊊 B . Note that any object on the hill is the place 䊊 B . Note that any object on
the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA1200

the position 䊊A if the object projects over the
actual backing up course.
PREDICTIVE COURSE LINE
SETTINGS
To turn on or off the predictive course line display,
press the SETTING button, select the “Camera”
key and press the ENTER button.
Predictive Course Lines:
When this item is turned on, the predictive course
lines will be displayed on the monitor when the
shift selector is the R (Reverse) position.
HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,
Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView
Monitor, press the SETTING button with the
RearView Monitor on and select the “Display”
key. Select one of the items and change the value
by touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the
NISSAN controller.
LHA1201 LHA1202 Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Con-
Backing up near a projecting object Backing up behind a projecting object trast and Black Level of the RearView Monitor
while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the park-
The predicted course lines 䊊 A do not touch the The position 䊊 C is shown farther than the position ing brake is firmly applied.
object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit 䊊B in the display. However, the position 䊊 C is
the object if it projects over the actual backing up actually at the same distance as the position 䊊 A.
course. The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so
equipped)
OPERATING TIPS ● If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cam- With the ignition switch in the ON position, press
era, the RearView Monitor may not display the CAMERA button or move the shift selector to
● When the shift selector is shifted to the R objects clearly. Clean the camera. the R (Reverse) position to operate the Around
(Reverse) position, the display screen auto- View Monitor. The monitor displays various views
matically changes to the RearView Monitor ● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
of the position of the vehicle in a split screen
mode. However, the radio can be heard. clean the camera. This will cause discolor-
format.
ation. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
● When the view is switched, the display im- dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent Available views:
ages on the screen may be displayed with and then wipe with a dry cloth.
● Bird-Eye View
some delay. ● Do not damage the camera as the monitor The surrounding view of the vehicle from
● When the temperature is extremely high or screen may be adversely affected. above.
low, the screen may not clearly display ob- ● Do not use wax on the camera window. ● Front-Side View
jects. This is not a malfunction. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth damp- The view around and ahead of the front
● When strong light is directly coming on the ened with mild detergent diluted with water. passenger’s side wheel.
camera, objects may not be displayed ● Rearview
clearly. This is not a malfunction. An approximately 150-degree view of the
rear of the vehicle.
● Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light The system is designed as an aid to the driver in
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction. situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.
● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
● The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual color of the objects. This is not a
malfunction.
● Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark environment. This is not a malfunction.

WARNING ● When washing the vehicle with high-
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
● The Around View Monitor is a conve-
around the cameras. Otherwise, water
nience feature. It is not a substitute for
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
proper vehicle operation because it has
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
areas where objects cannot be viewed.
function, fire or an electric shock.
The four corners of the vehicle in par-
ticular are blind spots where objects do ● Do not strike the cameras. They are
not appear in the bird-eye, front or rear precision instruments. Doing so could
views. Always look out the windows and cause a malfunction or cause damage
check with your own eyes to be sure resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
that it is safe to move before operating
the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle CAUTION
slowly.
Do not scratch the camera lens when
● The driver is always responsible for cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the
safety during parking and other camera.
maneuvers.
● Do not use the Around View Monitor AVAILABLE VIEWS
with the outside mirror in the stored
position, and make sure that the liftgate WARNING
is securely closed when operating the ● The distance guide line and the vehicle
vehicle using the Around View Monitor. width line should be used as a refer-
LHA2471 ● The distance between objects viewed ence only when the vehicle is on a
There are some areas where the system will not on the Around View Monitor differs paved, level surface. The distance
show objects. When in the front or rearview from the actual distance. viewed on the monitor may be different
display, an object below the bumper or on the than the actual distance between the
● The cameras are installed on the front
ground may not be viewed 䊊 1 . When in the
grille, the outside mirrors and above the
vehicle and displayed objects.
bird-eye view, a tall object near the seam of the rear license plate. Do not put anything
camera viewing areas will not appear in the moni- on the cameras.
tor 䊊
2 .
● If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predictive course lines
and the bird-eye view may be displayed
incorrectly.
● When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-
jects viewed in the monitor are further
than they appear. When driving the ve-
hicle down a hill, objects viewed in the
monitor are closer than they appear.
Use the mirrors or actually look to prop-
erly judge distances to other objects.
● Objects in the rearview will appear visu-
ally opposite than when viewed in the
rearview and outside mirrors. SAA1840 SAA1896
Front view Rearview
● On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the Front and rearview Vehicle width guide lines 䊊
5 :
predictive course lines and the actual Guiding lines, which indicate the vehicle width Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
course line. and distance to objects with reference to the Predictive course lines 䊊
6 :
● The vehicle width and predictive course vehicle body line 䊊
A , are displayed on the moni-
lines are wider than the actual width tor. Indicate the predictive course when operating
and course. the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be
Distance guide lines:
displayed on the monitor when the steering
Indicate distances from the vehicle body: wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will
● Red line 䊊
1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) move depending on how much the steering
wheel is turned and will not be displayed while
● Yellow line 䊊
2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) the steering wheel is in the neutral position.
● Green line 䊊
3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)
The front view will not be displayed when the
● Green line 䊊
4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m) vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE: in yellow for three seconds after the bird-eye view
is displayed. In addition, the non-viewable cor-
When the monitor displays the front view
ners are displayed in red and blink for the first
and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-
three seconds 䊊 3 to remind the driver to be
grees or less from the neutral position,
cautious.
both the right and left predictive course
lines 䊊6 are displayed. When the steering
wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a WARNING
line is displayed only on the opposite side ● Objects in the bird-eye view will appear
of the turn. further than the actual distance be-
cause the bird-eye view is a pseudo
view that is processed by combining the
views from the cameras on the outside
mirrors, the front and the rear of the
vehicle.
LHA2547
● Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
Bird-eye view may be misaligned or not displayed at
The bird-eye view shows the overhead view of the seam of the views.
the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle po- ● Objects that are above the camera can-
sition and the predicted course to a parking not be displayed.
space.
● The view of the bird-eye view may be
The vehicle icon 䊊 1 shows the position of the misaligned when the camera position
vehicle. Note that the distance between objects alters.
viewed in the bird-eye view differs from the actual ● A line on the ground may be misaligned
distance. and is not seen as being straight at the
The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊
2 are seam of the views. The misalignment
indicated in black. will increase as the line proceeds away
from the vehicle.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the non-viewable area 䊊
2 is highlighted

CAUTION
● The turn signal light may look like the
side-of-vehicle line. This is not a
malfunction.
● Do not scratch the camera lens when
cleaning dirt or snow from the lens.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTIVE AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
SAA1842
Front-side view
Guiding lines:
Guiding lines that indicate the width and the front
end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line 䊊
1 shows the front part
of the vehicle.
LHA1199
The side-of-vehicle line 䊊2 shows the vehicle
Backing up on a steep uphill
width including the outside mirror.
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-
The extensions 䊊3 of both the front 䊊
1 and side
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
䊊2 lines are shown with a green dotted line.
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
The rear sonar indicator will appear when the rear For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
of the vehicle moves closer to an object 䊊 4 . place 䊊 A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

the hill is the place 䊊 B . Note that any object on the hill is the place 䊊B . Note that any object on
the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA1200
Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
place 䊊 A , but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on

LHA1201 LHA2548 LHA1202
Backing up near a projecting object There may be a small distance visible between Backing up behind a projecting object
The predicted course lines 䊊
the vehicle and the object in the bird-eye view on The position 䊊 C is shown farther than the position
A do not touch the
the display 䊊B.
䊊B in the display. However, the position 䊊 C is
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit A.
the object if it projects over the actual backing up The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
course. the position 䊊 A if the object projects over the
actual backing up course.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY WARNING
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press ● The sonar (parking sensor) is a conve-
the CAMERA button or move the shift selector to nience feature. It is not a substitute for
the R (Reverse) position to operate the Around proper parking.
View Monitor.
● The driver is always responsible for
The Around View Monitor displays different split safety during parking and other
screens views depending on the position of the maneuvers.
shift selector. Press the CAMERA button to
switch between the available views. ● Always look around and check that it is
safe to move before parking.
If the shift selector is in the R (Reverse) position,
the available views are: ● Read and understand the limitations of
the sonar (parking sensor) as contained
● Rearview/bird-eye view split screen in this section.
LHA2549
● Rearview/front-side view split screen ● The colors of the sonar indicators and
CAMERA AIDING SONAR (parking the distance guide lines in the rear view
If the shift selector is in the P (Park) position, the
available views are:
sensor) indicate different distances to the
object.
The sonar (parking sensor) sounds a tone to
● Front view/bird-eye view split screen ● Inclement weather or Ultrasonic
inform the driver of obstacles near the bumper.
● Front view/front-side view split screen sources such as an automatic car wash,
The colors of the sonar indicators and the dis- a truck’s compressed-air brakes or a
If the shift selector is in the D (Drive) position, the tance guide lines in the front, front-wide, rear and pneumatic drill may affect the function
only available view is front view/front-side view rear-wide views indicate different distances to of the system; this may include reduced
split screen. the object. performance or a false activation.
When the shift selector is not in the R (Reverse) ● This function is designed as an aid to
position and the vehicle speed increases above the driver in detecting large stationary
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the screen objects to help avoid damaging the
changes from the Around View Monitor screen to vehicle.
the previous screen.

● The system is not designed to prevent ● Keep the surface of the sonar sensors In the below cases, the sonar will be turned back
contact with small or moving objects. (located on the front and rear bumper on automatically:
● The system will not detect small objects

fascia) free from accumulations of ● When the shift selector is in the R (Reverse)
snow, ice and dirt. Do not scratch the position.
below the bumper, and may not detect
surface of the sonar sensors when
objects close to the bumper or on the
cleaning. If the sensors are covered, the ● When the CAMERA button is pressed and a
ground. screen other than the camera view is shown
accuracy of the sonar function will be
● The system may not detect the follow- diminished. on the display.
ing objects: ● When vehicle speed decreases below ap-
The system gives the tone for rear objects when
– Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth, proximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
the shift selector is in the R (Reverse) position.
cotton, glass or wool. ● When the ignition switch is placed in the
The system is deactivated at speeds above OFF position and turned back to the ON
– Thin objects such as rope, wire or
6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower position again.
chain.
speeds.
– Wedge-shaped objects. HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN
When the objects are detected, the indicator
● If your vehicle sustains damage to the (green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds
VIEW
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,
bent, the sensing zone may be altered the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow Color, Contrast and Black Level of the Around
causing inaccurate measurement of ob- and the rate of the blinking and the rate of the View Monitor, press the SETTING button with the
jects or false alarms. Around View Monitor on, select the item key and
tone increase. When the vehicle is very close to
the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns adjust the level using the NISSAN controller.
CAUTION red, and the tone sounds continuously. Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color, Con-
● Excessive noise (such as audio system The intermittent tone will stop after three seconds trast and Black Level of the Around View Monitor
volume or an open vehicle window) will while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the park-
when an object is detected by only the corner
interfere with the tone and it may not be ing brake is firmly applied.
sonar and the distance does not change.
heard.
The tone will stop when the object gets away
from the vehicle.

OPERATING TIPS ● The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
CAUTION ● The colors of objects on the Around View
● Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual
to clean the camera. This will cause color of objects. This is not a malfunction.
discoloration. To clean the camera, ● Objects on the Around View Monitor may
wipe with a cloth dampened with a di- not be clear and the color of the object may
luted mild cleaning agent and then wipe differ in a dark environment. This is not a
with a dry cloth. malfunction.
● Do not damage the camera as the moni- ● There may be differences in sharpness be-
tor screen may be adversely affected. tween each camera view of the bird-eye
● The screen displayed on the Around View view.
LHA2550 Monitor will automatically return to the pre- ● If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cam-
vious screen three minutes after the CAM- era, the Around View Monitor may not dis-
VIEW MALFUNCTION ERA button has been pressed with the shift play objects clearly. Clean the camera.
When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen, the selector in a position other than the R (Re-
● Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off
Around View Monitor may not be calibrated cor- verse) position. any wax with a clean cloth that has been
rectly. This will not hinder normal driving function ● When the view is switched, the display im- dampened with a mild detergent diluted with
but the system should be inspected by a NISSAN ages on the screen may be displayed in water.
dealer. some delay.
● When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not display objects
clearly. This is not a malfunction.
● When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly. This is not a malfunction.

VENTS
LHA2480
Adjust air flow direction for the driver’s and pas- Open or close the vents using the dial. Move the
senger’s side vents 䊊 1 , center vents 䊊2 , and rear dial toward the to open the vents or toward
vents 䊊3 by moving the vent slide and/or vent
the to close them.
assemblies.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (Type A)
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
● Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
LHA2472 people or animals.
Type A ● Do not use the recirculation mode for
1. Temperature control buttons (driver’s 9. (fan speed control) dial/ON/OFF long periods as it may cause the interior
side) button air to become stale and the windows to
2. AUTO climate control ON button fog up.
10. (rear window defroster) button
3. (front defroster) button 11. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button Start the engine and operate the controls to
4. Air recirculation button activate the air conditioner.
5. MODE (manual air flow control) button AUTOMATIC OPERATION
6. Temperature control buttons (passen-
ger’s side) Cooling and/or dehumidified heating
7. DUAL (passenger side temperature (AUTO)
control) ON/OFF button This mode may be used all year round as the
8. REAR button system automatically works to keep a constant
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on 2. Operate the temperature control buttons to ● When the front defroster button is
the button will illuminate and AUTO will be set the desired temperature. pressed, the air conditioner will automati-
displayed.) cally be turned on at outside temperatures
● The temperature of the passenger compart-
2. Operate the driver’s side temperature con- ment will be maintained automatically. Air above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode
trol buttons. flow distribution and fan speed are also con- automatically turns off, allowing outside air
trolled automatically. to be drawn into the passenger compart-
● Adjust the temperature display to about ment to further improve the defogging per-
75°F (24°C) for normal operation. ● Do not set the temperature lower than the formance.
● The temperature of the passenger compart- outside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air tem may not work properly. MANUAL OPERATION
flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
● Not recommended if windows fog up. Fan speed control
trolled automatically.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the Dehumidified defrosting or defogging Turn the fan speed control dial to manually
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air control the fan speed.
1. Press the front defroster button on.
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
(The indicator light on the button will come
malfunction. control of the fan speed.
on.)
3. You can individually set driver’s and front
passenger’s side temperature using each 2. Operate the temperature control buttons to Air recirculation
temperature control button. When the DUAL set the desired temperature.
Press the air recirculation button to recir-
button or passenger’s side temperature but- ● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
ton is pressed, the DUAL indicator will come culate interior air inside the vehicle. The
windows, use the fan speed control dial to indicator light on the button will come on.
on. To turn off the passenger’s side tempera- set the fan speed to maximum.
ture control, press the DUAL button. The air recirculation cannot be activated when
● As soon as possible after the windshield is
Heating (A/C OFF) the air conditioner is in the front defrosting
clean, press the AUTO button to return to
the automatic mode. mode or the front defrosting and foot out-
The air conditioner does not activate. When you
let mode.
need to heat only, use this mode.
1. Press the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be
displayed and A/C indicator will turn off.)
Automatic intake air control
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-
trolled automatically. To manually control the in-
take air, press the air recirculation button.
To return to the automatic control mode, press
and hold the air recirculation button for
about 2 seconds. The indicator light will flash
twice, and then the intake air will be controlled
automatically.
Air flow control
Pressing the MODE button manually controls air
flow and selects the air outlet:
LHA2134
— Air flows from center and side
vents. 1. OFF button To activate the rear control buttons, press the
2. Fan speed increase (+) button REAR button on the front air conditioner control
— Air flows from center and side vents
3. AUTO button panel.
and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets. 4. Temperature increase ( ) button OFF button: Turns rear automatic air conditioning
5. Temperature decrease ( ) button system off.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets. 6. Display Fan speed increase and decrease buttons: Ad-
— Air flows from defroster outlets. 7. Fan speed decrease (-) button justs the rear fan speed up or down.
To turn system off REAR SEAT AIR CONDITIONER AUTO button: Turns rear automatic air condition-
ing system on, AUTO mode on.
Press the OFF button. The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear
automatic air conditioning system using the con- Temperature increase and decrease buttons: Ad-
trol switches at the rear of the center console. justs the rear temperature up or down.

OPERATING TIPS
● When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
LHA2473
The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s
side of the instrument panel, helps the system
maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-
thing on or around this sensor.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (Type B)
7. (fan speed control) dial/ON/OFF

button
8. (front defroster) button
9. Temperature control dial (driver’s side)/
AUTO (automatic) climate control ON
button
WARNING
● The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
LHA2447 ● Do not use the recirculation mode for
1. Air recirculation button 5. Temperature control buttons (passen- long periods as it may cause the interior
ger’s side)/DUAL (passenger’s side air to become stale and the windows to
2. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button
fog up.
3. MODE (manual air flow control) button temperature control) ON/OFF button
4. REAR button 6. (rear window defroster) button Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION To turn off the passenger’s side temperature ● To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating control, press the DUAL button. windows, use the fan speed control dial to
set the fan speed to maximum.
(AUTO) Heating (A/C OFF)
● As soon as possible after the windshield is
This mode may be used all year round as the The air conditioner does not activate. When you clean, press the AUTO button to return to
system automatically works to keep a constant need to heat only, use this mode. the automatic mode.
temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed
are also controlled automatically. 1. Press the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be
● When the front defroster button is
displayed and A/C indicator will turn off.)
1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on pressed, the air conditioner will automati-
the button will illuminate and AUTO will be 2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the cally be turned on at outside temperatures
displayed.) desired temperature. above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode
automatically turns off, allowing outside air
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left ● The temperature of the passenger compart-
to be drawn into the passenger compart-
or right to set the desired temperature. ment will be maintained automatically. Air
ment to further improve the defogging per-
● Adjust the temperature display to about flow distribution and fan speed are also con-
formance.
75°F (24°C) for normal operation. trolled automatically.
● Do not set the temperature lower than the MANUAL OPERATION
● The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air outside air temperature. Otherwise, the sys- Fan speed control
flow distribution and fan speed are also con- tem may not work properly.
trolled automatically. Turn the fan speed control dial to manually
● Not recommended if windows fog up.
control the fan speed.
● A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is Dehumidified defrosting or defogging Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal- 1. Press the front defroster button on. control of the fan speed.
function. (The indicator light on the button will come Air recirculation
3. You can individually set driver’s and front on.)
passenger’s side temperature using each Press the air recirculation button to recir-
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
temperature control dial. When the DUAL culate interior air inside the vehicle. The
button or passenger’s side temperature dial desired temperature.
indicator light on the button will come on.
is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on.
The air recirculation cannot be activated when Automatic operation:
the air conditioner is in the front defrosting 1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator
mode or the front defrosting and foot out- light will illuminate and “AUTO” will appear
let mode. on the display.
Automatic intake air control 2. Turn the temperature control dial (driver’s
In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con- side) to set the desired temperature.
trolled automatically. To manually control the in- Manual operation :
take air, press the air recirculation button.
To return to the automatic control mode, press ● Temperature control
and hold the air recirculation button for Press the temperature control buttons to set
about 2 seconds. The indicator light will flash the desired temperature.
twice, and then the intake air will be controlled ● Fan speed control
automatically. LHA2168 Press the fan speed increase or decrease
Air flow control Rear automatic air conditioning system button to manually control the fan speed.
Pressing the MODE button manually controls air Press the A/C button when the rear automatic air
To control the rear automatic air conditioning
flow and selects the air outlet: conditioning system is turned on with the rear air
system with the front air conditioner control
panel, press the REAR button. When the rear conditioner screen displayed to turn off the rear
— Air flows from center and side
automatic air conditioning system control is on, automatic air conditioning system.
vents.
— Air flows from center and side vents the indicator light on the REAR button will illumi- Rear Heating (A/C off):
nate and the front display will switch to the rear air
and foot outlets. conditioner screen. 1. Press the REAR button to display the rear air
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets. conditioner screen on the front display when
The rear automatic air conditioning system can the rear automatic air conditioning system is
— Air flows from defroster and foot
be adjusted with the front air conditioner control on.
outlets. panel, when the rear air conditioner screen is
— Air flows from defroster outlets. displayed. 2. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator
light will illuminate and “AUTO” will appear
To adjust the front air conditioning system, press
the REAR button one more time. on the display.
3. If the A/C indicator light illuminates, press
the A/C button. The A/C indicator light will
turn off.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
● Do not set the temperature lower than the
outside air temperature. Doing so may cause
the temperature to not be controlled prop-
erly.
● To dehumidify the air, press the A/C button
before turning on the heater.
Turning the system off :
LHA2134
Press the OFF button when the rear air condi-
tioner screen is displayed. 1. OFF button display. To activate the rear control buttons,
2. Fan speed increase (+) button press the REAR button on the front air condi-
3. AUTO button tioner control panel and switch the screen on the
4. Temperature increase ( ) button front display.
5. Temperature decrease ( ) button OFF button: Turns rear automatic air conditioning
6. Display system off.
7. Fan speed decrease (-) button Fan speed increase and decrease buttons: Ad-
Rear control buttons: justs the rear fan speed up or down.
The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear AUTO button: Turns rear automatic air condition-
automatic air conditioning system using the con- ing system on, AUTO mode on.
trol switches at the rear of the center console.
Temperature increase and decrease buttons: Ad-
The rear control buttons do not function when the justs the rear temperature up or down
rear air conditioner screen is shown on the front
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
To turn system off The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
Press the OFF button. the environment in mind.
OPERATING TIPS This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
● When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
from the foot outlets may not operate for a quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera- will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
will operate normally. and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
LHA2473
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s
side of the instrument panel, helps the system WARNING
maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-
thing on or around this sensor. The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.

AUDIO SYSTEM
RADIO Reception conditions will constantly change be- Static and flutter: During signal interference from
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON signal distance and interference from other ve- (usually in conjunction with increased distance
position and press the VOL (volume)/ON·OFF hicles can work against ideal reception. De- from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
(power) knob to turn the radio on. If you listen to scribed below are some of the factors that can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
the radio with the engine not running, the ignition affect your radio reception. treble control to reduce treble response.
switch should be placed in the ACC position.
Some cellular phones or other devices may Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
Radio reception is affected by station signal cause interference or a buzzing noise to come characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build- from the audio system speakers. Storing the de- signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ- vice in a different location may reduce or elimi- signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality nate the noise. mentary flutter or loss of sound.
normally are caused by these external influences. FM RADIO RECEPTION AM RADIO RECEPTION
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve- Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
hicle may influence radio reception quality. (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM bend around objects and skip along the ground.
Radio reception having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter- In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with station reception even if the FM station is within these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra- 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
dio reception. These circuits are designed to directly related to the distance between the to receiver.
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual- transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
ity of that reception. of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
However, there are some general characteristics many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
off objects.
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from areas where no obstacles exist.
when the finest equipment is used. These char- a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
and/or drift.
acteristics are completely normal in a given re- power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so Compact disc (CD) player (models
equipped) without Navigation System)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite CAUTION
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal- ● Do not force a compact disc into the CD
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite insert slot. This could damage the CD
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or and/or CD changer/player.
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data. ● Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or CD
The satellite radio mode will be skipped unless an changer.
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
● Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
stalled and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service
player at a time.
subscription is active. Satellite radio is not avail-
able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. ● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
Satellite radio performance may be affected if round discs that have the “COMPACT
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
signal. or packaging.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite ● During cold weather or rainy days, the
antenna. player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can and dehumidify or ventilate the player
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the LHA0099 completely.
ice to restore satellite radio reception.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS ● The player may skip while driving on
XM® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Sat- rough roads.
ellite Radio, Inc.
● The CD player sometimes cannot function
when the compartment temperature is ex-
tremely high or low. Decrease/increase
the temperature before use.
● Do not expose the CD to direct sun- CHECK DISC: ● The player may skip while driving on
light. rough roads.
● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
● CDs that are in poor condition or are rectly (the label side is facing up, ● The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot
dirty, scratched or covered with finger- etc.). function when the passenger compart-
prints may not work properly. ● Confirm that the CD is not bent or ment temperature is extremely high.
● The following CDs may not work prop- warped and it is free of scratches. Decrease the temperature before use.
erly: PRESS EJECT: ● Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
● Copy control compact discs (CCCD) This is an error due to excessive tem-
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”
● Recordable compact discs (CD-R) perature inside the player. Remove the
logo on the disc or packaging.
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW) a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD ● Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct
● Do not use the following CDs as they can be played when the temperature of sunlight.
may cause the CD player to malfunc- the player returns to normal.
tion: ● CDs/DVDs that are of poor quality,
UNPLAYABLE: dirty, scratched, covered with finger-
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter The file is unplayable in this audio sys- prints, or that have pinholes may not
● CDs that are not round tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped) work properly.
CD).
● CDs with a paper label ● The following CDs/DVDs are not guar-
CD/DVD combination player (models anteed to play:
● CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges with Navigation System) ● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
● Do not force a disc into the CD/DVD
● This audio system can only play pre- ● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
insert slot. This could damage the
recorded CDs. It has no capability to CD/DVD player. ● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
record or burn CDs.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the ● Recordable compact discs (DVD±R,
● If the CD cannot be played, one of the player may malfunction due to the hu-
following messages will be displayed. DVD±R DL)
midity. If this occurs, remove the
CD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilate ● Rewritable compact discs
the player completely. (DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL)
● Do not use the following CDs/DVDs as Please Eject Disc:
they may cause the CD/DVD player to
This error may be due to the tempera-
malfunction.
ture inside the player getting too high.
● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the
EJECT button, and after a short time
● CDs/DVDs that are not round
reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can
● CDs/DVDs with a paper label be played when the temperature of the
player returns to normal. If the error
● CDs/DVDs that are warped, persists, consult your local dealership.
scratched, or have abnormal edges
Unplayable File:
● This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs/DVDs. It has no capa- ● The file may be copy protected.
bilities to record or burn CDs/DVDs.
● The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A
● If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of or DIVX type.
the following messages will be dis-
Region Invalid
played.
● The DVD is not for region 1 or all
Disc Read Error:
regions.
● Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted
● Use DVDs with a region code “1”,
correctly (the label side is facing up,
“ALL” or “1 included” for your DVD
etc.).
entertainment system. (The region
● Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent code 䊊A is displayed as a small sym-
LHA0484
or warped and it is free of scratches. bol printed on the top of the DVD
䊊B .) This vehicle-installed DVD Copyright and trademark
player cannot play DVDs with a re- ● The technology protected by the U.S.
gion code other than “1” or “ALL”.
patent and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision
Corporation and other right holders is
adopted for this system.
● This copyright protected technology – Do not store objects with sharp
CAUTION
cannot be used without a permit from edges in the storage area where the
Macrovision Corporation. It is limited ● Do not force the USB device into the
cable is stored.
to personal use, etc., as long as the USB port. Inserting the USB device
permit from Macrovision Corporation tilted or up-side-down into the port may – Do not leave the USB device and
is not issued. damage the USB device and the port. attached devices in the vehicle com-
Make sure that the USB device is con- partment. When not in use for ex-
● Modifying or disassembling is prohib- nected correctly into the USB port. tended periods of time, store the
ited. cable and USB device in a clean, dust
● Do not grab the USB port cover (if so
free environment at room tempera-
● Dolby digital is manufactured under li- equipped) when pulling the USB device
ture and without direct sun exposure.
cense from Dolby Laboratories, Inc. out of the port. This could damage the
port and the cover. – Do not use the cable for any other
● Dolby and the double D mark “ ” purposes than its intended use in the
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, ● Do not leave the USB cable in a place
vehicle.
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Inc.
Pulling the cable may break the wire, The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.
● DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ” USB device or the port. USB devices should be purchased separately as
are registered trademarks of Digital ● To avoid damage and loss of function necessary.
Theater Systems, Inc. when using a USB device, note the fol- This system cannot be used to format USB de-
lowing precautions.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) memory (if vices. To format a USB device, use a personal
so equipped) – Do not bend the cable excessively computer.
(1.6 in [40 mm]) radius minimum.
In some states/area, the USB device for the front
WARNING – Do not twist the cable excessively seats plays only sound without images for regu-
(more than 180 degrees). latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
Do not connect or disconnect the USB
device while driving. Doing so can be a – Do not pull or drop the cable. This system supports various USB memory de-
distraction. If distracted you could lose – Do not hit or press the USB port or vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some
control of your vehicle and cause an acci- USB device with hands, feet, or USB devices may not be supported by this sys-
dent or serious injury. objects. tem.

● Partitioned USB devices may not play cor- ● If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, con- ● An incorrect song title may appear when the
rectly. nectors cracked, contamination such as liq- Play Mode is changed while using an iPod®
uids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do nano (2nd Generation).
● Some characters used in other languages
not use the cable. Replace the cable with a ● Audiobooks may not play in the same order
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear
new one. as they appear on an iPod®.
properly in the display. Using English lan-
guage characters with a USB device is rec- ● Do not put a USB device in a location where ● Large video files cause slow responses in an
ommended. static electricity occurs, electrical noise is iPod®. The vehicle center display may mo-
generated or hot air from the air conditioner mentarily black out, but will soon recover.
General notes for USB use:
blows directly on it. Doing so may cause the
● The USB device may not function when the data stored on the USB device to be cor- ● If an iPod® automatically selects large video
files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle
passenger compartment temperature is ex- rupted.
center display may momentarily black out,
tremely high. Lower the temperature before
Notes for iPod® use: but will soon recover.
use.
● During cold weather or rainy days, the player
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in Bluetooth® streaming audio (if so
the U.S. and other countries. equipped)
may malfunction due to humidity. If this oc-
curs, remove the USB device and dehumidify ● Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause ● Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be
or ventilate the USB player completely. a checkmark to be displayed on and off recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
(flickering). Always make sure that the
● Do not connect a USB device if a connector, ● It is necessary to set up the wireless con-
cable or USB port is wet. Allow the connec- iPod® is connected properly.
nection between a compatible Bluetooth®
tor, cable, and USB port to dry completely ● An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth®
before connecting the USB device. (Wait for in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con- module before using the Bluetooth® audio.
24 hours or more until it is dry.) If the connected during a seek operation. In this case,
nector and USB port are exposed to fluids ● Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® au-
please manually reset the iPod®. dio will vary depending on the devices. Make
other than water, evaporative residue may
cause a short circuit between the connector ● An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will con- sure how to operate your audio device be-
pins and USB port. In this case, replace the tinue to fast-forward or rewind if it is discon- fore using it with this system.
cable and USB port. Otherwise damage to nected during a seek operation.
the USB device and a loss of function may
occur.
● The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped un- CD or USB with Compressed Audio ● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
der the following conditions: Files (models without Navigation bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
● Receiving a call on the Hands-Free System) audio file is determined by the bit rate used
Phone System. when encoding the file.
The file types supported by this system are MP3
● Checking the connection to the hands- and WMA. ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
free phone. is the rate at which the samples of a signal
Explanation of terms:
● Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in are converted from analog to digital (A/D
an area surrounded by metal or far away from ● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures conversion) per second.
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent ● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
tone quality degradation and wireless con- most well-known compressed digital audio methods for writing data to media. Writing
nection disruption. file format. This format allows for near “CD data once to the media is called a single
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of session, and writing more than once is called
● While an audio device is connected through normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an a multisession.
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
battery power of the device may discharge file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with ● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
quicker than usual. virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
compression removes the redundant and contains information about the digital music
● This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP). irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
human ear doesn’t hear.
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title
BLUETOOTH® is a ● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a line on the display.
trademark owned by compressed audio format created by Micro- * Windows®, Windows Media® and Windows
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA Vista® are registered trademarks and trade-
and licensed to codec offers greater file compression than marks in the United States of America and other
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
Clarion Co., Ltd. digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.

Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
● The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
WHA1078
Playback order chart

Specification chart:
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB 2.0

CD, CD-R, CD-RW, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista® operating system-based
Supported file systems computer) are not supported.
UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0
VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Supported Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*2
versions WMA*1 Version WMA7, WMA8
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*2
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 64 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 LE), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 BE), 05: UNI-
Displayable character codes*3
CODE (UTF-8)
*1 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*2 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the CD/USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Cannot play Files with extensions other than “.MP3” or “.WMA” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder names and
file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-
ing application or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/USB device is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
before the music starts
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
Music cuts off or skips
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
files
Moves immediately to the If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
next song when playing player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
the desired order Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.

CD, DVD or USB with Compressed ● AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding ● ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
Audio Files (models with Navigation (AAC) is a lossy audio compression format. part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
Audio files that have been encoded with contains information about the digital music
System) AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver file such as song title, artist, album title,
The file types supported by this system are MP3, a higher quality of sound than MP3. encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
WMA, AAC/M4A and ATRAC3. ID3 tag information is displayed on the
● ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus — Adaptive Trans- Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
Explanation of terms: form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy
audio compression format developed by * Windows®, Windows Media® and Windows
● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Sony. Vista® are registered trademarks or trademarks
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of
most well known compressed digital audio ● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of America and/or other countries.
file format. This format allows for near “CD bits per second used by a digital music file.
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of The size and quality of a compressed digital
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio file is determined by the bit rate used
audio track can reduce the file size by ap- when encoding the file.
proximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz, ● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no percep- is the rate at which the samples of a signal
tible loss in quality. The compression re- are converted from analog to digital (A/D
duces certain parts of sound that seem in- conversion) per second.
audible to most people.
● Multisession — Multisession is one of the
● WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a methods for writing data to media. Writing
compressed audio format created by Micro- data once to the media is called a single
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA session, and writing more than once is called
codec offers greater file compression than a multisession.
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.

Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD, DVD or USB
device with compressed audio files is as illus-
trated.
● The folder names of folders not containing
compressed audio files are not shown in the
display.
● If there is a file in the top level of the
disc/USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.
● The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software, so
the files might not play in the desired order.
WHA1374
Playback order chart

Specification chart:
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, USB 2.0
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista® operating system-based computer) are not supported.
Supported file systems
UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0
* VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
MP3 Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Supported
Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
versions*1
AAC Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz
ATRAC Version ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)
Tag information (Song title and artist name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNI-
Displayable character codes*3
CODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF 16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Check if the CD/DVD/USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Cannot play Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A” or “.AA3” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of charac-
ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-
ing application or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/DVD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts
before the music starts playing.
playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
Music cuts off or skips
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
files
Moves immediately to the If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
next song when playing player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
the desired order Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.

Compressed Video Files (models with
Navigation System)
Explanation of terms:
● DivX – DivX refers to the DivX® codec
owned by Div, Inc. used for a lossy compres-
sion of video based on MPEG-4.
● AVI – AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.
It is standard file format originated by Micro-
soft Corporation. A .divx encoded file can be
saved into the .avi file format for playback on
this system if it meets the requirements
stated in the table in this section. However,
all .avi files are not playable on this system
since different encodings can be used other
than the DivX® codec.
● ASF – ASF stands for Advanced Systems
Format. It is a file format owned by Microsoft
Corporation. Note: Only .asf files that meet
the requirements stated in the table in this
section can be played.
● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital video files.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.

Requirements for Supporting Video Playback:
Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
File Systems DL * Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.
* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB Memory FAT16, FAT32
.divx, .avi Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6
Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM
File Types
.asf Video Codec ISO-MPEG4
Audio Codec G.726
.divx, .avi Maximum Average 4 Mbps
Bit Rates
Maximum Peak 8 Mbps
.divx, .avi Minimum 32 x 32
Maximum 720 x 480
Resolution
.asf Minimum 32 x 32
Maximum 720 x 576

9. SEEK/CAT button
10. DISC button
11. RPT/RDM button
12. SCAN button
13. AM·FM button
14. DISP/CLOCK button
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) CHANGER (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ⬙Audio opera-
tion precautions⬙ in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio
or CD) that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.
LHA2104
1. 5. TUNE/FOLDER and AUDIO control To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
CD eject button
knob (Bass, Treble, Fade, Balance, SSV control knob.
2. VOL/ON·OFF control knob
3. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons (if so equipped), and Beep) Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
4. LOAD CD button 6. AUX IN jack volume.
7. AUX button
8. TRACK button
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Fade, Adjusting the time ● Track number displays the track number se-
Balance and Beep): lected on the disc.
1. Push and hold the DISP/CLOCK button for
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the more than 2 seconds until the display shows ● Track time displays the amount of time the
mode as follows: “Hour Adjust”. track has played.
Bass → Treble → Fade → Balance → Beep 2. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the ● Album title displays the title of the CD being
ON/OFF → Bass hour. played.
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, press 3. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again; the ● Song title displays the title of the selected
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode display will show “Minute Adjust”. CD track.
appears on the display. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER
4. Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to adjust the MP3 display mode
knob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desired
minutes.
level. You can also use the TUNE/FOLDER knob To change the text displayed when listening to a
to adjust Fade and Balance modes. Fade adjusts 5. Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to exit CD with MP3s and ID3 tags, press the
the sound level between the front and rear speak- the clock set mode. DISP/CLOCK button. The DISP/CLOCK button
ers and Balance adjusts the sound between the will scroll through the CD text as follows: Disc
Press the DISP/CLOCK button again to return to
right and left speakers. number, Track number and Folder number ←→
the regular clock display. If no action is taken, the
Folder title ←→ Song title ←→ Artist name ←→
To change the Beep to ON or OFF, turn the display will return to the regular clock display
TUNE/FOLDER knob left or right. This will enable Album title.
after 10 seconds.
or disable the beep sound heard during menu ● Disc number displays the number of the
selection. If the power supply is disconnected, the clock will
current disc playing.
not indicate the correct time.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the ● Track number displays the number of the
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re- Readjust the time.
track playing on the selected disc.
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. CD display mode
Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati- ● Folder number displays the number of the
cally reappear after about five seconds. To change the text displayed while playing a CD current folder on the MP3 CD.
with text, press the DISP/CLOCK button. The
Clock set ● Folder title displays the title of the folder.
DISP/CLOCK button will allow you to scroll
The clock displays the time when the ignition through CD text as follows: Track number and ● Song title displays the title of the song play-
switch is placed in the ACC or ON position. Track time ←→ Album title ←→ Song title. ing.
● Artist name displays the name of the artist of SEEK/CAT and TRACK 3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the song playing. the sound will resume. Programming is now
tuning buttons: complete.
● Album title displays the title of the album of
the song playing. Press the SEEK/CAT button or the 4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
TRACK button to tune from high to low or ner.
FM/AM radio operation
low to high frequencies and stop at the next If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
FM/AM band select: broadcasting station. opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
Pressing the AM·FM button will change the band SCAN tuning: case, reset the desired stations.
as follows:
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad- Compact disc (CD) changer operation
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
When the AM·FM button is pressed while the SCAN button again during this 5-second period position and press the LOAD button, then press
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain one of the CD insert (1 – 6) slots. Insert the
radio will come on at the station last played. tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not compact disc into the slot with the label side
pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to facing up. The compact disc will be guided auto-
The last station played will also come on when the next station.
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON. matically into the slot and start playing.
1 to 6 Station memory operations: If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
If a compact disc is playing when the AM·FM
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto- Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
matically be turned off and the last radio station FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for If the system has been turned off while a compact
played will come on. the AM band. disc was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF
The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during 1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 control knob will start the compact disc.
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast using the AM·FM select button.
signal is weak, the radio will automatically change LOAD button:
from stereo to monaural reception. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual, To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any LOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Select
TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob: of the desired station memory buttons (1 – the loading slot by pressing the CD insert select
To manually tune the radio, turn the 6) until a beep sound is heard. button (1 – 6), then insert the CD.
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left.
To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press the SEEK/CAT and TRACK MP3/WMA CD:
LOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds. (Rewind·Fast Forward) All Disc Repeat → 1 Disc Repeat → 1 Folder
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on the buttons: Repeat → 1 Track Repeat → All Disc Random →
display when CDs are loaded into the changer. 1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → All Disc
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind) Repeat
DISC button:
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button All Disc Repeat: All discs loaded will be re-
When the DISC button is pressed with the sys- while a compact disc is playing, the compact disc peated.
tem off and a compact disc loaded, the system will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When 1 Disc Repeat: The disc that is currently playing
will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. the button is released, the compact disc will will be repeated.
return to normal play speed. 1 Track Repeat: The track that is currently playing
When the DISC button is pressed with a com-
will be repeated.
pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio TUNE/FOLDER knob 1 Folder Repeat: The folder that is currently being
will automatically be turned off and the compact accessed will be repeated.
disc will start to play. While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to scan forward All Disc Random: All discs loaded will be played
SEEK/CAT and TRACK or backward through available folders. in a mixed order.
1 Disc Random: The tracks on the disc that is
buttons: CD select buttons: currently playing will be played in a mixed order.
1 Folder Random: The tracks in the folder that is
When the SEEK/CAT button is pressed To play another CD that has been loaded, press a currently being accessed will be played in a
while a compact disc is playing, the track being CD select button (1 – 6). mixed order.
played returns to its beginning. Press several times
RPT/RDM button: SCAN button:
to skip back through tracks. The compact disc will
go back the number of times the button is pressed. When the RPT/RDM button is pressed while the While listening to a CD, press the SCAN button
compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be to preview the first 10 seconds of each track on
When the TRACK button is pressed while
changed as follows: the CD playing. Pressing the SCAN button again
the compact disc is playing, the next track will start
to play from its beginning. Press several times to CD: during this 10 second period stops the scan and
skip through tracks. The compact disc will advance the CD remains on that track.
the number of times the button is pressed. (When All Disc Repeat → 1 Disc Repeat → 1 Track
the last track on the compact disc is skipped Repeat → All Disc Random → 1 Disc Random →
through, the first track will be played.) All Disc Repeat
CD EJECT: CD IN indicator:
The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDs
Current/Selected disc: have been loaded into the changer in CD mode
only.
● Press the button, then press the slot
number (1 – 6) for the desired disc. The AUX IN jack
compact disc will be ejected. If no slot num- The AUX IN jack is located on the CD changer.
ber (1 – 6) is pressed, the current loaded The AUX IN audio input jack accepts any stan-
disc will be ejected. If the ejected disc is not dard analog audio input, such as from a portable
removed within 15 seconds, the disc will cassette tape player, MP3 player or a laptop
reload. computer.
All discs: Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
● Press and hold the button for more when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
than 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will be
ejected one by one. If a disc is not removed
within 15 seconds or the button is
pressed again during the eject sequence,
the entire disc eject sequence will be can-
celed.
When this button is pressed while a compact
disc is being played, the compact disc will eject
and the last source will be played.

*No satellite radio reception is available
when the AUX button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio
service subscription is active. Satellite
radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so
equipped)
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
WHA1364 while the system is off to call up the mode that
was playing immediately before the system was
1. CD eject button 6. TRACK button
turned off.
2. VOL/ON·OFF control knob 7. SEEK/CAT button
3. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 8. DISC button To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
4. TUNE/FOLDER and AUDIO control 9. RPT/RDM button control knob.
knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance) 10. SCAN button Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
5. AUX button* 11. FM·AM button volume.
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-
ance and Fade):
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the
mode as follows:
Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode
appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and LHA1304 LHA1314
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV): Clock operation
between the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press For additional information on setting the clock,
speakers. the SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” key see “Adjusting the time” in this section.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the using the NISSAN controller; the audio settings
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re- screen will be displayed. Select the “–” key or “+”
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. key to change the SSV.
If the control knob is not pressed for approxi- While in this screen you can also adjust the other
mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will audio settings by selecting the corresponding key.
automatically reappear.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the BACK button.
For information on how to use the NISSAN con-
troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller” in
this section.
Press the BACK button to exit the CD text display
screen.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM band select:
Pressing the FM·AM button will change the band
as follows:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM
When the FM·AM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
WHA0949 WHA0950
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
CD/MP3 display mode ● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name. If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM
While listening to a CD or an MP3/WMA CD, button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
certain text might be able to be displayed (when ● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the matically be turned off and the last radio station
CD encoded with text is being used). artist’s name. played will come on.
Depending on how the CD or MP3/WMA CD is ● Disc displays the disc name of the CD cur- The FM stereo indicator ST will illuminate during
encoded, the following text might be able to be rently playing. FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
displayed by selecting the “Text” key: signal is weak, the radio will automatically change
● Track displays the name of the song on the
from stereo to monaural reception.
● Folder displays the name of the current CD currently playing.
folder being accessed. XM band select:
Some of this text or modes might not display
● File displays the name of the file currently while playing a regular CD. Select the “Menu” key Pressing the AUX button will change the band as
playing. with the NISSAN controller, then select the “Text” follows:
● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the key to display the text for the CD. USB → XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → AUX → USB
song name. (satellite, if so equipped)
When the AUX button is pressed while the igni- SCAN tuning: If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
radio will come on at the station last played. case, reset the desired stations.
casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the
The last station played will also come on when SCAN button again during this five second pe- Radio data system (RDS):
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON. riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not
*When the AUX button is pressed, the satellite information service transmitted by some radio
pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
the next station.
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and a rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
SiriusXM Satellite Radio service subscription is 1 to 6 Station memory operations: many stations are now considering broadcasting
active. Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, RDS data.
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
Hawaii and Guam.
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6 RDS can display:
If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button for FM2). Eighteen stations can be set for the XM
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be band (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3).
turned off and the last radio station played will ● Station name, such as “The Groove”.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
come on.
using the FM·AM select button or choose ● Music or programming type such as “Clas-
TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob: the satellite band SAT1 or SAT2 using the sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
AUX button.
To manually tune the radio, turn the When the “Text” key is selected with the NISSAN
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left. 2. Tune to the desired station using manual, controller on the display while the radio is playing,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any additional information is displayed on the screen.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
tuning buttons: If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
6) until a beep sound is heard.
RDS icon is displayed.
Press the SEEK/CAT button or the 3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
Compact disc (CD) player operation
TRACK button to tune from high to low or
low to high frequencies and stop at the next complete. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and
broadcasting station. insert the compact disc into the slot with the label
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
side facing up. The compact disc will be guided
ner. automatically into the slot and start playing.
If the radio is already operating, it will automati- vance the number of times the button is pressed. CD with compressed audio files:
cally turn off and the compact disc will play. (When the last track on the compact disc is
Repeat All → 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat
skipped through, the first track will be played.) → 1 Disc Random → 1 Folder Random → Re-
If the system has been turned off while the com-
pact disc was playing, pressing the The NISSAN controller can also be used to se- peat All
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact lect tracks when a CD is playing. Repeat All: Normal play mode. All tracks will
disc. constantly play in sequential order.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
DISC button: 1 Folder Repeat: The folder that is currently being
(Rewind and Fast accessed will be repeated.
When the DISC button is pressed with the sys- Forward) buttons: 1 Track Repeat: The track that is currently playing
tem off and a compact disc loaded, the system will be repeated.
will turn on and the compact disc will start to play. Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind) 1 Disc Random: The tracks on the disc that is
button or the TRACK (fast forward) button currently playing will be played in a mixed order.
When the DISC button is pressed with a com- 1 Folder Random: The tracks in the folder that is
pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radio while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When currently playing will be played in a mixed order.
will automatically be turned off and the compact
the button is released, the compact disc will CD EJECT button:
disc will start to play.
return to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK TUNE/FOLDER knob When the button is pressed with the com-
buttons: pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
While playing an MP3/WMA CD, turn the ejected.
When the SEEK/CAT button is pressed TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to scan forward
while a compact disc is playing, the track being or backward through available folders. When the button is pressed while the
played returns to its beginning. Press several RPT/RDM button: compact disc is being played, the compact disc
times to skip back through tracks. The compact will eject and the system will turn off.
disc will go back the number of times the button When the RPT/RDM button is pressed while the
is pressed. compact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
When the TRACK button is pressed while
CD:
a compact disc is playing, the next track will start
to play from its beginning. Press several times to Repeat All → 1 Track Repeat → 1 Disc Random
skip through tracks. The compact disc will ad- → Repeat All
Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input
jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.
With a compatible device connected to the aux-
iliary input jacks, press the AUX button until the
AUX mode appears in the display. The output
from the device will be played through the display
(when the vehicle is in the (P) Park position and
the parking brake engaged) and audio system.
LHA2474 LHA1367
AUX (auxiliary) input jacks AUX settings
The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the Select the “Settings” key using the NISSAN con-
center console 䊊 1 . NTSC compatible devices troller and press the ENTER button.
such as video games, camcorders and portable Choose one of the display modes by selecting
video players can be connected to the auxiliary
the “ ” key or the “ ” key:
input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3
players, can also be connected to the system ● Normal
through the auxiliary input jacks.
● Wide
The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-
tification purposes: ● Cinema
● Red – right channel audio input

● White – left channel audio input
● Yellow – video input
Additional features
For more information about the iPod® player
available with this system, see “iPod® player
operation without Navigation System” in this sec-
tion.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models without Navigation System)” in this sec-
tion.
LHA2449
1. CD eject button 6. TRACK button
2. VOL/ON·OFF control knob 7. SEEK/CAT button
3. Station select (1 - 6) buttons 8. SAT* button
4. TUNE/FOLDER and AUDIO control 9. RPT/RDM button
knob (Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance) 10. SCAN button
5. DISC·AUX button 11. AM·FM button
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
*No satellite radio reception is available for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-
when the SAT button is pressed to ac- ing speed changes.
cess satellite radio stations unless op- AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are ance and Fade):
installed and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio Press the AUDIO control knob to change the
service subscription is active. Satellite mode as follows:
radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii Bass → Treble → Balance → Fade
and Guam.
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH CD/DVD the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode
PLAYER (if so equipped) appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and LHA1236
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
Audio main operation between the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press
VOL/ON·OFF control: speakers. the SETTING button. Then select the “Audio” key
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the using the NISSAN controller, then press the EN-
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re- TER button; the audio settings screen will be
while the system is off to call up the mode that peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears. displayed. Select the “–” key or “+” key to change
was playing immediately before the system was If the control knob is not pressed for approxi- the SSV.
turned off. mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will While in this screen you can also adjust the other
automatically reappear. audio settings by selecting the corresponding
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob. key.
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
volume. desired level, press the BACK button.

LHA1256 LHA1257 LHA1258
For information on how to use the NISSAN con- Display album cover art: CD, DVD or USB with compressed audio
troller, see “How to use the NISSAN controller” in files
When an audio source encoded with album
this section.
cover art is played, the album cover art can be While listening to a CD or compressed audio
displayed on the screen. To toggle this feature on files, certain text might be able to be displayed
or off, touch the “Display Album Cover Art” key. (when CD encoded with text is being used).
When the feature is activated, the amber indica-
tor next to the word ON will illuminate. Depending on how the CD or compressed audio
files are encoded, the following text might be
displayed:
● Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
● File displays the name of the file currently
playing.

● Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automati- SEEK/CAT and TRACK
song name. cally change from stereo to monaural reception. tuning buttons:
● Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the SAT band select:
album name. For AM or FM:
Pressing the SAT button will change the band as Press the SEEK/CAT button or the
● Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the follows: TRACK button to tune from high to low or
artist’s name.
XM1* → XM2* → XM3* → XM1 (satellite, if so low to high frequencies and stop at the next
Some of this text might not display while playing a equipped) broadcasting station.
regular CD. For XM:
When the SAT button is pressed while the igni-
FM/AM/SAT radio operation tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the Press the SEEK/CAT button or the
radio will come on at the station last played. TRACK button to go to the first channel of
FM/AM band select:
The last station played will also come on when the previous or next category.
Pressing the AM·FM button will change the band the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON. SCAN tuning:
as follows:
*When the SAT button is pressed, the satellite Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
AM → FM1 → FM2 → AM radio reception will not be available unless an casting station for 5 seconds. Pressing the
When the AM·FM button is pressed while the optional satellite receiver and antenna are in- SCAN button again during this five second pe-
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the stalled and a SiriusXM Satellite Radio service riod will stop scan tuning and the radio will remain
radio will come on at the station last played. subscription is active. Satellite radio is not avail- tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is not
able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. pressed within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to
The last station played will also come on when
If a compact disc is playing when the SAT button the next station.
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be 1 to 6 Station memory operations:
If a compact disc is playing when the AM·FM turned off and the last radio station played will
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto- come on. Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
matically be turned off and the last radio station stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
played will come on. TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob: for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the
To manually tune the radio, turn the SAT radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3 – if so
The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left. equipped).
during FM stereo reception. When the stereo
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2 – Tags the current artist or song playing on
using the FM·AM select button, or choose SiriusXM Satellite Radio as a favorite.
the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using
the SAT button. – Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a
favorite artist or song is playing on Sirius
2. Tune to the desired station using manual, XM Satellite Radio. The audio system
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any must be playing Sirius XM Satellite Radio
of the desired station memory buttons (1 – for this feature to work.
6) until the preset number is updated on the
display and the sound is briefly muted. – Delete a favorite artist or song.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and ● Categories – Displays a category list for
the sound will resume. Programming is now SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Select a category
complete. to select the first channel for that category.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man- ● Direct Tune – Tune to a channel by entering
LHA1375
ner. the channel number.
Menu (SiriusXM Satellite Radio, if so
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse Radio data system (RDS):
equipped)
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations. Select the “Menu” key using the NISSAN control- RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
ler or touchscreen to see a list of options: information service transmitted by some radio sta-
List (AM and FM) tions on the FM band (not AM band). Currently, most
Select the “List” key using the NISSAN controller ● Preset List – Displays the list of presets. RDS stations are in large cities, but many stations
or touchscreen to see a list of the presets in the Press and hold the touchscreen or ENTER are now considering broadcasting RDS data.
AM, FM1 or FM2 preset banks. button on the NISSAN controller to save a RDS can display:
preset.
● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
● Customize Channel List – deselect chan-
nels to skip while using the TUNE/FOLDER ● Station name, such as “The Groove”.
knob. ● Music or programming type such as “Clas-
● Favorite Artist & Songs sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
● Station specific text.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the SEEK/CAT and TRACK SEEK/CAT and TRACK
text information is automatically displayed.
buttons: (Rewind and Fast
Compact disc (CD) player operation Forward) buttons:
When the SEEK/CAT button is pressed
Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position and while a compact disc is playing, the track being Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)
insert the compact disc into the slot with the label played returns to its beginning. Press several
side facing up. The compact disc will be guided button or the TRACK (fast forward) button
times to skip back through tracks. The compact
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc
automatically into the slot and start playing. disc will go back the number of times the button
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
is pressed.
If the radio is already operating, it will automati- the button is released, the compact disc will
cally turn off and the compact disc will play. When the TRACK button is pressed while return to normal play speed.
the compact disc is playing, the next track will TUNE/FOLDER knob
If the system has been turned off while the com-
start to play from its beginning. Press several
pact disc was playing, pressing the While playing a CD with compressed audio files,
times to skip through tracks. The compact disc
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact will advance the number of times the button is turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to play
disc. pressed. (When the last track on the compact the next or previous folder.
DISC·AUX button: disc is skipped through, the first track will be
played.)
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded, the The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-
system will turn on and the compact disc will start lect tracks when a CD is being played.
to play.
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.

LHA1258 LHA1259 LHA1262
CD menu ● Play Mode Normal - Plays all tracks on the CD in sequential
order until stopped.
Touch the “Menu” key on the display while a CD This option allows you to alter the play pattern of
or CD with compressed audio files is playing to the CD. Touch the key of the mode you wish to
bring up a list of options. Depending on the type apply. The modes change the play pattern as
of CD being played, the following options may be follows:
available:
1 Track Repeat - the current track is repeated.
1 Disc Random- tracks from the entire disc are
played randomly.
1 Folder Repeat (compressed audio files CD
only) - the current folder is repeated.
1 Folder Random (compressed audio files CD
only) - tracks from the current folder are played
randomly.
LHA1260 LHA1261 LHA2474
● Folder List ● Track List AUX (auxiliary) input jacks
The folders on the disc are displayed. Select the The tracks on the disc are displayed. Select the The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the
key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from key of a track name to begin playing that track. center console 䊊 1 . NTSC compatible devices
that folder. such as video games, camcorders and portable
CD EJECT button:
video players can be connected to the auxiliary
When the button is pressed with the com- input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be players, can also be connected to the system
ejected. through the auxiliary input jacks.
When the button is pressed while the The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-
compact disc is being played, the compact disc tification purposes:
will eject and the system will turn off. ● Red – right channel audio input
● White – left channel audio input
● Yellow – video input
Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input
jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.
With a compatible device connected to the aux-
iliary input jacks, press the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the
display. The output from the device will be played
through the display (when the vehicle is in the (P)
Park position and the parking brake engaged)
and audio system.
WHA1393 LHA1394
AUX settings For more information about the Bluetooth®
streaming audio feature available with this sys-
Select the “Settings” key using the NISSAN con- tem, see “Bluetooth® streaming audio” in this
troller. section.
The display mode can be set to Normal, Wide or
Cinema. The volume setting can be set to Low,
Medium or High.
Additional features
For more information about the iPod® player
available with this system, see “iPod® player
operation with Navigation System” in this section.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models with Navigation System)” in this section.
DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD) CAUTION
PLAYER OPERATION (models with ● Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
Navigation System) engine is running. Operating the DVD
for extended periods of time with the
Precautions engine OFF can discharge the vehicle
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain- battery.
ment system. ● Do not allow the system to get wet.
Movies will not be shown on the front display Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-
while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce uids may cause the system to
driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie malfunction.
is played. To view movies on the front display, ● While playing VIDEO-CD media, this
stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift DVD player does not guarantee com-
selector to the P (Park) position and apply the plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD LHA1376
parking brake. formats.
Playing a DVD
WARNING DISC-AUX button
● The driver must not attempt to operate Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front
the DVD system or wear the head- seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while
phones while the vehicle is in motion so watching the images.
that full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation. Press the DISC-AUX button until the DVD mode
is active on the display.
● Do not attempt to modify the system to
display a movie on the front screen When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-
while the vehicle is being driven. Doing matically.
so may distract the driver and may
cause a collision and serious personal
injury or death.

The operation screen will be turned on when the NEXT/PREVIOUS – Select the directional keys to move the
DISC-AUX button is pressed while a DVD is CHAPTER: cursor on the DVD menu.
playing. The operation screen will turn off auto-
Select the key to skip the chapter(s) of the – Select the “Enter” key to fix the selected
matically after a period of time. To turn it on again,
disc forward. Select the key to skip the menu item.
press the DISC-AUX button.
chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters – Select the “Move” key to move the loca-
DVD operation keys will advance forward or backward the number of tion of the operation keys on the screen.
When the DVD is playing without the operation times the respective key is touched or selected
with the NISSAN controller. – Select the “Back” key to return to the
screen being shown, you may use the touch-
previous menu screen.
screen to select items from the displayed video. CM SKIP:
You may also use the NISSAN controller to select – Select the “Hide” key to hide the opera-
an item from the displayed video. When the option keys.
eration screen is being shown, use the NISSAN This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-
VR. Select the or key to fast forward ● Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO)
controller or the touchscreen to select an item
or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM Some menus specific to each disc will be
from the displayed menus.
settings. For more information, see “DVD set- shown. For details, see the instructions at-
PAUSE: tings” in this section. tached to the disc.
Top Menu: ● Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
Select the key to pause the DVD. To re- The scene with the specified title will be
When the “Top Menu” key is selected while the displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
sume playing the DVD, use the key.
DVD is playing, the top menu specific to each side is selected.
PLAY: disc will be displayed. For details, see the instruc-
tions attached to the disc. ● Group Search (VIDEO CD)
The scene with the specified group will be
Select the key to start playing the DVD or DVD settings displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
resume playing the DVD after it has been paused. side is selected.
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
STOP: settings:
● Key (DVD-VIDEO)
Select the key to stop playing the DVD. Displays the operation keys for the specific
DVD menu.
● 10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD, ● CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO) ● Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
CD-DA, DVD-VR) Select the “CM Skip” key to choose the DVD-VR)
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the setting time for CM backward and forward Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
number entry screen. Input the number you operations. Use the “+” or “-” key to choose “Cinema” mode.
want to search for and select the “OK” key. a setting time of 15, 30 or 60 seconds. ● Title List (DVD-VR)
The specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track Choose the preferred title from the list.
● DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
will be played.
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto- ● Play Mode
● Select No. (VIDEO CD) matically adjusts the soundtrack volume Choose the preferred play mode.
Select the “Select No.” key to open the level to maintain a more even sound to the
number entry screen. Input the number you speakers. ● PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR)
Choose from the “PG” or “PL” mode.
want to search for and select the “OK” key.
● DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD)
The specified scene will be played.
Select the “DVD Language” key to open the
● Angle (DVD-VIDEO) number entry screen. Input the number cor-
If the DVD contains different angles (such as responding to the preferred language and
moving images), the current image angle select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu
can be switched to another one. Select the language will be changed to the one speci-
“Angle” key and use the “+” or “-” key to fied.
change the angle.
● Display
● Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO) Adjust the image quality of the screen by
When this item is turned on, an angle mark selecting the preferred adjustment items.
will be shown on the bottom of the screen if
● Audio
the scene can be seen from a different angle.
Choose the preferred language for the au-
● Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO) dio.
DVD menus are automatically configured
● Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
and the contents will be played directly
Choose the preferred language for the sub-
when the “Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note
titles.
that some discs may not be played directly
even if this item is turned on.
● Do not force the USB device into the press the AUX button repeatedly until the center
USB port. Inserting the USB device display changes to the USB memory mode.
tilted or up-side-down into the port may If the system has been turned off while the USB
damage the USB device and the port. memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
Make sure that the USB device is con- control knob to restart the USB memory.
nected correctly into the USB port.
SEEK/CAT and TRACK
(Some USB devices come with a
mark as a guide. Make sure that the (Reverse or Fast Forward)
mark is facing the correct direction be- buttons:
fore inserting the device.)
● Do not locate objects near the USB de- Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)
vice to prevent the objects from leaning button or TRACK (fast forward) button for
on the USB device and the port. Pres- 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB
LHA2475 sure from the objects may damage the device is playing to reverse or fast forward the
USB device and the port. track being played. The track plays at an in-
USB INTERFACE (models without creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
Navigation System) (if so equipped) The USB input jack is located in the center con- When the button is released, the audio file re-
sole. Insert the USB device into the jack 䊊
1 . turns to normal play speed.
Connecting a device to the USB input
When a compatible storage device is plugged SEEK/CAT and TRACK
jack into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor- buttons:
age device can be played through the vehicle’s
CAUTION audio system. Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
● Depending on size and shape of USB dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
device, the console lid may not fully Audio file operation the beginning of the current track. Press the
close. Do not force console lid closed AUX button: SEEK/CAT button several times to skip
as this may damage USB device. backward several tracks.
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
playing and a USB memory device is inserted,
Press the TRACK button while an audio
file on the USB device is playing to advance one
track. Press the TRACK button several
times to skip forward several tracks. If the last
track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the
first track of the next folder is played.
Folder selection:
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder
displayed on the screen.
RPT/RDM button:
When the RPT/RDM button is pressed while the
USB memory is playing, the play pattern can be LHA2475 LHA1378
changed as follows: USB INTERFACE (models with
Repeat All → 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat Navigation System)
→ All Random → 1 Folder Random → Repeat All
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
CAUTION
● Depending on size and shape of USB
device, the console lid may not fully
close. Do not force console lid closed
as this may damage USB device.

● Do not force the USB device into the When you play a file with limited playing time, the When the button is released, the audio file re-
USB port. Inserting the USB device confirmation screen will be displayed before turns to normal play speed.
tilted or up-side-down into the port may starting to play the file. Confirm the playing time SEEK/CAT and TRACK
damage the USB device and the port. and select “yes” to start playing.
buttons:
Make sure that the USB device is con-
Audio file operation
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
(Some USB devices come with a DISC•AUX button: dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
mark as a guide. Make sure that the the beginning of the current track. Press the
mark is facing the correct direction be- Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the DISC•AUX button to SEEK/CAT button several times to skip
fore inserting the device.)
switch to the USB input mode. If another audio backward several tracks.
● Do not locate objects near the USB de- source is playing and a USB memory device is
vice to prevent the objects from leaning Press the TRACK button while an audio
inserted, press the DISC•AUX button repeatedly file on the USB device is playing to advance one
on the USB device and the port. Pres- until the center display changes to the USB
sure from the objects may damage the track. Press the TRACK button several
memory mode. times to skip forward several tracks. If the last
USB device and the port.
If the system has been turned off while the USB track in a folder on the USB device is skipped, the
The USB input jack is located in the center con- memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL first track of the next folder is played.
sole. Insert the USB device into the jack 䊊
1 .
control knob to restart the USB memory. Folder selection:
When a compatible storage device is plugged SEEK/CAT and TRACK To change to another folder in the USB memory,
into the jack, compatible audio and video files on
(Reverse or Fast Forward) turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder
the storage device can be played through the displayed on the screen.
vehicle’s audio system and center display screen. buttons:
RPT/RDM button:
When there are both audio and movie files in the Press and hold the SEEK/CAT (rewind)
USB memory, the mode select screen is dis- When the RPT/RDM button is pressed while the
button or TRACK (fast forward) button for USB memory is playing, the play pattern can be
played. Use the touchscreen or the NISSAN con-
1.5 seconds while an audio file on the USB changed as follows:
troller to select the preferred type of file. When
device is playing to reverse or fast forward the
there is only type of file in the USB memory, that
track being played. The track plays at an in- Normal → 1 Folder Repeat → 1 Track Repeat →
audio or movie operation screen is displayed and
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding. All Random → 1 Folder Random → Normal
starts to play.
● Folder List/Track List
Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie
Playback” key is also displayed in this list
screen and enables you to switch to the
movie playback mode.
● Play Mode
Choose the preferred play mode using the
NISSAN controller or the touchscreen.
LHA1294 LHA1379
Menu: Movie file operation
There are some options available during play- Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
back. Select one of the following that are dis- front seat occupants to operate the USB
played on the screen, if necessary. Refer to the memory while watching the images.
following information for each item.
DISC-AUX button:
● Movie Playback
Switch to the movie playback mode. This When the DISC-AUX button is pushed with the
item is displayed only when the USB system off and the USB memory inserted, the
memory contains movie files. system will turn on. If another audio source is
The shift selector must be in Park (P) with playing and the USB memory is inserted, press
the parking brake engaged to watch movies the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the center
from a USB device. display changes to the USB memory mode.

Operation keys: ● Previous Chapter/Rewind:
To operate the USB memory, select the desired
key displayed on the display screen. Select the key to skip the chapter(s)
of the disc backward. The chapters will go
● Pause: back the number of times the key is selected.
Press and hold the key to rewind the chap-
Select the key to pause the movie file. ter.
To resume playing the movie file, use List:
the key.
Select the “List” key on the movie file operation
● Play: screen to display the file list.
Select the key to start playing the

movie file or resume the movie file if it has LHA1380
been paused. Settings:
● Stop: Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:
Select the key to stop playing the ● Audio File Playback
movie file. Switch to the audio playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
● Next Chapter/Fast Forward:
memory contains audio files.
Select the key to skip the chapter(s) ● Play Mode

of the disc forward. The chapters will ad- Choose between the “Normal” or “1 Track
vance the number of times the key is se- Repeat” play modes.
lected. Press and hold the key to fast for-
ward the chapter.

● 10 Key Search ● Do not force the iPod® cable into the
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the USB port. Inserting the iPod® cable
number entry screen. Input the number you tilted or up-side-down into the port may
want to search for and the specified file or damage the iPod® cable and the port.
folder will be played. Make sure that the iPod® cable is con-
● Display nected correctly into the USB port.
Adjust the image quality of the screen. (Some iPod® cables come with a
mark as a guide. Make sure that the
● DRC
mark is facing the correct direction be-
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
fore inserting the iPod® cable.)
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the ● Do not locate objects near the iPod®
speakers. cable to prevent the objects from lean-
ing on the iPod® cable and the port.
● Audio Pressure from the objects may damage
LHA2475
Choose the preferred language of the audio. the iPod® cable and the port.
● Subtitle iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
Choose the preferred language of the sub- WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
titles. so equipped) iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
● Display Mode Connecting iPod® located in the center console. Connect the
Choose between the “Normal”, “Wide”, iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®
“Cinema” or “Full” display modes. and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on
CAUTION
the vehicle 䊊1 . If your iPod® supports charging
● Depending on size and shape of the
via a USB connection, its battery will be charged
iPod® and iPod® cable, the console lid
while connected to the vehicle with the ignition
may not fully close. Do not force con-
sole lid closed as this may damage the switch in the ACC or ON position.
iPod® and iPod® cable. While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re-
move the USB end of the cable from the USB
jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from
the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod® 5th Generation - version 1.2.1
● iPod® Classic - version 1.1
● iPod® Touch - version 2.1.0
LHA1395 LHA1396
● iPod® Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1
Audio main operation Interface:
● iPod® Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON The interface for iPod® operation shown on the
● iPod® Nano - 3rd generation version 1.0.2 position. Press the AUX button repeatedly to vehicle center display is similar to the iPod®
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to switch to the iPod® mode. interface. Use the NISSAN controller and the
the version indicated above. If the system has been turned off while the iPod® BACK button to play the iPod® with your favorite
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control settings.
knob will start the iPod®. The following items can be chosen from the menu
AUX button: list screen. For further information about each
item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
When the AUX button is pressed with the system
off and the iPod® connected, the system will turn ● Playlists
on. If another audio source is playing and the
iPod® is connected, press the AUX button re- ● Podcasts
peatedly until the center display changes to the ● Songs
iPod® mode.
● Albums ● Do not force the iPod® cable into the
● Artists USB port. Inserting the iPod® cable
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
● Genres damage the iPod® cable and the port.
● Composers Make sure that the iPod® cable is con-
● Audiobooks (Some iPod® cables come with a
The following keys shown on the screen are also mark as a guide. Make sure that the
available: mark is facing the correct direction be-
fore inserting the iPod® cable.)
● MENU: returns to the previous screen.
● Do not locate objects near the iPod®
● : plays/pauses the music selected. cable to prevent the objects from lean-
SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons: ing on the iPod® cable and the port.
LHA2475 Pressure from the objects may damage
When the SEEK/CAT button or the iPod® cable and the port.
TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec-
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the
onds while the iPod® is playing, the next track or
the beginning of the current track on the iPod® equipped) iPod® can be controlled with the audio system
will be played. controls and display screen, use the USB jack
Connecting iPod® located in the center console. Connect the
When the SEEK/CAT button or iPod®-specific end of the cable to the iPod®
TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec- CAUTION and the USB end of the cable to the USB jack on
onds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will the vehicle 䊊1 . If your iPod® supports charging
play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the ● Depending on size and shape of the
via a USB connection, its battery will be charged
button is released, the iPod® will return to the iPod® and iPod® cable, the console lid
while connected to the vehicle with the ignition
normal play speed. may not fully close. Do not force con-
sole lid closed as this may damage the switch in the ACC or ON position.
iPod® and iPod® cable. While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, re- * Some features of this iPod® may not be fully
move the USB end of the cable from the USB functional.
jack on the vehicle, then remove the cable from Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to
the iPod®. the version indicated above.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
● iPod® 5th Generation (firmware version
1.2.3 or later)
● iPod® Classic (firmware version 1.1.1 or
later) LHA1397
● iPod® Touch (firmware version 2.0.0 or Audio main operation

later)* Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
● iPod® Nano - 1st generation (firmware ver- position. Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly
to switch to the iPod® mode.
sion 1.3.1 or later)
If the system has been turned off while the iPod®
● iPod® Nano - 2nd generation (firmware ver- was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control
sion 1.1.3 or later) knob will start the iPod®.
● iPod® Nano - 3rd generation (firmware ver- DISC·AUX button:
sion 1.1.3 or later) When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
● iPod® Nano - 4th generation (firmware ver- system off and the iPod® connected, the system
sion 1.0.4 or later) will turn on. If another audio source is playing and
the iPod® is connected, press the DISC·AUX
● iPod® Nano - 5th generation (firmware ver- button repeatedly until the center display
sion 1.0.1 or later) changes to the iPod® mode.
● Albums
● Songs
● Podcasts
● Genres
● Composers
● Audiobooks
● Shuffle Songs
The following keys shown on the screen are also
available:
● MENU: returns to the previous screen.
LHA1398 LHA1315
● : plays/pauses the music selected.
Interface: Play mode:
The interface for iPod® operation shown on the While the iPod® is playing, touch the “Menu” key
vehicle center display is similar to the iPod® to display the iPod® menu. Touch the “Play
interface. Use the NISSAN controller and the Mode” key to display the Play Mode screen and
BACK button to play the iPod® with your favorite adjust the settings for Shuffle, Repeat and Audio-
settings. The touchscreen can also be used to books. For further information about each item,
control your favorite settings. see the iPod® Owner’s Manual.
The following items can be chosen from the menu SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons:
list screen. For further information about each
item, see the iPod® Owner’s Manual. When the SEEK/CAT button or
TRACK button is pressed for less than 1.5 sec-
● Now Playing
onds while the iPod® is playing, the next track or
● Playlists the beginning of the current track on the iPod®
● Artists will be played.

When the SEEK/CAT button or To exit the scrolling by letter mode, perform one of
TRACK button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec- the following:
onds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod® will ● Press the ENTER button on the NISSAN
play while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the controller.
button is released, the iPod® will return to the
normal play speed. ● Push the ENTER switch on the steering
wheel.
The NISSAN controller can also be used to se-
lect tracks when the iPod® is playing. ● Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
(if so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio de-
vice that is capable of playing audio files, the
LHA1399 device can be connected to the vehicle’s audio
Scrolling menus: system so that the audio files on the device play
through the vehicle’s speakers.
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first letter. To activate letter index-
ing, perform one of the following:
● Turn the NISSAN controller quickly.
● Press and hold the up/down directional ar-
rows on the NISSAN controller.
● Touch and hold the page up/down arrows
on the touchscreen.

LHA1316 LHA1317 LHA1351
Connecting Bluetooth® audio 4. A screen will appear asking if you are con- 5. Enter a PIN of your choice. It will be needed
necting the device to use with the hands- by your Bluetooth® audio device to com-
To connect your Bluetooth® audio device to the free phone system. Select the “No” key. plete the connection process. See the
vehicle, follow the procedure below: Bluetooth® audio device’s owner’s manual
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru- for more information.
ment panel.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.

LHA1458 LHA1316 LHA1296
Audio main operation Bluetooth® audio settings 4. Select the “Audio Player” key.
To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode, press To adjust the Bluetooth® audio settings, follow
the DISC•AUX button repeatedly until the the procedure below:
Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
screen.
ment panel.
The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are dis-
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
played on the screen.
3. Select the “Connected Devices” key.

LHA1297 LHA1298 LHA0049
5. A list of the connected Bluetooth® audio 6. The Device Name and Device Address are CD CARE AND CLEANING
players is displayed. Select the name of the displayed on the screen. Select the “Select”
device you wish to edit. key to make this device the active ● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
Bluetooth® audio player. Select the “Edit” disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
key to edit the details of the player, such as
● Always place the discs in the storage case
Device Name. Select the “Delete” key to
when they are not being used.
delete the device.
● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
● Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner and SOURCE select switch
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the Push the source select switch to change the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated. mode in the following sequence:
Models without Navigation System:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite radio, if so equipped) → USB/iPod®* (if
so equipped) → CD/DVD* → AUX* → AM.
Models with Navigation System:
AM → FM1 → FM2 → XM1 → XM2 → XM3
(satellite radio, if so equipped) → CD/DVD* →
USB/iPod®* → Bluetooth® Audio* → AUX* → AM.
LHA2448 * These modes are only available when compat-

ible media storage is inserted into the device.
1. Menu control switch/ENTER button
2. BACK switch Volume control switch
3. Volume control switch Push the volume control switch to increase or
4. Power on and SOURCE select switch decrease the volume.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR Menu control
AUDIO CONTROL
switch/ENTER button
The audio system can be operated using the
controls on the steering wheel. While the display is showing a MAP, STATUS or
Audio screen, tilt the Menu Control switch up-
POWER on switch ward or downward to select a station, track, CD
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi- or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the
tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds pro-
vides a different function than a tilting up/down
system on.
for less than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM: ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to Bluetooth® Audio (if so equipped):
increase or decrease the folder number (if
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
playing compressed audio files).
increase or decrease the preset station. increase or decrease the track number.
● Press the ENTER button to show the CD
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to Menu.
AUX:
seek up or down to the next station. ● Press the ENTER button to show the AUX
DVD (if so equipped):
● Press the ENTER button to show the list of Menu.
preset stations. ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number. BACK switch
XM (if so equipped):
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to Press the switch to return to the previous
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the title number. screen or cancel the current selection.
increase or decrease the preset station.
● Press the ENTER button to select an item
● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to from the DVD display.
go to the next or previous category. ● When the transparent operation menu ap-
● Press the ENTER button to show the XM pears, the switch will control the menu.
Menu. USB (if so equipped):
iPod® (if so equipped): ● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.
increase or decrease the track number. ● Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
● Press the ENTER button to show the iPod increase or decrease the folder number.
Menu. ● Press the ENTER button to show the USB
Menu.
CD:
● Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.

DUAL HEAD RESTRAINT DVD
If your vehicle is equipped with the Dual Head

CAUTION
Restraint DVD System, you can enjoy playing
video files via a DVD, CD or USB memory that ● Do not attempt to use the system in
provides images and sound both from the front extremely high or low temperature con-
and rear display screens. dition [below ⫺4ºF (⫺20ºC) or above
158ºF (70ºC)].
You can also enjoy compatible auxiliary devices
such as video games, camcorders or portable ● To avoid draining the vehicle battery, do
video players through the auxiliary jacks. not operate the system for more than
15 minutes without starting the engine.
The front and right/left rear displays can show
different sources individually. The maximum of The front display is designed not to show
three audio sources, such as an iPod®, DVD and the images while driving, as the driver’s
auxiliary device, can be enjoyed at the same time. attention must be given to vehicle opera-
tion for safety. Sounds are available. To
WHA0790 WARNING show the images in the front display, stop
the vehicle in a safe location, move the
ANTENNA The driver must not attempt to operate the shift selector to the P (Park) position and
Dual Head Restraint DVD System while apply the parking brake.
The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be driving so full attention may be given to
removed. When you need to remove the antenna, vehicle operation.
turn the antenna rod counterclockwise 䊊
B.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod apply the parking brake to view the im-
clockwise 䊊 A and hand tighten.
ages on the front center display screen
using the DVD player.
CAUTION
Always properly tighten the antenna rod
during installation or the antenna rod may
break during vehicle operation.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Rear displays
CAUTION
● The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if hit with a hard or
sharp object. If the glass breaks, do not
touch the liquid crystalline material. In
case of contact with skin, wash imme-
diately with soap and water.
● Use soft, damp cloth when cleaning the
Dual Head Restraint DVD System com-
ponents. Do not use solvents or clean-
ing solutions. SAA3329 LHA2210
The rear displays are located on the back of the The angle of the rear display screen can be
front head restraints. adjusted for optimal viewing.
Use the remote controller to operate the rear Gently apply pressure to the base of the screen
display screen. where indicated until the screen reached the
desired position. When the screen is released, it
Push the preferred side (L or R) of the power
will remain in the current position. To return to the
ON/OFF button on the remote controller to acti-
screen to the flat position, press the base of the
vate the rear display.
screen in all the way until it clicks and retracts.
The rear screens can also be activated using the
NISSAN controller. For more information, see
“Rear display settings” in this section.
Do not block the range of the wireless remote
controller receiver and wireless headphones
transmitter 䊊
1 .

Before connecting a device to a jack, turn off the
power of the portable device.
To display the rear AUX screen, press the pre-
ferred side (L or R) of the AUX (L)/AUX (R)
buttons (rear input jacks) on the remote control-
ler.
The connected device from the rear auxiliary in-
put jacks cannot be displayed on the front
screen.
LHA2260 SAA3077
Rear auxiliary input jacks Headphones

The rear auxiliary input jacks are located on the The headphones for this system are a wireless
rear of the center console. NTSC/PAL compat- type and no cables are necessary. The head-
ible devices can be connected to the auxiliary phones can only be used in the rear seat.
jacks. The images from the connected device can Power ON/OFF:
be viewed on the rear displays.
Press the power ON/OFF button to turn the
The rear auxiliary jacks are color coded for iden- headphones on or off.
tification purposes.
● Yellow - video input
● White - left channel audio input
● Red - right channel audio input

It is also possible that the headphones may be
too far from the transmitter which is in the rear
display screen. This is not a malfunction.
The sound may also be interrupted temporarily
when there is an obstacle between the head-
phones and the transmitter. Remove the ob-
stacle, such as opaque materials, hands, hair,
etc.
SAA3078 LHA2211
Volume control Type A
Channel change:
Turn the volume control knob to adjust the vol-
ume. When the rear displays are playing different
sources, slide the channel select switch to select
The headphones will automatically turn off after the sound.
about four minutes if there is no sound during that
period. The headphones will also turn off after
approximately four hours of continuous use. To
prevent the battery from being discharged, keep
the power turned off when not in use.
If the sound from the headphones is not clear, it
may be due to interference from an infrared com-
munication device or a cellular phone. If this
happens, turn down the headphone volume or
stop using the headphones.
3. MENU button
4. Directional buttons
5. SETUP button
6. (next chapter) button
7. (fast forward) button
8. (stop) button
9. Volume control button
10. (reverse) button
11. (play and pause) button

LHA8801
12. (previous chapter) button
Type B
“Left” is the sound on the left display. “Right” is 13. BACK button
the sound on the right display. 14. SOURCE button
LHA2551
Remote control
The remote controller has the following controls:
1. POWER button
2. Display select switch (L or R)

LHA2552 SAA0978
Select rear displays audio source: Remote controller and headphones
Slide the display select switch on the remote battery replacement
control to the left (L) or right (R) to select each
screen source individually 䊊 1 . CAUTION
The SOURCE button on the remote control se- ● An improperly disposed battery can
lects the source for front and rear screens at harm the environment. Always confirm
once 䊊 2 . local regulations for battery disposal.
SAA3081
● When changing batteries, do not let
dust or oil get on the components. To replace the battery:
1. Open the lid as illustrated.
● For headphones, remove the screw 䊊 1
with a flat-bladed screwdriver before re-
moving the lid.

2. Replace both batteries with new ones. and (2) this device must accept any inter- ● Do not allow the system to get wet.
ference received, including interference
● Recommended battery: Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-
that may cause undesired operation of the uids may cause the system to
Size AA 6 2 (DVD remote controller)
device. malfunction.
Size AAA 6 2 (headphones)
● Be careful not to touch the battery termi- BEFORE OPERATING DUAL HEAD ● While playing VIDEO-CD media, this
nal. RESTRAINT DVD SYSTEM DVD player does not guarantee com-
plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD
● Make sure that the (+) and (-) ends on the Precautions formats.
batteries match the markings inside the
compartment. Start the engine when using the Dual Head Re- Parental level (parental control)
straint DVD System.
3. Close the lid securely. Video data with the parental control setting can
● If you will not be using the remote control WARNING be played with this system. Please use your own
for long periods of time, remove the bat- judgement to set the parental control with the
The driver must not attempt to operate the system.
teries. Dual Head Restraint DVD System or wear
● Replacement of the batteries is needed the headphones while the vehicle is in Disc selection
when the remote control only functions at motion so that full attention may be given
to vehicle operation. You can play the following disc formats with the
extremely close distances to the Dual
Head Restraint DVD System or when it DVD player:
does not function at all. CAUTION ● DVD-VIDEO
FCC Notice: ● Only operate the Dual Head Restraint ● VIDEO-CD
DVD System while the vehicle engine is
Changes or modifications not expressly ap- ● DTS-CD
running. Operating the Dual Head Re-
straint DVD System for extended peri- Use DVDs with the region code “ALL” or the code
ods of time with the engine OFF can applicable to your country. The region code is
erate the equipment. This device complies
discharge the vehicle battery.
with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 displayed as a small symbol printed on the top of
of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the DVD. This vehicle-installed DVD player can
the following two conditions: (1) This de- only play DVDs with an applicable region code.
vice may not cause harmful interference,
Available audio sources
The following sources are available to play on
each display:
Front display:
● Radio
● CD/DVD
● USB memory/iPod®
● Bluetooth® audio
● AUX (front)
Rear display:
SAA3069 SAA3082
● DVD Front display Rear display
● USB memory with video files PLAYING A DIGITAL VERSATILE
● AUX (front/rear) DISC (DVD)
DISC·AUX button
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
front seat occupants to operate the DVD
player while watching the images.
Insert a DVD into the CD/DVD slot with the
labeled side up. The DVD will be guided auto-
matically into the slot. When ejecting the DVD,
press the EJECT button.

Press the AUX·DVD button on the instrument PAUSE: SKIP (FORWARD):
panel and turn the display to the DVD mode, and
begin playing the DVD automatically. Select this key and press the ENTER button to Select this key and press the ENTER button to
When a DVD is loaded, it will begin playing pause the DVD. To resume playing the DVD, use skip the chapter(s) of the disc forward. The chap-
automatically. the “PLAY” key. ters will advance the number of times the ENTER
button is pressed.
The front screen will be turned on when the To pause the DVD, it is also possible to push the
pause button on the keypad of the remote con- To skip the chapter(s) forward, it is also possible
AUX·DVD button is pressed while a DVD is being
troller. to press the corresponding button on the keypad
played, and it will turn off automatically after a of the remote controller.
period of time. To turn it on again, press the PLAY:
AUX·DVD button again. SKIP (REWIND):
Adjust front/rear displays Select this key and press the ENTER button to Select this key and press the ENTER button to
start playing the DVD, for example, after pausing skip the chapter(s) of the disc backward. The
Front display: the DVD. chapters will go back the number of times the
To adjust the front display mode, press the DISP ENTER button is pressed.
To start playing the DVD, it is also possible to
button on the center multi-function control panel. press the play button on the keypad of the remote To skip the chapter(s) backward, it is also pos-
Follow the instructions displayed on the screen. controller. sible to press the corresponding button on the
keypad of the remote controller.
Rear display: STOP:
Commercial Skip:
To adjust the rear display mode, press the pre-
ferred side (L or R) of the DISP button on the Select this key and press the ENTER button to This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-
remote controller. stop playing the DVD. VR.
DVD operation keys To stop playing the DVD, it is also possible to Select this key to skip forward or backwards by
press the stop button on the keypad of the re- the set amount as defined in the DVD settings
To operate the DVD player, select the preferred mote controller. menu.
key displayed on the operation screen using the To skip forward or backward, it is also possible to
NISSAN controller. press the corresponding button on the keypad of
the remote controller.

Arrow icons: Move the cursor to select a DVD
menu.
Enter: Enter the selected menu.
Move: Change the display location by moving the
operation key.
Back: Return to the previous screen.
Hide: Hide the operation key.
Title Menu (front)/Menu (rear) (DVD-
VIDEO):
Menus specific to each disc will be shown. For
SAA2498 SAA3082
details, see the instructions attached to the disc.
Front screen Rear screen Title Search (DVD-VIDEO):
Setting keys A scene that belongs to a specified title will be
displayed each time the “+” side or “⫺” side is
Select the “Settings” key with the NISSAN con-
selected.
troller and press the ENTER button to adjust the
following settings. 10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD,
CDDA):
The items indicated with “*” can also be set from
the rear display. Press the DVD button on the Select the “10 Key Search” key and press the
remote controller while a DVD is being played. ENTER button to open the number entry screen.
Select the preferred item using the joystick on the
Input the number you want to search for and
remote controller and press the ENTER button.
select the “OK” key with the NISSAN controller.
Key (DVD-VIDEO): Then press the ENTER button. The specified
Title/Chapter or Group/Track will be played.
Keys for the DVD menu operation are displayed.

Angle (DVD-VIDEO): DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD): Play Mode:
If the DVD contains different angles (such as Select the “DVD Language” key and press the Choose the preferred play mode using the
moving images), the current image angle can be ENTER button to open the number entry screen. NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button.
switched to another one.
Input the number corresponding to the preferred Remote controller operation
Select the “Angle” key and press the ENTER language and select the “OK” key with the
button. When the “+” side or “⫺” side is selected, NISSAN controller. Then press the ENTER but- Use the remote controller to adjust the following
the angle will change. ton. The DVD top menu language will be changed items.
to the one selected. Rear display ON/OFF:
Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO):
Display: The rear displays can be activated or deactivated
When this item is turned on, an angle mark will be
shown on the bottom of the screen if the scene Adjust the image quality of the screen, select the individually.
can be seen from a different angle. preferred adjustment items and press the ENTER To activate or deactivate the rear displays, press
button. the preferred side (L or R) of the ON·OFF button
Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO):
Audio: on the remote controller.
DVD menus are automatically configured and the
contents will be played directly when the “Menu Choose the preferred language using the Joystick:
Skip” key is turned on. Note that some discs may NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button. Use the joystick to select the items displayed on
not be played directly even if this item is turned the rear screen.
Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO):
on.
Choose the preferred language using the ENTER button:
CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO):
NISSAN controller and press the ENTER button. Press the ENTER button to make the selected
The amount of seconds for CM Skip can be set to item complete on the rear screen.
To turn off the subtitles, press and hold the EN-
15, 30 or 60 seconds.
TER button until a beep sounds. BACK button:
DRC (DVD-VIDEO):
Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO-CD): Press to go back to the previous screen or cancel
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) allows tun- the selection.
Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or “Cin-
ing of the dynamic range of sound recorded in the
ema” mode using the NISSAN controller and DVD mode:
Dolby Digital format.
press the ENTER button. Press the DVD button to select the DVD mode.
AUX mode: Rear display settings Color System:
The AUX (auxiliary input jacks) modes can be To adjust the rear display settings, select the To choose the color system, select from “NTSC”,
activated or deactivated individually. To activate preferred key and press the ENTER button. The “PAL”, “PAL-60”, “PAL-M”, “PAL-N” or “AUTO”
the AUX mode, press the preferred side (L or R) following settings are available: using the joystick on the remote controller and tilt
of the AUX button. Press the AUX button again to the joystick to the right or left.
Aspect:
deactivate the AUX mode and display another
3D Y/C filter:
mode. Select the display size from “CINEMA”, “WIDE”,
“FULL” or “NORMAL” using the joystick on the Set to ON/OFF using the joystick on the remote
Volume: remote controller. controller. When turned on, small characters and
To control the volume level, push the VOL Picture Mode: an outline of the shapes will be displayed more
button or . clearly than when turned off.
To adjust the display brightness automatically,
Display: select the “Brightness” key and then select from AUX Volume Setting:
“Darker”, “Normal” or “Brighter”. When adjusting To set the AUX volume, select from “High”, “Low”
Display settings can be set individually for the manually, select “OFF” and adjust using the joy-
right and left screens. or “Middle” using the joystick on the remote con-
stick on the remote controller and tilt the joystick
troller and tilt the joystick to the right or left.
Press the preferred side (L or R) of the DISP to the right or left.
button to adjust the rear display settings. To adjust tint, color, contrast or black level, select OPERATING TIPS
Sound: a key using the joystick on the remote controller ● The images from a device that is connected
and tilt the joystick to the right or left. to the rear auxiliary input jacks cannot be
To change the language, press the SOUND but- viewed on the front displays.
Press the BACK button on the remote controller
ton. Each time the button is pressed, the lan-
to apply the settings and return to the previous
guage will change to each language stored in the ● It is not possible to switch the source to USB
display.
DVD. (if so equipped) or DVD using the remote
To return the adjustment levels to the default controller when the rear display is in the AUX
Track/Channel: value, select “Execute” next to “Initialization” us- mode. Push the AUX (L)/ (R) button in the
Press to skip to the previous or next DVD scene ing the joystick on the remote controller and remote controller and turn off the AUX mode,
selection. press the ENTER button. The “Execute” key is and then push the preferred mode switch.
deactivated when the picture mode settings are
already in the default value.
● It is not possible to display different video 5. Turn on a pair of headphones and listen to ● Avoid touching or scratching the moni-
files, such as DVD or video files in the USB the DVD on the rear displays using the head- tor screen as it may become dirty or
memory, on the front and rear displays at the phones. damaged.
same time.
6. Connect an auxiliary device into the AUX ● Do not attempt to operate the system in
● It is not possible to play an audio file and a jacks and push the AUX (L) or AUX (R) extreme temperature conditions [below
video file in the same USB memory at the button on the remote controller. The se- ⫺4°F (⫺20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)]
same time. lected side of the rear display turns to the
● Do not attempt to operate the system in
AUX mode. The other rear display continues extreme humidity conditions (less than
Multiple source display to display the DVD. 10% or more than 75%).
It is possible to play different sources on each 7. Turn on the other pair of headphones. If the
display. The following example shows how to sound from the headphones is not from the
operate multiple sources. AUX jacks, switch the channel with the
1. Display a video file in the front display by channel select switch on the headphones.
selecting the DVD mode.
CARE AND MAINTENANCE
2. Press the L side on the power ON·OFF
Use a lightly dampened, lint free cloth to clean the
button on the remote controller. The left rear
surfaces of your Dual Head Restraint DVD Sys-
display comes on and the DVD screen will
tem (DVD player face, screen, remote controller,
be displayed.
etc.).
3. Press the R side on the power ON·OFF
button on the remote controller. The right CAUTION
rear display comes on and the DVD screen ● Do not use any solvents or cleaning
will be displayed. solutions when cleaning the video
4. Switch the source on the front display to an system.
audio source. The sound from the speakers ● Do not use excessive force on the moni-
switches according to the front display. The tor screen.
rear display continues to display the DVD.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
CAUTION WARNING
your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may ● Keep the antenna as far away as pos- ● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
adversely affect the engine control system and sible from the electronic control in a safe location. If you have to use a
other electronic parts. modules. phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
WARNING be given to vehicle operation.
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
● A cellular phone should not be used for trol system harnesses. Do not route the ● If you are unable to devote full attention
any purpose while driving so full atten- antenna wire next to any harness. to vehicle operation while talking on
tion may be given to vehicle operation. the phone, pull off the road to a safe
● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of location and stop your vehicle.
as recommended by the manufacturer.
cellular phones while driving.
● Connect the ground wire from the CB CAUTION
● If you must make a call while your ve- radio chassis to the body.
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
lar phone operational mode is highly ● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer. use a phone after starting the engine.
recommended. Exercise extreme cau-
tion at all times so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with
the previously connected cellular phone turned on
and carried in the vehicle.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth®
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting instruc-
tions.
● You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
LHA2476
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
vice area.
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com- your cellular phone in the vehicle.
patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you – Your vehicle is in an area where it is
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in- difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
can set up the wireless connection between your
vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
procedure is required. Your phone is automatically garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
connected with the in-vehicle phone module when tainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it ● Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
from being dialed. regarding the telephone charges, cellular BLUETOOTH® is a
phone antenna and body, etc. trademark owned by
● When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur- and licensed to
ing a call. FCC Regulatory information Visteon.
● Do not place the cellular phone in an area – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the USING THE SYSTEM
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
quality degradation and wireless connection modification, or attachments could damage hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Phone
disruption. the transmitter and may violate FCC regula- System.
tions.
● While a cellular phone is connected through If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the – Operation is subject to the following two con- not be available so full attention may be given to
ditions: vehicle operation.
battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® 1. This device may not cause interference and Initialization
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
2. this device must accept any interference, When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
cellular phones. including interference that may cause unde- position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
● If the hands-free phone system seems to be sired operation of the device. which takes a few seconds. If the button is
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide” IC Regulatory information pressed before the initialization completes, the
in this section. You can also visit system will announce “Hands-free phone system
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble- – Operation is subject to the following two con- not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
shooting help. ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
● Some cellular phones or other devices may interference, including interference that may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to cause undesired operation of the device.
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
ing the device in a different location may
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
reduce or eliminate the noise. Causing Equipment Regulations.
Operating tips ● If a command is not recognized, the system ● To use the system faster, you may speak the
announces, “Command not recognized. second level commands with the main menu
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Please try again.” Make sure the command is command on the main menu. For example,
Voice Recognition system, observe the following: said exactly as prompted by the system and press the button and after the tone
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as repeat the command in a clear voice. say, “Call Redial.”
possible. Close the windows to eliminate ● If you want to go back to the previous com-
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration How to say numbers
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
tion” any time the system is waiting for a
from recognizing voice commands correctly. way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
response.
● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a to the following rules and examples.
command. Otherwise, the command will not ● You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying, ● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
be received properly.
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces Example: 1-800-662-6200
● Start speaking a command within 5 seconds “Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
after the tone sounds. – “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
also press and hold the button on the
oh”, or
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
between words. end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses- – “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to oh”
Giving voice commands indicate you have exited the system.
● Words can be used for the first 4 digits
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
● If you want to adjust the volume of the voice places only.
and release the button located on the feedback, press the volume control switches
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a Example: 1-800-662-6200
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
command.
provided with feedback. You can also use – “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
The command given is picked up by the micro- the radio volume control knob. oh”,
phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted. ● In most cases you can interrupt the voice – NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
feedback to speak the next command by two hundred,” and
● If you need to hear the available commands pressing the button on the steering
for the current menu again, say “Help” and – NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
wheel. hundred”
the system will repeat them.
● Numbers can be spoken in small groups. NOTE:
The system will prompt you to continue en-
For best results, say phone numbers as
tering digits, if desired. single digits.
Example: 1-800-662-6200 The voice command “Help” is available at any
– “One eight zero zero” time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six two zero zero”
LHA2478
● Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail- CONTROL BUTTONS
able when using the “Special Number” com-
mand and the “Send” command during a The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-
call). Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
See “List of voice commands” and “Special
number” in this section for more information. PHONE/SEND
Example: 1-555-1212 *123 Press the button to initiate a
VR session or answer an incoming
– “One five five five one two one two star call.
one two three”
● Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Number” command).
● Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
You can also use the button Choosing a language NOTE:
to interrupt the system feedback You can interact with the Bluetooth® Hands- You must press the button within
and give a command at once. See Free Phone System using English, Spanish or 5 seconds to change the language.
“List of voice commands” and French.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
“During a call” in this section for
To change the language, perform the following. not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
more information.
VR session will end, and the language will
1. Press and hold the button for more not be changed.
PHONE/END than 5 seconds.
While the voice recognition system Connecting procedure
2. The system announces: “Press the
is active, press and hold the PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the NOTE:
button for 5 seconds to quit the hands-free phone system to enter the voice
voice recognition system at any adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END The connecting procedure must be per-
time. ( ) button to select a different lan- formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
guage.”
the procedure will be cancelled.
TUNING SWITCH
3. Press the button.
While using the voice recognition Main Menu
system, tilt the tuning switch up or For information on voice adaptation, see “Connect phone” 䊊
A
“Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this sec-
down to manually control the “Add phone” 䊊
B
tion.
phone system. Initiate from handset 䊊
C
GETTING STARTED 4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the lan- Name phone 䊊
D
The following procedures will help you get guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in 1. Press the button on the steering
started using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone French). To select the current language, wheel. The system announces the available
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad- press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. To commands.
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice select a different language, tilt the tuning
commands” in this section. 2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊 A . The system ac-
switch ( or ) up or down. knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊B . The system acknowl- Making a call by entering a phone “Special Number”. See “How to say num-
edges the command and asks you to initiate number bers” in this section for more information.
connecting from the phone handset 䊊C.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
Main Menu number, the system repeats it back and an-
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular “Call” 䊊
A nounces the available commands.
phone model. See the cellular phone Own- “Phone Number” 䊊
B 6. Say: “Dial” 䊊
D . The system acknowledges
er’s Manual for details. You can also visit Speak the digits 䊊
C the command and makes the call.
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended “Dial” 䊊
D For additional command options, see “List of
cellular phones. voice commands” in this section.
1. Press the button on the steering
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter wheel. A tone will sound. Receiving a call
2. Say: “Call” 䊊
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code A . The system acknowledges When you hear the ring tone, press the
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and button on the steering wheel.
the command and announces the next set of
cannot be changed.
available commands.
Once the call has ended, press the button
3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊
4. The system asks you to say a name for the B . The system ac- on the steering wheel.
phone 䊊D.
knowledges the command and announces
If the name is too long or too short, the the next set of available commands. NOTE:
system tells you, then prompts you for a 4. Say the number you wish to call starting with If you do not wish to take the call when you
name again. the area code in single digit format 䊊
C . If the hear the ring tone, press the button
Also, if more than one phone is connected system has trouble recognizing the correct on the steering wheel.
and the name sounds too much like a name phone number, try entering the number in For additional command options, see “List of
already used, the system tells you, then the following groups: 3-digit area code, voice commands” later in this section.
prompts you for a name again. 3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS “Call” (Speak Digits) 䊊
B
Main Menu Main Menu When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”
“Call” “Call” and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
“Phonebook” (Speak name) 䊊
A in this section for more details.
“Recent Calls” “Phone Number” “Special Number” 䊊
C
“Connect Phone” (Speak Digits) 䊊
B
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
“Special Number” 䊊
C characters, say “Special Number”. When the
When you press and release the button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the “Redial” 䊊
D system acknowledges the command, the system
commands on the Main Menu. The following “Call Back” 䊊
E will prompt you to speak the number.
pages describe these commands and the com- “Redial” 䊊
D
mands in each sub-menu. (Speak name) 䊊
A
Use the Redial command to call the last number
Remember to wait for the tone before If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
that was dialed.
speaking. can dial a number associated with a name and
location. The system acknowledges the command, re-
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear peats the number and begins dialing.
the list of commands currently available any time See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to
the system is waiting for a response. store entries. If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
If you want to end an action without completing it, When prompted by the system, say the name of
ends the VR session.
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
system is waiting for a response. The system will acknowledges the name. “Call Back” 䊊
E
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is If there are multiple locations associated with the Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate name, the system asks you to choose the loca- the last incoming call within the vehicle.
you have exited the system. tion.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
If you want to go back to the previous command, Once you have confirmed the name and location, peats the number and begins dialing.
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time the system begins the call.
the system is waiting for a response.
If a call back number does not exist, the system The system announces, “Transfer call. Call Main Menu
announces, “There is no number to call back” and transferred to privacy mode.” The system
ends the VR session. then ends the VR session. “Phonebook”
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
A
During a call To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free System, “Delete Entry” 䊊
B
During a call there are several command options
press the button. “List Names” 䊊
C
available. Press the button on the steering
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com- ● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute For phones that do not support automatic down-
mands. your voice so the other party cannot hear it. load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® pro-
Use the mute command again to unmute
● “Help” — The system announces the avail- your voice.
file), the “Phonebook” command is used to manu-
able commands. ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces NOTE: The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns If a call is ended or the cellular phone phone connected to the system.
to the call. network connection is lost while the Mute
NOTE:
● “Send” — Use the Send command to enter feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
numbers, “*” or “#” during a call. For ex- to “off” for the next call so the other party Each phone has its own separate phone-
ample, if you were directed to dial an exten- can hear your voice. book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
sion by an automated system: book if you are currently connected with
“Phonebook” (phones without
Say: “Send one two three four.” Phone B.
automatic phonebook download
The system acknowledges the command function) “Transfer Entry” 䊊
A
and sends the tones associated with the Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses- NOTE:
name in the system.
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”, The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
Say “pound” for “#”. When prompted by the system, say the name you
able when the vehicle is moving.
would like to give the new entry.
● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
mand to transfer the call from the For example, say: “Mary.”
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to If the name is too long or too short, the system
the cellular phone when privacy is desired. tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name The system confirms the name, location and Main Menu
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts number.
“Phonebook”
you for a name again. “Delete Entry” 䊊
B
Say a Name
The system will ask you to transfer a phone Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory. “List Names” 䊊
A
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete “Record Name” 䊊
B
Enter a phone number by voice command:
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.” For phones that support automatic download of
See “How to say numbers” in this section for “List Names” 䊊
C the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth® profile), the
more information. “Phonebook” command is used to manage en-
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook. tries in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular name of an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of
phone’s memory: The system recites the phonebook entries but that entry.
does not include the actual phone numbers.
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges When the playback of the list is complete, the The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer system goes back to the main menu. each phone connected to the system.
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular You can stop the playback of the list at any time When a phone is connected to the system, the
phone via the Bluetooth® communication link. by pressing the button on the steering phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
wheel. The system ends the VR session. vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
The transfer procedure varies according to each phonebook from the Bluetooth® system and call
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s “Phonebook” (phones with automatic contacts by name. You can record a custom
Manual for details. You can also visit phonebook download function) voice tag for contact names that the system has
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions difficulty recognizing. For more information see
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN NOTE: “Record name” in this section.
recommended cellular phones.
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
The system repeats the number and prompts you able when the vehicle is moving.
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
NOTE: “Recent Calls” “Connect Phone”
Each phone has its own separate phone- Main Menu
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone- NOTE:
book if you are currently connected with “Recent Calls”
The Add Phone command is not available
Phone B. “Outgoing” 䊊
A when the vehicle is moving.
“List Names” 䊊
A “Incoming” 䊊
B
Main Menu
“Missed” 䊊
C
Use the List Names command to hear all the “Connect Phone”
names and locations in the phone book. Use the Recent Calls command to access out- “Add Phone” 䊊
A
going, incoming or missed calls.
The system recites the phone book entries but “Select Phone” 䊊
B
does not include the actual phone numbers. “Outgoing” 䊊
A
“Delete Phone” 䊊
C
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu. Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing “Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊
D
calls made from the vehicle.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
“Incoming” 䊊
B the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the Use the Incoming command to list the incoming the Bluetooth® function on the vehicle.
“Record name” command in this section for infor- calls made to the vehicle. “Add Phone” 䊊
A
“Missed” 䊊
mation about recording custom voice tags for list C
entries that the system has difficulty pronounc- Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
ing. Use the Missed command to list the calls made to the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this
the vehicle that were not answered. section for more information.
“Record Name” 䊊
B
“Select Phone” 䊊
B
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the Use the Select Phone command to select from a
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial tem will list the names assigned to each phone
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
tags can be recorded to the system. select. Only one phone can be active at a time.

“Delete Phone” 䊊
C 3. Press and hold the button for more 10. The system will announce that voice adap-
than 5 seconds. tation has been completed and the system is
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
ready.
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys- 4. The system announces: “Press the
tem will list the names assigned to each phone PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the The VA mode will stop if:
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to hands-free phone system to enter the voice
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also ● The button is pressed for more than
adaptation mode or press the PHONE/END 5 seconds in VA mode.
delete that phonebook for that phone.
( ) button to select a different lan-
“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊
D guage.” ● The vehicle begins moving during VA mode.
Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent ● The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
5. Press the button.
a wireless connection to your phone. LOCK position.
For information on selecting a different lan-
VOICE ADAPTATION (VA) MODE guage, see “Choosing a language” in this Training phrases
section. During the VA mode, the system instructs the
Voice Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect
users to train the system to improve recognition 6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
accuracy. By repeating a number of commands, automatically. If both memory locations are will prompt you for each phrase.)
the users can create a voice model of their own already in use, the system will prompt you to ● phonebook transfer entry
voice that is stored in the system. The system is overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
capable of storing a different voice adaptation vided by the system. ● dial three oh four two nine
model for each connected phone. 7. When preparation is complete and you are ● delete call back number
Training procedure ready to begin, press the button. ● incoming
The procedure for training a voice is as follows. 8. The VA mode will be explained. Follow the ● transfer entry
instructions provided by the system.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet ● eight pause nine three two pause seven
outdoor location. 9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have ● delete all entries
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run- been recorded. ● call seven two four zero nine
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-
sion in P (Park). ● phonebook delete entry
● next entry ● call eight oh five four one pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button will
● dial star two one seven oh ● correction start the Hands Free Phone System.
● yes ● connect phone Operating tips

● no ● dial seven four oh one eight ● To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning
● select ● previous entry ( ) switch up or down. The system will
● missed ● delete speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙ when
manual controls are initially activated.
● dial eight five six nine two ● dial nine seven two six six
● To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
● Bluetooth on ● call seven six three oh one ( ) switch up or down. The system will
● outgoing ● go back always speak the current menu option. De-
pending on the audio display, it will also
● call three one nine oh two ● call five six two eight zero show the current menu option.
● nine seven pause pause three oh eight ● dial six six four three seven ● To select the current menu option, press the
● cancel PHONE/SEND ( ) button.
MANUAL CONTROL
● To go back to the previous menu, press the
● call back number While using the voice recognition system, it is
PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current
● call star two zero nine five possible to select menu options by using the menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
● delete phone PHONE/END ( ) button will exit the
commands. This can be especially helpful if the
Phone system.
● dial eight three zero five one noise of driving makes it difficult for the voice
recognition system to accurately interpret com- ● To exit the manual control mode, press and
● record name mands. The manual control mode does not allow hold the PHONE/END ( ) button for
dialing a phone number by digits. The user may 5 seconds.
● four three pause two nine pause zero select an entry from the Phonebook or Recent
● delete redial number Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition, exit
the manual control mode by pressing and holding
● phonebook list names the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that time,
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Voice Adaptation (VA) mode” in this section.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.
phone book.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
WARNING
● Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
● If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
LHA2477
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com- your cellular phone in the vehicle.
patible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
can set up the wireless connection between your
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is placed – Your vehicle is in an area where it is ● If the hands-free phone system seems to be
in the ON position with the connected cellular difficult to receive cellular signal; such as malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle. in a tunnel, in an underground parking in this section. You can also visit
garage, near a tall building or in a moun- www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth® shooting help.
tainous area.
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone – Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it ● Some cellular phones or other devices may
at a time. from being dialed. cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the ● When the radio wave condition is not ideal ing the device in a different location may
phone commands, so dialing a phone number or ambient sound is too loud, it may be reduce or eliminate the noise.
using your voice is possible. For more details, see difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
● Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this sec- ing a call.
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
tion.
● Immediately after the ignition switch is phone antenna and body, etc.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone placed in the ON position, it may be impos- ● The signal strength display on the monitor
System, refer to the following notes. sible to receive a call for a short period of will not coincide with the signal strength
time. display of some cellular phones.
● Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone ● Do not place the cellular phone in an area ● If reception between callers is unclear, ad-
module before using the hands-free phone surrounded by metal or far away from the justing the incoming or outgoing call volume
system. in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone may improve the clarity. See “Call volume” in
● Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones quality degradation and wireless connection this section.
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle disruption.
phone module. Please visit ● While a cellular phone is connected through
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom- the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the
mended phone list and connecting. battery power of the cellular phone may dis-
● You will not be able to use a hands-free charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth®
phone under the following conditions: Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
REGULATORY INFORMATION BLUETOOTH® is a
FCC Regulatory information trademark owned by
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the and licensed to
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, Clarion.
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula- VOICE COMMANDS
tions.
You can use voice commands to operate various
– Operation is subject to the following two con- Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System features
ditions: using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
1. This device may not cause interference and
System” in this section.
2. this device must accept any interference, LHA1236
including interference that may cause unde- CONNECTING PROCEDURE
sired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information ment panel and select the “Bluetooth” key
on the display.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.

LHA1316 LHA1317 LHA1318
2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key. 3. A popup box will appear on the screen, 4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
prompting you to confirm that the connec- operate the Bluetooth® cellular phone to
tion is for the phone system. Select the “Yes” enter the PIN code.
key.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for
instructions on connecting recommended
cellular phones.
When the connecting is complete, the
screen will return to the Bluetooth® settings
screen.

LHA1320 LHA1321 LHA1381
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK 2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key. 6. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name
3. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the to speak when using the Voice Recognition
This vehicle has two phonebooks available for system.
your use. Depending on your phone, the system screen.
may automatically download your entire cell 4. Choose the method for entering the phone- 7. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak
phone’s phonebook into the “Handset Phone- book entry. For this example, select “Enter the name after the tone.
book”. For the details on downloading your Number by Keypad”. 8. When the voicetag is successfully saved,
phonebook, see “Handset phonebook” in this select the “OK” key to save the phonebook
5. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key. For
section. If your phonebook does not automati- more information, see “How to use the entry.
cally download, you may set up the vehicle touchscreen” in this section.
phonebook for up to 40 entries. This phonebook 9. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will
allows you to record a name to speak while using show a screen that is ready to call the num-
voice recognition. ber. Press the BACK button to return to the
Vehicle Phonebook.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
● Copy from Call History
The system will show a list of your incoming,
outgoing or missed calls that were down-
loaded from your cell phone (depending on
your phone’s compatibility). You may select
one of these entries to save in the vehicle
phonebook.
● Copy from the Handset
The system will show your cell phone’s
phonebook that was downloaded (depend-
ing on your phone’s compatibility). You may
select one of these entries to save in the
vehicle phonebook.
LHA1382 LHA1383
● Editing the Vehicle Phonebook 5. Select the desired item to change.
1. Press the button on the steering The following editing items are available:
wheel.
● Entry #
2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key. Changes the displayed number of the se-
3. Select the desired entry from the displayed lected entry.
list. ● Name
4. Select the “Edit” key. Edit the name of the entry using the keypad
● Number
Edit the phone number using the keypad
● Type
Select the icon from the icon list.
● Voicetag 2. Select the “Phone” key.
Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags
3. Select the “Download Handset Phonebook”
allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice
key.
Recognition system. For more information,
see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in Once the handset phonebook is transferred to
this section. the vehicle, it can be accessed by pressing the
To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at PHONE key on the instrument panel or the
step 3. button on the steering wheel, then selecting the
“Handset Phonebook” key.
HANDSET PHONEBOOK Whether the handset phonebook is transferred
Many phones will support an automatic down- manually or automatically, the process can take
load of the cellular phone’s phonebook. Since up to five minutes to complete, depending on the
this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be size of the handset phonebook. See the cellular
stored and entries are automatically assigned LHA1319
phone’s owner’s manual for more details.
voice tags by the system, this is a useful function
for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni- Transferring the handset phonebook
tion system.
If your cellular phone supports automatic down-
loading, the system transfers the handset phone-
book automatically by default. To ensure that this
feature is activated, press the SETTING button
on the instrument panel and select the “Phone”
key. The “Auto Downloaded” selection should
have the amber indicator next to the word ON
activated. Select the “Auto Downloaded” key to
toggle this feature on or off.
To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle
manually, follow these steps:
ment panel.
● Call History: Select the name from the in-
coming or outgoing call history.
● Dial Number: Input the phone number manu-
ally using a keypad displayed on the screen.
For information on how to use the touch-
screen, see “How to use the touchscreen” in
this section.
3. For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except
“Dial Number”, dialing commences when the
listed name is selected. Dialing commences
when “OK” is selected if the number is input-
ted manually. The screen changes to the
“Call in Progress” screen.
LHA1322 LHA1323
4. After the call is over, perform one of the
MAKING A CALL following to finish the call: RECEIVING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below: a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call in When you hear a phone ring, the display will
Progress screen. change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow
1. Press the button on the steering one of the procedures listed below.
wheel. The “Phone” screen will appear on b. Press the switch on the steering
the display. wheel. a. Select the “Answer” key on the display.
2. Select one of the following options to make a c. When the “Call in Progress” screen is b. Press the phone button on the steering
call: displayed, press the button on the wheel switches.
instrument panel to hang up. If any other
● Vehicle Phonebook: Select the name from screen is currently displayed, press There are some options available when receiving
an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook. the button to display the “Call in a call. Select one of the following displayed on
Progress” screen first, then press the screen.
● Handset Phonebook: Select the name from
an entry stored in the handset phonebook. the button again to hang up. Answer:
Accept an incoming call to talk.
Hold Call: Keypad:
Put an incoming call on hold. Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.
For example, entering your PIN number for voice-
Reject Call:
mail.
Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures NOTE:
listed below:
Press the button during a call to send
a. Select the “Reject Call” key on the display. numbers and digits using Voice Recogni-
tion.
b. Press and hold the phone button on the
steering wheel switches. Cancel Mute:
This will appear after the “Mute” key is selected.
Mute will be cancelled.
Switch Call:
LHA2074
Select “Switch Call” to answer another incoming
DURING A CALL call. By selecting “Hang Up,” you can end a call
and can speak to a caller who is on hold again.
There are some options available during a call.
Select one of the following displayed on the ● This function may not be useable, depend-
screen, if necessary: ing on the model of phone.
Hang up: To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or

Finish the call. quieter, press the volume control switch located
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume
Use Handset: control knob on the instrument panel while talking
Transfer the call to the cellular phone. on the phone. This adjustment is also available in
the SETTING mode.
Mute:
Mute your voice to the person.

Download Handset Phonebook:
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for
adding, editing and deleting contacts in the
handset phonebook.
LHA1324 LHA1319
ENDING A CALL PHONE SETTINGS
To finish the call, perform one of the following To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
procedures: System to your preferred settings, press the SET-
● Select the “Hang up” key on the “Call in TING button on the instrument panel and select
Progress” display. the “Phone” key on the display.
● Press the button on the steering Edit Vehicle Phonebook:

wheel. See “Vehicle Phonebook” in this section for add-
ing, editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle
phonebook.
Delete Phonebook:
Delete a phonebook stored on the system.

Edit Bluetooth Info:
Check information about the device name, device
address and device PIN.
Replace Connected Phone:
Replace the phone currently connected to the
system. This option allows you to keep any voic-
etags that were recorded using the previous
phone.
LHA1325 LHA1316
Volume & Ringtone: BLUETOOTH SETTINGS
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone, incoming
call sound and outgoing call sound. When the To set up the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
“Automatic Hold” option is turned on, an incom- System to your preferred settings, press the SET-
ing call will be placed on hold automatically after TING button on the instrument panel and select
several rings. When the “Vehicle Ringtone” op- the “Bluetooth” key on the display.
tion is turned on, a specific ringtone that is differ-
ent from the cellular phone’s will sound when Bluetooth:
receiving a call. Turn the Bluetooth® system on or off.
Auto Downloaded: Connect Bluetooth:

See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for See “Connecting procedure” in this section for
information about automatically downloading the more information about connecting a phone.
handset phonebook. Connected Devices:
Display a list of the Bluetooth® devices con-
nected to the system.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
To access the settings, press the SETTING but- NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free
ton, then select “Volume & Beeps”. operation of the systems equipped on this ve-
You can also adjust the volume of an incoming hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.
voice during a call by pushing the volume control There are two voice recognition modes of opera-
switch on the steering wheel or by turning the tion available. They are:
volume control knob on the instrument panel.
● Standard Mode
● Alternate Command Mode
In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),
commands that are available are always shown
on the display and announced by the system. You
can complete your desired operation by simply
following the prompts given by the system. Not all
LHA1253 NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available
CALL VOLUME while in Standard Mode.
For advanced operation, you can change to an
Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume
Alternate Command Mode that enables the op-
may improve clarity if reception between callers is
eration of the display and audio system through
unclear.
NISSAN Voice Recognition. When this mode is
● Incoming call — adjusting this setting allows active, an expanded list of commands can be
you to hear a difference in volume. spoken after pressing the button on the
● Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allows steering wheel, and the voice command menu
the person you are talking with to hear a prompts are turned off.
difference in volume. In Alternate Command Mode the recognition
success rate may be affected because the num-
ber of available commands and the ways of
speaking each command are increased. See
“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-
mand Mode” in this section.
To improve the recognition success rate when NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the STANDARD MODE
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that
mode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” in this The Standard Mode enables control of naviga-
section. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alter- tion, phone and vehicle information. With this
nate Command Mode be turned off and Standard setting active, commands that are available are
Mode be used for the best recognition perfor- always shown on the display and announced by
mance. the system.
While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys- Displaying user guide
tem for certain Phone and Navigation features,
you can switch to using manual controls (touch- If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system
screen, NISSAN controller, steering wheel con- for the first time or you do not know how to
trols) and the information you have already en- operate it, you can display the User Guide for
tered by voice control will be retained. To switch confirmation.
to manual controls, select the “Manual Controls” LHA1326
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
key on the display when it appears. The system accessing a simplified User Guide, which con- 1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
will respond by speaking “Changing to manual tains basic instructions and tutorials for several panel.
operation. Please use manual controls to con- voice commands. 2. Select the “Others” key.
tinue.”
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
For the voice commands for the navigation sys-
tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s NOTE:
Manual of your vehicle.
You can skip steps 1 to 3 by pressing
For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default setting
is the Standard Mode. See “Standard Mode” in the button and saying “Help”.
this section. For vehicles in Canada, the factory 4. Select the “User Guide” key.
default setting is the Alternate Command Mode.
See “Alternate Command Mode” in this section. 5. Select an item.

Available items: Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-
ognition system
● Getting Started
If you choose “Finding a Street Address”, “Using
Describes the basics of how to operate the
the Address Book” or “Placing Calls”, you can
Voice Recognition system.
view tutorials on how to perform these operations
● Let’s Practice using Voice Recognition.
Initiates a practice session that demon-
strates how to improve voice recognition by
the system.
● Using the Address Book
Tutorial for using the Address Book
● Finding a Street Address
LHA1329
Tutorial for entering a destination by street Getting started
address.
Before using the Voice Recognition system for
● Placing Calls
the first time, you can confirm how to use com-
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice mands by viewing the Getting Started section of
command operation. the User Guide.
● Help on Speaking 1. Select the “Getting Started” key.
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct 2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
command recognition by the system. screen using the NISSAN controller or
touching the page down key.

LHA1327 LHA1328 LHA1330
Let’s Practice To initiate a practice session, access the User Useful tips for correct operation
Guide and select the “Let’s Practice” key. Follow
The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows the on-screen prompts until the session is com- You can display useful speaking tips to help the
you to practice saying commands and receive plete. After the session is completed, a screen system recognize your voice commands cor-
feedback on the volume, speed and timing of your will be displayed that shows an analysis of differ- rectly.
speech. ent elements of your speech. Select the “Try 1. Select “Help on Speaking”.
Again” to repeat the session if improvement is
needed. Select the “Done” key to return to the 2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
User Guide screen. screen using the NISSAN controller or
touching the page down key.

USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
the switch is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-
cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition initialization is completed.
BEFORE STARTING
To get the best recognition performance from
LHA1331 Voice Recognition, observe the following: LHA2479
Voice recognition settings ● The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet GIVING VOICE COMMANDS
The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec- as possible. Close the windows to eliminate
1. Press the switch located on the steer-
ognition system are described. the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-
ing wheel.
bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the
1. Select “Voice Recognition”. system from correctly recognizing the voice
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the commands.
screen using the NISSAN controller. ● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command.
● Speak in a natural conversational voice with-
out pausing between words.
● If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.

● Commands that are available are always ● When saying the phone number 800-662-
shown on the display and spoken through 6200, the system will accept “eight-hundred”
voice menu prompts. Commands other than in addition to “eight zero zero” or “eight oh oh”.
those that are displayed are not accepted. 500, 700, and 900 are also supported.
Please follow the prompts given by the sys-
Examples:
tem.
● 1-800-662-6200
● If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the – “One eight zero zero six six two six two
command in a clear voice. zero zero”
● Press the button on the steering – “One eight hundred six six two six two
wheel to return to the previous screen. zero zero”
● If you want to cancel the command, press Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
LHA1333 and hold the button. The message, You can improve the recognition of phone num-
“Voice cancelled” will be announced. bers by saying the phone number in three groups
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Would you like ● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys- of numbers. For example, when you try to call
to access Phone, Navigation, Information, tem feedback, push the volume control 800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and the
Audio or Help?” switch on the steering wheel or use the system will then ask you for the next three digits.
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the audio system volume knob while the system Then, say “six six two”. After recognition, the sys-
is making an announcement. tem will then ask for the last four digits. Say, “six
screen changes from to , speak two zero zero”. Using this method of phone digit
a command. How to speak numbers entry can improve recognition performance.
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts
and speak after the tone sounds until your Voice Recognition requires a certain way to NOTE:
desired operation is completed. speak numbers when giving voice commands.
Refer to the following examples. When speaking a house number, speak the
Operating tips General rule:
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
“O” is included in the house number, it will
● Say a command after the tone. Voice com-
● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
mands cannot be accepted when the icon “oh” instead of “zero”.
is .
Standard Mode command list
Category Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Phone Displays Phone function commands.
Navigation Displays Navigation function commands.
Information Displays Vehicle Information.
Audio Displays Audio commands.
Help Displays User Guide.
Phone Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).
Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the vehicle phonebook.
Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the handset phonebook.
Call History Makes a call to a number in the incoming or outgoing call logs.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).
Navigation Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Address Book Searches for a location stored in the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.

Vehicle Information Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.
Maintenance Displays Maintenance information.
Traffic Info. Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Where am I? Displays current vehicle location.
Audio Command:
COMMAND ACTION
AM Changes the audio system mode to AM radio.
FM Changes the audio system mode to FM radio.
XM Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio.
CD Changes the audio system mode to CD.

Voice command examples
Some basic voice command examples are de-
scribed here.
For navigation system commands, see the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
LHA2479 LHA1333
Example 1 — Placing a call to the phone 2. The system announces, “Would you like to
number 800-662-6200: access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-
dio or Help?”
1. Press the button located on the steer-
ing wheel. 3. Say “Phone”.

LHA1334 LHA1335 LHA1336
4. Say “Dial Number”. 5. Say “800”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the next
three digits or dial, or say change number.”
7. Say “662”.

● You can only say a phone number using the
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using
this command. Please use the “International
Call” command for all other formats, and
when special characters such as star (*),
pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.
● If you say “Change Number” during phone
number entry, the system will automatically
request that you repeat the number using
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the
area code first and then follow the prompts.
● Do not add a “1” in front of the area code
when speaking phone numbers.
LHA1337 LHA1338
● If the system does not recognize your com-
8. The system announces, “Please say the last 10. The system announces, “Dial or Change mand, please try repeating the command
four digits or say change number.” Number?” using a natural voice. Speaking too slowly or
9. Say “6200”. too loudly may further decrease recognition
11. Say “Dial”. performance.
12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.
NOTE:
● You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-
tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-
essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is
recommended for improved recognition.
See “How to speak numbers” in this section.

LHA2479 LHA1333 LHA1334
Example 2 — Placing an international call 2. The system announces, “Would you like to 4. Say “International Call”.
to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333: access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-
dio or Help?”
1. Press the button located on the steer-
ing wheel. 3. Say “Phone”.

NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE
The Alternate Command Mode enables control
of the audio and display systems as well as
additional commands for the Vehicle Information,
Phone and Navigation systems. With this setting
active, the system does not announce or display
the available commands at each step.
When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an
expanded list of commands can be used after
pressing the button. Under this mode, the
screen for Standard Mode commands is not
available on the display. Please review the ex-
LHA1339 LHA1340
panded command list, available when this mode
5. Say “011811112223333”. 6. Say “Dial”. is active, as some Standard Mode commands are
7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111- replaced. Please see examples of Alternate
222-3333. Command Mode screens.
Please note that in this mode the recognition
NOTE: success rate may be affected as the number of
Any digit input format is available in the available commands and ways of speaking each
International Number input process, as command are increased. You can turn this mode
well as the special characters such as star ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the
(*), pound (#), and plus (+). Voice Recognition Settings will change to show
more options.

LHA1248 LHA1331 LHA1341
Activating Alternate Command Mode 4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key. 6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and
the setting menu is expanded to include the
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru- 5. The confirmation message is displayed on
Alternate Command Mode options. See
ment panel. the screen. Select the “OK” key to activate
“Settings menu” in this section for an expla-
the Alternate Command Mode.
2. Select the “Others” key on the display. nation of the options.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key. Displaying the command list
If you are controlling the system by voice com-
mands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-
ing procedure for displaying the voice command
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).
Press the button, listen for the tone and
say, “Help”. The system will respond by display-
ing the command list main menu.
LHA1342 LHA1231 LHA1342
Only manual controls such as the touchscreen 1. Press the INFO button on the instrument 5. Select a category using the NISSAN con-
can navigate the command list menu. panel. troller. The command list for the category
selected is shown.
As an alternative to the voice command “Help”, 2. Select the “Others” key using the NISSAN
you may access the command list using the fol- controller. 6. If necessary, scroll the screen using the
lowing steps: NISSAN controller to view the entire list.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key using the
NISSAN controller. 7. Press the BACK button to return to the
previous screen.
NOTE:
You can skip steps 1 to 3 if you say “Help”.
4. Select the “Command List” key using the
NISSAN controller.

Alternate Command Mode command list
Phone Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact in the vehicle phonebook.
Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact in the handset phonebook.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).
Call <name> Makes a call to a contact that is stored in either the Vehicle Phonebook or Handset Phonebook. Please say “Call” followed by a stored
name.
Incoming Calls Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.
Outgoing Calls Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.
Missed Calls Shows the last 5 missed phone calls.
Navigation Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Address Book Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.
Previous Start Point Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.
Minimize Freeway Route Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.
Fastest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.
Shortest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.
Cancel Route Cancels the current route.
Delete Destination Deletes the current destination.
Birdview Map Changes the Map display to Birdview.

COMMAND ACTION
Planview Map Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.
North Up Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.
Heading Up Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.
Zoom In <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a smaller number.
Zoom Out <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a larger number.
Guidance Voice ON/OFF Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.
Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.
Information Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Fuel Economy Displays Fuel Economy information.
Maintenance Display Maintenance information.
Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Where am I? Displays the current vehicle location.
Weather Information Displays weather information.
Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Audio Command:
COMMAND ACTION
AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
XM Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.
CD Starts to play a CD.
USB Turns to the USB audio input.
Bluetooth Audio Turns to the Bluetooth® audio system.
AUX Turns to the AUX input.

● Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.
● Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
● Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.
● Voice Recognition Settings
LHA1343 LHA1344 Describes the available Voice Recognition
Displaying user guide 5. Select an item. settings.
Available items: ● Adapting the System to Your Voice

You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con- Tutorial for adapting the system to your
● Getting Started
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several voice.
voice commands. Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system. USING THE SYSTEM
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel. ● Let’s Practice Initialization
2. Select the “Others” key. Initiates a practice session that demon- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
strates how to improve recognition by the position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
system. which takes a few seconds. When completed,
4. Select the “User Guide” key. the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
● Using the Address Book the switch is pressed before the initializa-
Tutorial for using the Address Book. tion completes, the display will show the mes-
sage: “System not ready.” or a beep sounds.
Before starting
To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice
Recognition, observe the following:
● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly.
● When the climate control is in the AUTO
mode, the fan speed decreases automati-
cally for easy recognition.
● Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a LHA2479 LHA1345
command. Giving voice commands 2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
● Speak in a natural voice without pausing and the system announces, “Please say a
1. Press and release the button located command from the displayed list or say Help
between words.
on the steering wheel. to show all commands.”
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from to , speak
a command.
4. Once a command is recognized, the system
will announce the recognized command and
perform the requested action.
If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice after the tone.
Operating tips How to speak numbers Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-
● Say a command after the tone. Voice com- Voice Recognition requires a certain way to mance.
mands cannot be accepted when the icon speak numbers when giving voice commands.
is . Refer to the following examples. NOTE:
● If the command is not recognized, the sys- General rule: When speaking a house number, speak the
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
command in a clear voice. ● Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. “O” is included in the house number, it will
● When saying the phone number 800-662- not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
● Press the button on the steering “oh” instead of “zero”.
wheel to return to the previous screen. 6200, the system will accept “eight-
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or Settings menu
● If you want to cancel the command, press “eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also
and hold the button. The message, supported. The content of the Settings Menu differs when
“Voice cancelled” will be announced. the system is in the Alternate Command Mode.
Examples:
● If you want to adjust the volume of the sys- Command List:
tem feedback, push the volume control ● 1-800-662-6200
Displays the command list for Alternate Com-
switch on the steering wheel or use the – “One eight zero zero six six two six two mand Mode.
audio system volume knob while the system zero zero”
is making an announcement. User Guide:
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
● To minimize the amount of prompts spoken zero zero” The user guide provides basic instructions for
by the system in Alternate Command Mode, using Voice Recognition and accessing some
use the Minimize Voice Feedback function. Improving Recognition of Phone numbers: voice commands.
To access the Minimize Voice Feedback
function press the SETTING button, then You can improve the recognition of phone num- NOTE:
select the “Others” key. Then select the bers by saying the phone number in three groups
of numbers. For example, when you try to call The user guide can also be accessed from
“Voice Recognition” key.
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and within the INFO menu after pressing the
the system will then ask you for the next three INFO button.
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,
the system will then ask for the last four digits.
Speaker Adaptation:
Starts a system training procedure to learn the
specific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-
aptation function” in this section.
Alternate Command Mode:
For advanced operation, an Alternate Command
Mode is provided. This setting enables control of
the audio system as well as additional commands
for the Phone and Navigation systems. With this
setting active, the system does not announce or
display the available commands at each step.
When this mode is activated, the Voice Recogni-
tion Settings will change to show more options.
LHA1341 LHA1346
Minimize Voice Feedback: 4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-
SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION
Reduces the amount of the information spoken rized by the system.
for each voice instruction. The Voice Recognition system has a function to
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
performance. The system can memorize the
voices of up to three persons.
Having the system learn the user’s
voice
ment panel, select the “Others” key on the
display.
3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.

LHA1347 LHA2457 LHA1349
5. Select a category to be learned by the sys- 7. The system requests that you repeat a com- Speaker Adaptation function settings
tem from the following list: mand after a tone. This command is also
displayed on the screen. Edit Name:
● Phone
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on
● Navigation the screen.
screen changes from to , speak
● Information the command that the system requested. Reset Result:
● Audio 9. When the system has recognized the voice Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-
● Help command, the voice of the user is learned. tion system has learned.
The voice commands in the category are Press the button or the BACK button to Continuous Learning:
displayed. return to the previous screen. When this item is turned to ON, you can have the
6. Select a voice command to train. If the system has learned the command correctly, system learn the voice commands in succession,
the voice command indicator on the screen turns without selecting commands one by one.
The Voice Recognition system starts. on.

The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number one,
until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG- 1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” in this
NIZED” or the system fails to interpret section.
the command correctly. 2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
The system consistently selects the 1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation
wrong voicetag in the phonebook. System” in this section.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.

MEMO

5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
On-pavement and off-road driving Fuel efficient driving tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Intelligent 4WD (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Off-road recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 4x4i system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Driving safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Rise-up and build-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge. . . . . . . 5-12 Brake force distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Remote start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . 5-14 Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
WARNING ● If you suspect that exhaust fumes are ● The exhaust system and body should be
entering the vehicle, drive with all win- inspected by a qualified mechanic
dows fully open, and have the vehicle whenever:
inspected immediately.
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets a. The vehicle is raised for service.
should also not be left alone. They ● Do not run the engine in closed spaces
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
could accidentally injure themselves or such as a garage.
entering into the passenger
others through inadvertent operation of ● Do not park the vehicle with the engine compartment.
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, running for any extended length of time.
temperatures in a closed vehicle could c. You notice a change in the sound of
quickly become high enough to cause ● Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, the exhaust system.
severe or possibly fatal injuries to doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)
d. You have had an accident involving
people or animals. closed while driving, otherwise exhaust
damage to the exhaust system, un-
gases could be drawn into the passen-
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or ger compartment. If you must drive with
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
straps to help prevent it from sliding or one of these open, follow these
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than THREE-WAY CATALYST
precautions:
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col- The three-way catalyst is an emission control
lision, unsecured cargo could cause 1. Open all the windows.
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
personal injury.
2. Set the air recirculation but- gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) ton to off and the fan control dial to high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
high to circulate the air.
WARNING ● If electrical wiring or other cable con- WARNING
● Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
nections must pass to a trailer through ● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
the seal on the lift gate or the body, tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
contain colorless and odorless carbon
follow the manufacturer’s recommen- or flammable materials away from the
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en- exhaust system components.
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
try into the vehicle.
death.
5-2 Starting and driving

● Do not stop or park the vehicle over TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
flammable materials such as dry grass, SYSTEM (TPMS) trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
waste paper or rags. They may ignite telltale.
and cause a fire. Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
CAUTION system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
● Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has function indicator is combined with the low tire
from leaded gasoline will seriously re- tires of a different size than the size indicated on pressure telltale. When the system detects a
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to the placard or tire inflation pressure label, you malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
help reduce exhaust pollutants. should determine the proper tire inflation pres- mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- sure for those tires.)
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
electrical systems can cause overrich
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv- (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice- when one or more of your tires is significantly malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
able loss of performance or other un- under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire including the installation of replacement or alter-
usual operating conditions are pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
detected. Have the vehicle inspected check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
promptly by a NISSAN dealer. them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi- check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over- ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
level. Running out of fuel could cause
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst. may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping properly.
ability.
● Do not race the engine while warming it Additional information:
up. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s ● The TPMS does not monitor the tire
● Do not push or tow your vehicle to start responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, pressure of the spare tire.
the engine.
Starting and driving 5-3

● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle ● Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
WARNING
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a and the outside temperature. Low outside ● Radio waves could adversely affect
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a temperature can lower the temperature of electric medical equipment. Those who
flat tire while driving). the air inside the tire which can cause a use a pacemaker should contact the
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause electric medical equipment manufac-
● The low tire pressure warning light does not turer for the possible influences before
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
automatically turn off when the tire pressure use.
nate. If the warning light illuminates, check
is adjusted on all 4 tires. After all 4 tires are
inflated to the recommended pressure, the the tire pressure for all four tires. ● If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
vehicle must be driven at speeds above ● The Tire and Loading Information label (also steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
turn off the low tire pressure warning light. reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
inflation pressure label) is located in the to a safe location and stop the vehicle
Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire driver’s door opening.
pressure. as soon as possible. Driving with under-
● You can also check the tire pressure of all inflated tires may permanently damage
● The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning tires (expect the spare) on the vehicle infor- the tires and increase the likelihood of
appears in the vehicle information display tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
mation display screen (if so equipped). The
when the low tire pressure warning light is could occur and may lead to an acci-
order of the tire pressure figures displayed
illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. dent and could result in serious per-
The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning on the screen corresponds with the actual
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
turns off when the low tire pressure warning order of the tire position. all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
light turns off. For additional information, see “Low tire pressure the recommended COLD tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls” shown on the tire and loading informa-
● The “Check Tire Pressure” warning appears
section, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System tion label to turn the low tire pressure
each time the ignition switch is placed in the
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
ON position as long as the low tire pressure
and “Tire Pressure” in the “Maintenance and do- replace it with a spare tire as soon as
warning light remains illuminated.
it-yourself” section. possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
● The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning of emergency” section for changing a
does not appear if the low tire pressure flat tire.)
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
malfunction.
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel Some examples are: For Canada:
is replaced, tire pressure will not be – Facilities or electric devices using similar radio This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
indicated, the TPMS will not function frequencies are near the vehicle. dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
and the low tire pressure warning light following two conditions: (1) This device
will flash for approximately 1 minute. – If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle. may not cause interference, and (2) this
The light will remain on after 1 minute. device must accept any interference, in-
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as – If a computer (or similar equipment) or a clude interference that may cause unde-
possible for tire replacement and/or DC/AC converter is being used in or near the sired operation of the device.
system resetting. vehicle.
● Replacing tires with those not originally FCC Notice:
TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert
specified by NISSAN could affect the When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the
proper operation of the TPMS. For USA:
TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and
● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol This device complies with Part 15 of the audible signals outside the vehicle to help you
tire sealant into the tires, as this may FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure lowing two conditions: (1) This device may pressure.
sensors. not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference re- Vehicle set-up:
CAUTION ceived, including interference that may
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
cause undesired operation.
Do not place metalized film or any metal 2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This NOTE: selector to the P (Park) position.
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the Changes or modification not expressly ap- 3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.
TPMS will not function properly. proved by the party responsible for compli- Do not start the engine.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily erate the equipment. Operation:
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
1. Add air to the tire.
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate. 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators
will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is reached, – The identification code of the tires pres- with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
the horn beeps once and the hazard indica- sure sensor is not registered to the sys- this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
tors stop flashing. tem. or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a
4. Perform the above steps for each tire. – The battery of the tire pressure sensor is
person wearing a seat belt.
low.
● If the tire is over-inflated more than ap-
Be sure to read the driving safety precautions
proximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn ● If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate
beeps and the hazard indicators flash 3 due to TPMS interference, move the ve-
times. To correct the pressure, push the hicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward AVOIDING COLLISION AND
core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to and try again. ROLLOVER
release pressure. When the pressure
If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire
reaches the designated pressure, the WARNING
pressure gauge.
horn beeps once.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
● If the hazard indicator does not flash and prudent manner may result in loss of
within approximately 15 seconds after DRIVING PRECAUTIONS control or an accident.
starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
● The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill They have higher ground clearance than passen- high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
Tire Alert under the following conditions: ger cars to make them capable of performing in a neuvers, because these driving practices could
– If there is interference from an external variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
device or transmitter. This gives them a higher center of gravity than any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
ordinary cars. An advantage of higher ground collision with other vehicles or objects or
– The air pressure from the inflation device clearance is a better view of the road, allowing cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
is not sufficient to inflate the tire. you to anticipate problems. However, they are not the loss of control causes the vehicle to
designed for cornering at the same speeds as slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and
– There is a malfunction in the TPMS sys-
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
tem.
than low-slung sports cars are designed to per- the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
– There is a malfunction in the horn or haz- form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at scription or over-the-counter drugs which may
ard indicators. all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt
as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle general guide. The vehicle must be driven as
supplemental restraint system” section of this speed is reduced. appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do hicle, road and traffic.
so. 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli- road surface. When all tires are on the road WARNING
sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap- The following actions can increase the
unbelted or improperly belted person is propriate driving lane. chance of losing control of the vehicle if
significantly more likely to be injured or there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
killed than a person properly wearing a ● If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
seat belt. collision and result in personal injury.
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road. ● The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
If the right side or left side wheels unintentionally RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
leave the road surface, maintain control of the ● Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
vehicle by following the procedure below. Please Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to ● Do not rapidly release the accelerator
note that this procedure is only a general guide. pedal.
The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. can also be caused by driving on under-inflated ● Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
tires.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
2. Do not apply the brakes. and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
speeds. with both hands and try to hold a straight
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
course.
with both hands and try to hold a straight Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-
course. ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve- pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed control of the vehicle by following the procedure 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve- below. Please note that this procedure is only a stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is ● Do not drive across steep slopes. In-
either contact a roadside emergency service true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, prescrip- stead drive either straight up or straight
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat tion, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your ability to down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, tip over sideways much more easily
this manual. drugs, or some other physical condition. than they can forward or backward.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ● Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.
DRIVING If you drive up them, you may stall. If
Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and you drive down them, you may not be
WARNING off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa- able to control your speed. If you drive
ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for across them, you may roll over.
Never drive under the influence of alcohol leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re- ● Do not shift gears while driving on
hicle.
duces coordination, delays reaction time downhill grades as this could cause
and impairs judgement. Driving after Remember that two-wheel drive models are less loss of control of the vehicle.
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood capable than four-wheel drive models for rough ● Stay alert when driving to the top of a
of being involved in an accident injuring road driving and extrication when stuck in deep hill. At the top there could be a drop-off
yourself and others. Additionally, if you snow or mud, or the like. or other hazard that could cause an
are injured in an accident, alcohol can accident.
increase the severity of the injury. Please observe the following precautions:
● If your engine stalls or you cannot make
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, WARNING it to the top of a steep hill, never at-
you must choose not to drive under the influence tempt to turn around. Your vehicle
● Drive carefully when off the road and
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are could tip or roll over. Always back
avoid dangerous areas. Every person
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al- straight down in R (Reverse) gear and
who drives or rides in this vehicle
though the local laws vary on what is considered apply brakes to control your speed.
should be seated with their seat belt
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
fastened. This will keep you and your ● Heavy braking going down a hill could
passengers in position when driving cause your brakes to overheat and fade,
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
over rough terrain. resulting in loss of control and an acci-
dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low
gear to control your speed.

● Unsecured cargo can be thrown around ● Do not drive beyond the performance ● If at all possible, avoid sharp turning
when driving over rough terrain. Prop- capability of the tires, even with 4WD maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.
erly secure all cargo so it will not be engaged. Your NISSAN four-wheel drive vehicle
thrown forward and cause injury to you has a higher center of gravity than a
● For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-
or your passengers. passenger car. The vehicle is not de-
tempt to raise two wheels off the
signed for cornering at the same
● To avoid raising the center of gravity ground and shift the transmission to
speeds as passenger cars.
excessively, do not exceed the rated any drive or reverse position with the
capacity of the roof rack and evenly engine running. Doing so may result in ● Always use tires of the same type, size,
distribute the load. Secure heavy loads drivetrain damage or unexpected ve- brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,
in the cargo area as far forward and as hicle movement which could result in or radial), and tread pattern on all four
low as possible. Do not equip the ve- serious vehicle damage or personal wheels. Install tire chains on the rear
hicle with tires larger than specified in injury. wheels when driving on slippery roads
this manual. This could cause your ve- and drive carefully.
● Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped
hicle to roll over.
vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer ● Be sure to check the brakes immedi-
● Do not grip the inside or spokes of the (such as the dynamometers used by ately after driving in mud or water. See
steering wheel when driving off-road. some states for emissions testing), or “Brake system” later in this section for
The steering wheel could move sud- similar equipment even if the other two “Wet brakes”.
denly and injure your hands. Instead wheels are raised off the ground. Make
● Avoid parking your vehicle on steep
drive with your fingers and thumbs on sure you inform test facility personnel
hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it
the outside of the rim. that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD
rolls forward, backward or sideways,
before it is placed on a dynamometer.
● Before operating the vehicle, ensure you could be injured.
Using the wrong test equipment may
that the driver and all passengers have
result in drivetrain damage or unex- ● Whenever you drive off-road through
their seat belts fastened.
pected vehicle movement which could sand, mud or water as deep as the
● Lower your speed when encountering result in serious vehicle damage or per- wheel hub, more frequent maintenance
strong crosswinds. With a higher center sonal injury. may be required. See “Periodic mainte-
of gravity, your NISSAN is more af- nance” in the “NISSAN Service and
● Accelerating quickly, sharp steering
fected by strong side winds. Slower Maintenance Guide.”
maneuvers or sudden braking may
speeds ensure better vehicle control.
cause loss of control.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

WARNING
switch position cannot be switched to OFF until
Do not operate the push-button ignition the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) posi-
switch while driving the vehicle except in tion.
an emergency. (The engine will stop when
the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu- When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-
tive times in quick succession or the igni- ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
tion switch is pushed and held for more 1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while position.
the vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury. 2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch
position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF
position.
LSD2014
The shift selector can be moved from the P
When the ignition switch is pushed without de- (Park) position if the ignition switch is in
pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will the ON position and the brake pedal is
illuminate. depressed.
Push the ignition switch center: If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
● once to change to ACC. moved from the LOCK position.
● two times to change to ON. Some indicators and warnings for operation are
● three times to return to OFF. displayed on the vehicle information display. See
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
The ignition switch will automatically return to the and controls” section of this manual.
LOCK position when any door is either opened or
closed with the switch in the OFF position.

The operating range of the engine start function OFF:
is inside of the vehicle 䊊
1 .
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when
● The luggage area is not included in the op- the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.
erating range, but the Intelligent Key may No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
function.
ACC (Accessories):
● If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-
ment panel, inside the glove box, storage bin This position activates electrical accessories,
or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
function. ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the
● If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door ignition switch to the OFF position after 30 min-
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent utes under the following conditions:
Key may function.
● all doors are closed.
LSD2020 PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ● shift selection lever is in P (Park).
OPERATING RANGE POSITIONS
The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used LOCK (Normal parking position): of the following occur:
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified The ignition switch can only be locked in this ● any door is opened.
operating range. position.
● shift selection lever is moved out of P (Park).
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis- The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
charged or strong radio waves are present near pushed to the ACC position while carrying the ● ignition switch changes position.
the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys- Intelligent Key.
ON (Normal operating position):
tem’s operating range becomes narrower and
The ignition switch will lock when any door is
may not function properly. opened or closed with the ignition switched off. This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,
it is possible for anyone, even someone who does
not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition
switch to start the engine.

After step 3 is performed, when the ignition
CAUTION
switch is pushed without depressing the
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition brake pedal, the ignition switch position will
switch in ACC or ON positions when the change to ACC.
engine is not running for an extended pe-
riod. This can discharge the battery. 4. Push the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF chime sounds. The engine will start.
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation NOTE:
while driving, perform the following procedure:
● When the ignition switch is pushed to the
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 ACC or ON position or the engine is started
consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch battery discharge indicator appears in the
for more than 2 seconds. SSD0860 vehicle information display even when the
Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent
BATTERY DISCHARGE Key battery discharge indicator, touch the
ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is
discharged, or environmental conditions interfere ● If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-
with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine cator appears, replace the battery as soon
according to the following procedure: as possible. See “Battery Replacement” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-
1. Place the shift selector in the P (Park) position.
tion.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent
Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ● Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake.
SYSTEM clear.
2. Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not ● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool- (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
allow the engine to start without the use of the ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least when- The starter is designed not to operate if
registered key. the shift selector is in any of the driving
ever you refuel.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key positions.
(for example, when interference is caused by ● Check that all windows and lights are clean.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
another registered key, an automated toll road ● Visually inspect tires for their appearance Depress the brake pedal and push the igni-
device or automatic payment device on the key and condition. Also check tires for proper tion switch to start the engine.
ring), restart the engine using the following pro- inflation.
cedure: To start the engine immediately, push and
● Check that all doors are closed. release the ignition switch while depressing
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
for approximately 5 seconds. ● Position seat and adjust head restraint.
any position.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or ● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
LOCK position, and wait approximately ● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to tremely cold weather or when restarting,
10 seconds. do likewise. depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. ● Check the operation of warning lights when proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while
the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- holding, crank the engine. Release the
4. Restart the engine while holding the device accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
(which may have caused the interference) tion. See “Warning/indicator lights and au-
separate from the registered key. dible reminders” in the “Instruments and ● If the engine is very hard to start because
controls” section of this manual. it is flooded, depress the accelerator
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec- pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa- Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or
devices. 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the
ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off the
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
accelerator pedal by depressing the NOTE: CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

brake pedal and pushing the push-button TRANSMISSION (CVT)
Care should be taken to avoid situations
ignition switch to start the engine. If the that can lead to potential battery discharge
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the The Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) in
and potential no-start conditions such as:
above procedure. your vehicle is electronically controlled to pro-
1. Installation or extended use of electronic duce maximum power and smooth operation.
CAUTION accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone char- The recommended operating procedures for this
Do not operate the starter for more than gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) transmission are shown on the following pages.
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
not start, push the ignition switch to the 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only performance and driving enjoyment.
OFF position and wait 10 seconds before driven short distances. In these cases, the
battery may need to be charged to maintain Engine power may be automatically re-
cranking again, otherwise the starter duced to protect the CVT if the engine
could be damaged. battery health.
speed increases quickly when driving on
4. Warm-up REMOTE START (if so equipped) slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec- Vehicles started with the remote start require the
onds after starting. Do not race the engine ignition switch to be placed in the ON position Starting the vehicle
while warming it up. Drive at moderate before the shift selector can be moved from the P
(Park) position. To place the ignition switch to the 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
speed for a short distance first, especially in foot brake pedal before moving the shift
ON position, follow these steps:
cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en- selector out of the P (Park) position.
gine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes 1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you. This CVT is designed so that the foot
before shutting it off. Starting and stopping brake pedal must be depressed before
2. Apply the brake.
the engine over a short period of time may shifting from P (Park) to any driving
make the vehicle more difficult to start. 3. Press the ignition switch once to the ON position while the ignition switch is in
position. the ON position.
5. To stop the engine, shift the shift selector to The shift selector cannot be moved out
the P (Park) position and push the ignition For additional information, see “NISSAN Intelli-
of the P (Park) position and into any of
switch to the OFF position. gent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and ad-
the other positions if the ignition
justments” section of this manual.
switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or
ACC position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
CAUTION
move the shift selector to a driving position.
● When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
3. Release the parking brake and foot brake grade, do not hold the vehicle by de-
pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in pressing the accelerator pedal. The foot
motion. brake should be used for this purpose.
WARNING ● Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
● Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- ● Except in an emergency, do not shift to
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low) the N (Neutral) position while driving.
position. Always depress the brake Coasting with the transmission in the N
pedal until shifting is completed. Fail- (Neutral) position may cause serious
ure to do so could cause you to lose damage to the transmission.
control and have an accident. LSD2127
● Cold engine idle speed is high, so use Shifting
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has Press the button 䊊
A while depressing the
warmed up. brake pedal

Press the button 䊊
A to shift
● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while vehicle is moving. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and Shift without pressing 䊊
A button
have an accident.
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal, push the press the shift selector button
and move the shift selector from the P (Park)
position to any of the desired shift positions.

R (Reverse):
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec- CAUTION
tor is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause To prevent transmission damage, use the
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
away and result in serious personal injury the vehicle is completely stopped.
or property damage. Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
CAUTION selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position pedal must be depressed and the shift se-
only when the vehicle is completely lector button pushed in to move the shift
stopped. selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
drive position to R (Reverse).
P (Park): LSD2128
N (Neutral):
Shift lock release
CAUTION Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
To prevent transmission damage, use the
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine shift selector may not be moved from the P (Park)
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
while the vehicle is moving. position even with the brake pedal depressed
the vehicle is completely stopped.
D (Drive): and the shift selector button pushed. To move the
Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the shift selector, perform the following procedure:
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Use this position for all normal forward driving.
1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped. L (Low): LOCK position.
The brake pedal must be depressed and
the shift selector button pushed in to move Use this position for engine braking on steep 2. Apply the parking brake.
the shift selector from N (Neutral) or any downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes and
whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not use 3. Remove the shift lock release cover 䊊
A us-
drive position to P (Park). Apply the parking
ing a suitable tool.
brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking the L (Low) position in any other circumstances.
brake first, then move the shift selector into the P 4. Push down the shift lock release 䊊
B using a
(Park) position. suitable tool.
5. Press the shift selector button 䊊
C and move To turn off the Overdrive off mode, push the O/D Fail-safe
the shift selector to the N (Neutral) position OFF switch again. The indicator light will
䊊D while holding down the shift lock release. turn off.
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
The vehicle may be moved to the desired
location. Replace the removed shift lock re- Each time the engine is started, or when the shift and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
lease cover after the operation. If the shift selector is shifted to any position other than D system may be activated. The MIL may
selector cannot be moved out of the P (Park) (Drive), the Overdrive off mode will be automati- come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is
position, have a NISSAN dealer check the cally turned off. activated, see “Malfunction Indicator Light
CVT system as soon as possible. (MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-
Accelerator downshift tion. This will occur even if all electrical
WARNING
— in D position — circuits are functioning properly. In this
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel- case, place the ignition switch in the OFF
If the shift selector cannot be moved from position and wait for 10 seconds. Then
the P (Park) position while the engine is erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the push the switch back to the ON position.
running and the brake pedal is depressed, The vehicle should return to its normal op-
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction- vehicle speed.
erating condition. If it does not return to its
ing stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.
High fluid temperature protection normal operating condition, have a
mode NISSAN dealer check the transmission and
Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch (if so repair if necessary.
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
equipped) protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-
When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the comes too high (for example, when climbing
shift selector in the D (Drive) position, the steep grades in high temperature with heavy
light in the instrument panel illuminates. See loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine
“Overdrive off indicator light” in the “Instruments power and, under some conditions, vehicle
and controls” section of this manual. speed will be decreased automatically to reduce
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
Use the Overdrive off mode when you need im- speed can be controlled with the accelerator
proved engine braking. pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be
limited.

PARKING BRAKE
WARNING WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protec- ● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs, leased before driving. Failure to do so
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. can cause brake failure and lead to an
The reduced speed may be lower than accident.
other traffic, which could increase the
● Do not release the parking brake from
chance of a collision. Be especially care-
outside the vehicle.
ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the
side of the road at a safe place and allow ● Do not use the shift selector in place of
the transmission to return to normal op- the parking brake. When parking, be
eration, or have it repaired if necessary. sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
● Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident. LSD0158
To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it
will release.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.

CRUISE CONTROL
● If the SET indicator light blinks, push the CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
cruise control ON·OFF switch off and have
the system checked by a NISSAN dealer. The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
● The SET indicator light may blink when the keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
cruise control ON·OFF switch is pushed ON
while pushing the ACCEL/RES, To turn on the cruise control, push the
COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop- ON·OFF switch on. The CRUISE indicator light in
erly set the cruise control system, use the the vehicle information display will illuminate.
following procedures. To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
WARNING and release it. The SET indicator light in the
Do not use the cruise control when driving vehicle information display will illuminate. Take
under the following conditions: your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle
SSD0941
maintains the set speed.
● When it is not possible to keep the
1. ACCEL/RES switch vehicle at a set speed. ● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
2. COAST/SET switch celerator pedal. When you release the
● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
3. CANCEL switch speed. set speed.
4. ON·OFF switch
● On winding or hilly roads. ● The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). when going up or down steep hills. If this
CONTROL happens, drive without the cruise control.
● In very windy areas.
● If the cruise control system malfunctions, it To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
cancels automatically. The SET indicator Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle following three methods.
light in the vehicle information display then control and result in an accident.
● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
blinks to warn the driver, see “Vehicle infor-
light in the vehicle information display goes
mation display” in the “Instruments and con-
out.
trols” section.
● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
● Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
CAUTION
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator of the following three methods.
light in the vehicle information display go out. During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve- follow these recommendations to obtain
The cruise control is automatically canceled and hicle attains the desired speed, push the maximum engine performance and en-
the SET light in the vehicle information display COAST/SET switch and release it. sure the future reliability and economy of
goes out if:
● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re- your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
● you depress the brake pedal while pushing lease the switch when the vehicle slows to recommendations may result in short-
the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch. the desired speed. ened engine life and reduced engine
The preset speed is deleted from memory. performance.
● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH Each time you do this, the set speed de- ● Avoid driving for long periods at constant
(13 km/h) below the set speed. creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h). speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
● you move the shift selector to N (Neutral). To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re- ● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
of the following three methods. ● Avoid quick starts.
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
● Depress the accelerator pedal. When the ● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
release the COAST/SET switch.
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. could be damaged.
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch.
● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving ● Recirculating the cool air in the cabin 7. Avoid Idling
Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy when the A/C is on reduces cooling load
from your vehicle. ● Shutting off your engine when safe for
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis- stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake tances fuel and reduces emissions
Pedal Application
● Observing the speed limit and not ex- 8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
● Avoid rapid starts and stops ceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where le- ● Automated passes permit drivers to use
● Use smooth, gentle accelerator and gally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency special lanes to maintain cruising speed
brake application whenever possible due to reduced aerodynamic drag through the toll and avoid stopping and
● Maintain constant speed while commut- ● Maintaining a safe following distance be- starting
ing and coast whenever possible hind other vehicles reduces unnecessary 9. Winter Warm Up
2. Maintain Constant Speed braking
● Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel
● Look ahead to try and anticipate and mini- ● Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate economy
mize stops changes in speed permits reduced brak-
● Vehicles typically need no more than
ing and smooth acceleration changes
● Synchronizing your speed with traffic 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effec-
lights allows you to reduce your number ● Select a gear range suitable to road con- tively circulate the engine oil before driv-
of stops ditions. ing
● Maintaining a steady speed can minimize 5. Use Cruise Control ● Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating
red light stops and improve fuel efficiency temperature more quickly while driving
● Using cruise control during highway driv- versus idling
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher ing helps maintain a steady speed
Vehicle Speeds 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
● Cruise control is particularly effective in
● Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more providing fuel savings when driving on flat ● Park your vehicle in a covered parking
efficient to open windows to cool the area or in the shade whenever possible
terrains
vehicle due to reduced engine load
● When entering a hot vehicle, opening the
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
● Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more windows will help to reduce the inside
efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle ● Utilize a map or navigation system to de- temperature faster, resulting in reduced
due to increased aerodynamic drag termine the best route to save time demand on your A/C system
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY INTELLIGENT 4WD (if so equipped)
● Keep your engine tuned up. ● 2WD – Turn the 4WD mode switch clock-
wise to the 2WD position.
● Follow the recommended scheduled main-
tenance. ● LOCK – To engage the LOCK mode, turn
the 4WD mode switch counterclockwise to
● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
the LOCK position. The switch will return to
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
the AUTO position automatically and the
and lowers fuel economy.
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) LOCK indicator
● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im- light in the meter illuminates. To dis-
proper alignment increases tire wear and engage the LOCK mode, turn the switch to
lowers fuel economy. the LOCK position again. The switch will
● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. return to the AUTO position automatically,
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda- and the 4WD LOCK indicator light turns off.
tions” in “Technical and consumer informa- The LOCK mode will automatically be can-
tion” later in this manual. celled when the ignition switch is turned to
LIC2399
the “OFF” position.
4X4I SYSTEM OPERATION
4WD shift switch

The Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) system is used to
select the 2WD (Two-Wheel Drive), AUTO or
LOCK mode depending on the driving condi-
tions.
Turn the 4WD mode switch, located on the cen-
ter console, to select AUTO, 2WD, or LOCK.
● AUTO – Turn the 4WD mode switch to the
neutral (AUTO) position. The Four-Wheel
Drive (4WD) AUTO indicator light in
the meter illuminates.
4WD shift tips
● If the 4WD mode switch is operated while
making a turn, accelerating or decelerating,
or if the ignition switch is turned off while in
the AUTO or LOCK mode, you may feel a
jolt. This is normal.
● The oil temperature of power train parts will
increase if the vehicle is continuously oper-
ated under conditions where the difference
between the front and rear wheels is large
(wheel slip), such as when driving the ve-
hicle on rough roads through sand or mud or
when freeing a stuck vehicle. In these cases,
the 4WD warning light blinks rapidly and the
4WD mode changes to the 2WD mode to
protect the power train parts. If you stop
driving with the engine idling and wait until
the warning light stops blinking, the 4WD
returns to the AUTO mode.
● Brake distance in the 4WD mode is the
LSD2129 same as 2WD.

4WD warning light 2WD mode. The AUTO mode may change to the
CAUTION
LOCK mode before the warning light blinks. This is
● Depending on the driving condition, the normal. If the warning light blinks rapidly during
4WD mode may automatically change Illuminates or operation, stop the vehicle with the engine idling in
from 2WD to 4WD even when the 2WD Warning light
blinks when: a safe place immediately. Then if the light goes off
mode is selected. If this occurs while after a while, you can continue driving.
driving, the 4WD mode indicator light There is a mal-
will not illuminate. function in the
A large difference between the diameters of front
Illuminates and rear wheels will make the warning light blink
● Do not start the engine with the 4WD 4–wheel drive
system slowly (about once per 2 seconds). Pull off the
mode switch in any mode in the follow-
ing cases: The power train
road in a safe area, and idle the engine. Check that
Blinks rap- oil temperature all tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is correct
– when the vehicle is placed on a fre- idly is abnormally and tires are not worn. Change the 4WD mode
eroller or jacking up the vehicle with high switch to the 2WD mode and do not drive fast.
the front tires raised and the rear
tires on the ground. The difference CAUTION
Blinks
– when towing the vehicle with the rear in wheel rota-
slowly ● If the warning light illuminates while
tion is large
tires raised from the ground. driving, 4WD mode will be changed to
● Operate the 4WD mode switch only 2WD mode. Reduce the vehicle speed
The 4WD warning light located in the instrument and have your vehicle checked by a
when driving straight. Do not operate
panel illuminates when the ignition switch is NISSAN dealer as soon as possible. Be
the 4WD mode switch when making a
turned to the “ON” position. It turns off soon after especially careful when driving.
turn or backing up.
the engine is started.
● Do not operate the 4WD mode switch ● Never drive on dry hard surface roads in
with the front wheel spinning. If any malfunction occurs in the 4WD system when the LOCK mode, as this will overload
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position, the the power train and may cause a seri-
● Engine idling speed is high while warm- warning light will either remain illuminated or blink. ous malfunction.
ing up the engine. Be especially careful
when starting or driving on slippery sur- High-temperature power train oil due to continu- ● The power train may be damaged if you
faces with the 4WD mode switch set in ous operation of the vehicle to free a stuck vehicle continue driving with the 4WD warning
the AUTO mode. makes the warning light blink rapidly (about twice light blinking rapidly.
per second). The driving mode may change to the
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
4WD mode indicator lights

The 4WD mode indicator lights ( , )
are located in the instrument panel.
The 4WD mode indicator lights ( , )

illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position. The indicator lights turn off
within 1 second.
The 4WD mode indicator lights will display the
mode selected by the 4WD mode switch while
engine is running.
The 4WD LOCK indicator light illuminates
simultaneously along with the 4WD AUTO indi- WSD0050
cator light when selecting the LOCK
mode. WARNING ● Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
● Do not stop or park the vehicle over
The 4WD AUTO indicator light illuminates ● Do not leave children unattended inside
flammable materials such as dry grass,
when selecting the AUTO mode. the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
If the 4WD warning light illuminates, the 4WD and cause a fire. tivate switches or controls. Unattended
mode indicator lights will turn off. children could become involved in seri-
● Safe parking procedures require that ous accidents.
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park). Fail- 1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
ure to do so could cause the vehicle to
move unexpectedly or roll away and re- 2. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
sult in an accident. Make sure the shift tion.
selector has been pushed as far forward 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
as it can go and cannot be moved without traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
depressing the foot brake pedal.
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
POWER STEERING
● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 䊊

A of the power steering system will go down after a
WARNING
period of time and the power assist level will
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the ● If the engine is not running or is turned return to normal after starting the engine. The
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel off while driving, the power assist for power steering warning light will go off. Avoid
gently touches the curb. the steering will not work. Steering will repeating such steering wheel operations that
● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
B be harder to operate. could cause the power steering system to over-
● When the power steering warning light heat.
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side illuminates with the engine running, You may hear a noise from the front of the vehicle
wheel gently touches the curb. there will be no power assist for the when the steering wheel is operated. This is a
steering. You will still have control of normal operational noise and is not a malfunction.
● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO the vehicle but the steering will be
CURB: 䊊
C
harder to operate. Have the power If the electric power steering warning light PSil-
steering system checked by a NISSAN luminates while the engine is running, it may
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road indicate the power steering system is not func-
so the vehicle will move away from the cen- dealer.
tioning properly and may need servicing. Have
ter of the road if it moves. the power steering system checked by a
The power steering system is designed to pro-
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi- vide power assist while driving to operate the NISSAN dealer.
tion. steering wheel with light force. When the electric power steering warning light
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly illuminates with the engine running, there will be
or continuously while parking or driving at a very no power assist for the steering but you will still
low speed, the power assist for the steering have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater
wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over- steering effort is required to operate the steering
heating of the power steering system and protect wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low
speeds.
it from getting damaged. While the power assist
is reduced, steering wheel operation will become For additional information see “Power steering
heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still per- warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
formed, the power steering may stop and the section.
power steering warning light will illuminate. In a
safe location, stop the engine and push the igni-
tion switch to the OFF position. The temperature
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic This procedure is described in the vehicle service
WARNING
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
have braking at 2 wheels. ● While driving on a slippery surface, be dealer.
careful when braking, accelerating or
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel- ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
erating could cause the wheels to skid (ABS)
Vacuum assisted brakes and result in an accident.
The brake booster aids braking by using engine ● If the engine is not running or is turned WARNING
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the off while driving, the power assist for ● The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, the brakes will not work. Braking will be sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be harder. vent accidents resulting from careless
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis- or dangerous driving techniques. It can
tance will be longer. Wet brakes help maintain vehicle control during
When the vehicle is washed or driven through braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-
Using the brakes ber that stopping distances on slippery
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while braking distance will be longer and the vehicle surfaces will be longer than on normal
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the may pull to one side during braking. surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage. tances may also be longer on rough,
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to are using tire chains. Always maintain a
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return safe distance from the vehicle in front
downshift to a lower gear before going down a to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may speeds until the brakes function correctly. sible for safety.
reduce braking performance and could result in ● Tire type and condition may also affect
loss of vehicle control. Parking brake break-in
braking effectiveness.
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the – When replacing tires, install the
effect of the parking brake is weakened or when- specified size of tires on all four
ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum/rotors wheels.
are replaced, in order to assure the best brake
performance.
– When installing a spare tire, make When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are
WARNING
sure that it is the proper size and type close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies
as specified on the Tire and Loading Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is
Information label. See “Tire and may result in increased stopping similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
Loading Information label” in the distances. may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
“Technical and consumer informa- noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
Self-test feature the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
tion” section of this manual.
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
– For detailed information, see However, the pulsation may indicate that road
“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte- pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
quired while driving.
this manual. tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard a “clunk” noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
The system detects the rotation speed at each malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
preventing each wheel from locking, the system brake system then operates normally, but without
helps the driver maintain steering control and anti-lock assistance.
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
pery surfaces. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
Using the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De- Normal operation
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper- The ABS operates at speeds above 3 - 6 MPH (5
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer - 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
the vehicle to avoid obstacles. conditions.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses ● The road may be slippery or the system may The VDC system is automatically reset to on
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve- determine some action is required to help when the ignition switch is placed in the off
hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, keep the vehicle on the steered path. position then back to the on position.
the VDC System helps to perform the following
● You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
functions:
and hear a noise or vibration from under the that tests the system each time you start the
● Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel hood. This is normal and indicates that the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is VDC system is working properly. at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
● Adjust your speed and driving to the road
the same axle. the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
conditions.
indication of a malfunction.
● Controls brake pressure and engine output
See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
Control (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru- WARNING
speed (traction control function).
ments and controls” section. ● The VDC system is designed to help the
● Controls brake pressure at individual wheels driver maintain stability but does not
and engine output to help the driver maintain If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-
control of the vehicle in the following condi- and indicator lights come on in the instru-
ing operation at high speeds or by care-
tions: ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns less or dangerous driving techniques.
off when these indicator lights are on. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased steer- The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC careful when driving and cornering on
ing input) system. The indicator illuminates to indi- slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to cate the VDC system is off.
certain road or driving conditions) When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain system, the VDC system still operates to prevent
control of the vehicle, but it can not prevent loss one drive wheel from slipping by transferring
of vehicle control in all driving situations. power to a non slipping drive wheel. The
When the VDC system operates, the indi- indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC
cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the functions are off and the indicator will not
following: flash.
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. ● When driving on extremely inclined sur- RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP
If suspension parts such as shock ab- faces such as higher banked corners, The system gradually adjusts braking power dur-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, the VDC system may not operate prop-
ing normal braking to help provide an enhanced
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN erly and the indicator may flash or brake feel.
recommended for your vehicle or are
both the and indicator
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
lights may illuminate. Do not drive on
may not operate properly. This could
these types of roads. During braking while driving through turns, the
adversely affect vehicle handling per-
formance, and the indicator may ● When driving on an unstable surface system optimizes the distribution of force to each
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or of the four wheels depending on the radius of the
flash or both the and indi-
cator lights may illuminate. ramp, the indicator may flash or turn.
both the and indicator
● If brake related parts such as brake WARNING
lights may illuminate. This is not a mal-
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
function. Restart the engine after driv- ● The VDC system is designed to help the
ing onto a stable surface. driver maintain stability but does not
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-
operate properly and both the
recommended ones are used, the VDC ing operation at high speeds or by care-
and the indicator lights may less or dangerous driving techniques.
illuminate. system may not operate properly and
the indicator may flash or both Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
● If engine control related parts are not careful when driving and cornering on
NISSAN recommended or are extremely the and indicator lights may slippery surfaces and always drive
illuminate. carefully.
deteriorated, both the and
indicator lights may illuminate. ● The VDC system is not a substitute for ● The active trace control and brake force
winter tires or tire chains on a snow distribution systems may not be effec-
covered road. tive depending on the driving condition.
Always drive carefully and attentively.

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. ● When driving on an unstable surface WARNING
If suspension parts such as shock ab- such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, ● Never rely solely on the hill start assist
ramp, the VDC warning light may illumi-
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN system to prevent the vehicle from mov-
nate. This is not a malfunction. Restart
recommended for your vehicle or are ing backward on a hill. Always drive
the engine after driving onto a stable
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system carefully and attentively. Depress the
surface.
may not operate properly. This could brake pedal when the vehicle is
● If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN stopped on a steep hill. Be especially
adversely affect vehicle handling per-
recommended ones are used, the VDC careful when stopped on a hill on frozen
formance, and the VDC warning light
system may not operate properly and or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the
may illuminate.
the VDC warning light may illuminate. vehicle from rolling backwards may re-
● If brake related parts such as brake sult in a loss of control of the vehicle
● The VDC system is not a substitute for
pads, rotors and calipers are not and possible serious injury or death.
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
covered road. ● The hill start assist system is not de-
operate properly and the VDC warning signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill
light may illuminate. on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when
the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.
● If engine control related parts are not Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
NISSAN recommended or are extremely to roll backwards and may result in a
deteriorated, the VDC warning light may collision or serious personal injury.
illuminate.
● The hill start assist may not prevent the
● When driving on extremely inclined sur- vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill
faces such as higher banked corners, under all load or road conditions. Al-
the VDC system may not operate prop- ways be prepared to depress the brake
erly and the VDC warning light may illu- pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling
minate. Do not drive on these types of backwards. Failure to do so may result
roads. in a collision or serious personal injury.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING
The hill start assist system automatically keeps FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
from rolling backwards in the time it takes the To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de- manual.
driver to release the brake pedal and apply the icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill. frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key TIRE EQUIPMENT
hole, or use the NISSAN Intelligent Key®. 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
Hill start assist will operate automatically under
the following conditions: ANTI-FREEZE provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these
● The shift selector is shifted to a forward or In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem- tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
reverse gear. perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
● The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection. hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
by applying the brake. For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
manual.
2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and size, speed rating and availability informa-
hill start assist will stop operating completely. BATTERY tion.
Hill start assist will not operate when the shift If the battery is not fully charged during extremely 2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
selector is shifted to N or P or on a flat and level cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may tires may be used. However, some U.S.
road. freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi- states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked use. Check local, state and provincial laws
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main- before installing studded tires.
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this Skid and traction capabilities of studded
manual. snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
3. Tire chains may be used. For details, see
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti- “Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the yourself” section of this manual.
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT ● Allow more stopping distance under WARNING
these conditions. Braking should be
It is recommended that the following items be ● Do not use your engine block heater
started sooner than on dry pavement.
carried in the vehicle during winter: with an ungrounded electrical system
● Allow greater following distances on or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove slippery roads. riously injured by an electrical shock if
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). you use an ungrounded connection.
blades.
These may appear on an otherwise ● Disconnect and properly store the en-
● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of gine block heater cord before starting
jack to give it firm support. ice is seen ahead, brake before reach- the engine. Damage to the cord could
● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts. ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice, result in an electrical shock and can
and avoid any sudden steering cause serious injury.
● Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield- maneuvers.
washer fluid reservoir. ● Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-
● Do not use the cruise control on slip- tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE pery roads. the extension cord into a Ground Fault
● Snow can trap dangerous exhaust Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
WARNING gases under your vehicle. Keep snow 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
clear of the exhaust pipe and from proper extension cord or a grounded
● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), outlet can result in a fire or electrical
very cold snow or ice can be slick and around your vehicle.
shock and cause serious personal
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will injury.
have much less traction or “grip” under ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on equipped) To use the engine block heater:
wet ice until the road is salted or
Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold 1. Turn the engine off.
sanded.
temperature starting.
● Whatever the condition, drive with cau- 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
tion. Accelerate and slow down with The engine block heater should be used when heater cord.
care. If accelerating or downshifting too the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
fast, the drive wheels will lose even grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
more traction. cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
erly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.

6 In case of emergency
Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
while driving, perform the following procedure: placed in any position.
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3 Some state laws may prohibit the use of
consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.
LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
● If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
● Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
● Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.
6-2 In case of emergency

FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING WARNING ● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel

SYSTEM (TPMS) ● Radio waves could adversely affect
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure electric medical equipment. Those who
and the low tire pressure warning light
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres- use a pacemaker should contact the
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low electric medical equipment manufac-
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
tire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECK turer for the possible influences before
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle use.
possible for tire replacement and/or
information display, one or more of your tires is ● If the low tire pressure warning light system resetting.
significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the sys- illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
● Replacing tires with those not originally
tem also displays pressure of all tires (except the steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
specified by NISSAN could affect the
spare tire) on the display screen by sending a reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
proper operation of the TPMS.
signal from a sensor that is installed in each to a safe location and stop the vehicle
wheel. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire as soon as possible. Driving with under- ● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of inflated tires may permanently damage tire sealant into the tires, as this may
it by the low tire pressure warning light. This the tires and increase the likelihood of cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
system will activate only when the vehicle is tire failure. Serious vehicle damage sensors.
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). For could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per- CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
more details, refer to “Warning/indicator lights
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
and audible reminders” in the “Instruments and
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
controls” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring low:
the recommended COLD tire pressure
System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
section. Stopping the vehicle
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire, 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
replace it with a spare tire as soon as away from traffic.
possible.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Move the shift selector to P (Park).
In case of emergency 6-3

4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
● Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the automatic transmission
is shifted into P (Park).
● Never change tires when the vehicle is WCE0044 LCE2035
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
Blocking wheels Getting the spare tire and tools
● Never change tires if oncoming traffic is Place suitable blocks 䊊 1 at both the front and 1. Open the liftgate, and lift the luggage board
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes- back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire in the cargo area using the handle 䊊 A.
sional road assistance. 䊊2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2036 LCE2037 LCE2038
2. Remove the jack and tool kit cover by lifting 3. Remove the tool kit 䊊
B. 4. Remove the jack.
up using the handles.
● To release the tool kit, release the hook ● The jack is secured by a fastener 䊊 D , to
and eye straps 䊊C. release the fastener assemble the exten-
sion 䊊 E into the wheel nut wrench 䊊 F as
illustrated and rotate counterclockwise to
release.
● Insert the flat end of the wheel nut wrench
䊊F into the slot of the fastener 䊊 D , and
rotate counterclockwise to release the
jack.
5. The lowering mechanism for the spare tire is
located on the passenger side of the cargo
area. Remove the cover 䊊 G to access the
spare tire winch.

CAUTION ● Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
● Make sure safety cable is coiled above
support.
spare tire when reinstalling spare
tire/wheel. ● Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
● When re-installing the spare tire under
the vehicle after use, be sure to secure ● Never use blocks on or under the jack.
it with the tire stem facing down toward ● Do not start or run the engine while
the ground. If the spare tire is improp- vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
erly secured with the tire stem facing up vehicle to move. This is especially true
towards the bottom of the vehicle, there for vehicles with limited slip
is an increased risk of separating from differentials.
the vehicle in the event of crash which
may pose a hazard in traffic or risk of ● Do not allow passengers to stay in the
LCE2039 injury to others. vehicle while it is on the jack.
6. Insert the spare tire winch socket 䊊
H to the
● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
lowering mechanism nut. Jacking up vehicle and removing the the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
7. To lower the spare tire, insert the wheel nut damaged tire move.
wrench 䊊 F to the extension 䊊 E and insert
Always refer to the illustration for the correct
the T-shaped end to the winch socket 䊊 H WARNING
placement and jack-up points for your specific
and rotate counterclockwise. ● Never get under the vehicle while it is vehicle model and jack type.
8. After removing the spare tire from under the supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup- Carefully read the caution label attached to
vehicle, be sure to crank the cable up to the jack body and the following instruc-
stow it. port it with safety stands.
tions.
● Use only the jack provided with your
NOTE: vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
jack provided with your vehicle on other turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
Fully lower the spare tire below the vehicle wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
before attempting to remove the winch vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change. until the tire is off the ground.
from the spare tire.
LCE2048 LCE0087
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up The jack should be used on firm and 3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack
point as illustrated so the top of the jack level ground. as shown.
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The 4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar- and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the
rows on the side of the frame. tire clears the ground.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
A,䊊
in the sequence illustrated (䊊 B,䊊 C,䊊 D,
䊊E ). Lower the vehicle completely.
WARNING
● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
● Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
LCE2043 WCE0056 to become loose.
NOTE: Installing the spare tire ● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
If the lug nut wrench/jack handle contacts hicle has been driven for 600 miles
The spare tire is designed for emergency (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
the ground while raising the vehicle, disas- use. See specific instructions under the
semble the lug nut wrench from the jack etc.).
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
extension rod, rotate it 90 degrees and re- As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this
assemble.
manual. to the specified torque with a torque
5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the wrench.
tire. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub. Wheel nut tightening torque:
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten 83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
the wheel nuts finger tight.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel specification at all times. It is recom-
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
they are tight. specifications at each lubrication interval.
JUMP STARTING
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. ● When re-installing the spare tire under To start your engine with a booster battery, the
the vehicle after use, be sure to secure instructions and precautions below must be fol-
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
it with the tire stem facing down toward lowed.
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km). the ground. If the spare tire is improp-
erly secured with the tire stem facing up WARNING
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire towards the bottom of the vehicle, there ● If done incorrectly, jump starting can
and loading information label affixed to the is an increased risk of separating from lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
driver side center pillar. the vehicle in the event of crash which severe injury or death. It could also
may pose a hazard in traffic or risk of damage your vehicle.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
injury to others.
ment in the vehicle. ● Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-
6. Close the liftgate. ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
WARNING
● Do not allow battery fluid to come into
● Always make sure that the spare tire
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
and jacking equipment are properly se-
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
cured after use. Such items can become
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
sudden stop.
come into contact with anything, imme-
● The spare tire is designed for emer- diately flush the contacted area with
gency use. See specific instructions un- water.
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
● Keep battery out of the reach of
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
children.
● The booster battery must be rated at
12 volts. Use of an improperly rated
battery can damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
● Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury.
● Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
WCE0054
3. Remove the vent caps on the battery (if so
WARNING
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
Always follow the instructions below. cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
Failure to do so could result in damage to
the charging system and cause personal 4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence
injury. illustrated (䊊
A,䊊
B,䊊C,䊊 D ).
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-
teries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary
electrical systems (lights, heater, air condi-
tioner, etc.).
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
CAUTION CAUTION WARNING

● Always connect positive (⫹) to positive ● CVT models cannot be push-started or ● Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for tow-started. Attempting to do so may overheats. Doing so could cause engine
example, strut mounting bolt, engine cause transmission damage. damage or a vehicle fire.
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
● Do not push start this vehicle. The ● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
● Make sure the jumper cables do not three-way catalyst may be damaged. never remove the radiator or coolant
touch moving parts in the engine com- reservoir cap while the engine is still
partment and that the cable clamps do hot. When the radiator or coolant reser-
not contact any other metal. voir cap is removed, pressurized hot
water will spurt out, possibly causing
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and serious injury.
let it run for a few minutes.
● Do not open the hood if steam is com-
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve- ing out.
hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started. If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading and
CAUTION the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine
coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
noise, etc. take the following steps.
not start right away, place the ignition
switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
4 seconds before trying again. the parking brake and move the shift selector
to P (Park).
7. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect
the negative cable and then the positive cable. Do not stop the engine.
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be 2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover windows, move the heater or air conditioner
the vent holes as it may be contaminated temperature control to maximum hot and fan
with corrosive acid. control to high speed.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for 6. After the engine cools down, check the cool- When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool- with the engine running. Add coolant to the followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary. age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
open the hood further until no steam or Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
coolant can be seen. dealer. tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
4. Open the engine hood. and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
WARNING vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
If steam or water is coming from the en- the service operator carefully read the following
gine, stand clear to prevent getting
precautions:
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or WARNING
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is ● Never ride in a vehicle that is being
running. The radiator hoses and radiator towed.
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or ● Never get under your vehicle after it has
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en- been lifted by a tow truck.
gine.
CAUTION
WARNING
● When towing, make sure that the trans-
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, mission, axles, steering system and
jewelry or clothing to come into contact powertrain are in working condition. If
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the any of these conditions apply, dollies or
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling a flatbed tow truck must be used.
fan can start at any time.
● Always attach safety chains before
towing.

For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
LCE2049
Four-wheel drive models CAUTION

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be Never tow 4WD models with any of the
used when towing your vehicle or place the ve- wheels on the ground as this may cause
hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated. serious and expensive damage to the
powertrain.

WARNING
● Never tow your vehicle with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is nec-
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
● When towing with the rear wheels on
the ground or on towing dollies, place
the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and secure the steering wheel
in the straight-ahead position with a
rope or similar device.
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
LCE2050
Front-Wheel Drive models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving wheels (front) off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

● Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
or free a stuck vehicle. use the following procedure:
● Only use devices specifically designed 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System
for vehicle recovery and follow the (VDC).
manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
● Always pull the recovery device straight vehicle is clear of obstructions.
out from the front of the vehicle. Never 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
pull at an angle. an area around the front tires.
● Route recovery devices so they do not 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
touch any part of the vehicle except the ward.
attachment point.
● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., and D (Drive).
LTI2040
use a tow strap or other device designed specifi-
● Apply the accelerator as little as possible
Pulling a stuck vehicle cally for vehicle recovery. Always follow the
to maintain the rocking motion.
manufacturer’s instructions for the recovery de-
WARNING vice. ● Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R and D.
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or
sonal injury or death when recovering a vehicle recovery. ● Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH
stuck vehicle: (55 km/h).
Rocking a stuck vehicle
● Contact a professional towing service 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
to recover the vehicle if you have any WARNING tries, contact a professional towing service
questions regarding the recovery to remove the vehicle.
procedure. ● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
● Attach recovery devices only to main ● Do not spin your tires at high speed. This
structural members of the vehicle or the could cause them to explode and result
recovery hooks. in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle
could also overheat and be damaged.

MEMO

7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Moonroof (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Cleaning the seat tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Most common factors contributing to vehicle
Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Environmental factors influence the rate of
Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve- the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
CAUTION
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it. must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
● Do not use car washes that use acid in drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your the detergent. Some car washes, espe- open. Spray water under the body and in the
vehicle as soon as you can: cially brushless ones, use some acid for wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
● after a rainfall to prevent possible damage cleaning. The acid may react with some road salt.
from acid rain. plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
● after driving on coastal roads. appearance, and also could cause them avoid water spots.
not to function properly. Always check WAXING
● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
with your car wash to confirm that acid
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get is not used. Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
on the paint surface. helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
● Do not wash the vehicle with strong recommended to remove built-up wax residue
● when dust or mud builds up on the surface. household soap, strong chemical deter- and to avoid a weathered appearance before
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle gents, gasoline or solvents. re-applying wax.
inside a garage or in a covered area. ● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as proper product.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
the surface may become water-spotted.
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body ● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
cover. ● Avoid using tight-napped or rough
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface wax.
must be taken when removing
when putting on or removing the body caked-on dirt or other foreign sub- ● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cover. stances so the paint surface is not cutting compounds or cleaners that may
scratched or damaged. damage the vehicle finish.
WASHING
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
finish or leave swirl marks.
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
(never hot) water.
7-2 Appearance and care
REMOVING SPOTS CAUTION CHROME PARTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, When cleaning the inside of the windows, Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
staining. Special cleaning products are available cleaners. They could damage the electri-
TIRE DRESSINGS
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory cal conductors, radio antenna elements or NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
store. rear window defroster elements. dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
UNDERBODY ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp- react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
stain the vehicle paint.
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un- not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels. If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe- following precautions:
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must CAUTION ● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
be checked and, if necessary, retreated. Follow the directions below to avoid ing on the tire dissolves more easily than
GLASS staining or discoloring the wheels: with an oil-based tire dressing.
● Do not use a cleaner that uses strong ● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
acid or alkali contents to clean the prevent it from entering the tire
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
wheels.
become coated with a film after the vehicle is remove).
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft ● Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
cloth will easily remove this film. wheels when they are hot. The wheel ● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
temperature should be the same as am- towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
bient temperature. pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
● Rinse the wheel to completely remove ● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
cleaner is applied.
Appearance and care 7-3

CLEANING INTERIOR
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior ● Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
CAUTION
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum the vents. These products can cause imme-
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and ● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi- diate damage and discoloration when
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp- lar material. spilled on interior surfaces.
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a ● Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
dry, soft cloth. Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-
damaging to leather surfaces and structions before using the air fresheners.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to should be removed promptly. Do not
maintain the appearance of the leather. use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, MOONROOF (if so equipped)
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu- gents or ammonia-based cleaners as The moonroof is made from a suede material.
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro- they may damage the leather’s natural
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or Clean the moonroof material as follows:
finish.
bleach the seat material.
● Never use fabric protectors unless rec- CAUTION
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean ommended by the manufacturer.
the meter and gauge lens. To help prevent damaging the moonroof
● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on while cleaning:
WARNING meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam- ● Do not rub the material with a cloth.
age the lens cover. Doing so can damage the surface of the
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
material or cause a stain to spread.
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can AIR FRESHENERS
damage the seat or occupant classifica- ● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera- Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect lar chemical to clean the suede. This
tion of the air bag system and result in the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, may discolor the moonroof and damage
serious personal injury. take the following precautions: the surface.
● Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per- ● Clean water based stains by patting the
manent discoloration when they contact ve- surface with a clean soft cloth damp-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh- ened in warm water. Press a clean dry
ener in a location that allows it to hang free cloth onto the surface to remove as
and not contact an interior surface. much dampness as possible and then
let air dry.

● Clean oil based stains by patting the
surface with a clean soft cloth damp-
ened in warm water. Press a clean dry
cloth onto the surface to remove as
much dampness as possible and then
let air dry.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision or injury:
● NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
other floor mat in the driver front LAI2002 LAI2003
position. Bracket Bracket positions
● Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats Floor mat positioning aid
specifically designed for use in your ve-
This vehicle includes the following floor mat po-
hicle model. See your NISSAN dealer
sitioning aids to help keep your floor mats in
for more information.
place:
● Properly position the mats in the floor-
well using the floor mat positioning aid. ● two driver’s side front floor mat brackets
See ⴖFloor mat positioning aidⴖ in this ● two passenger’s side front floor mat bracket
section.
● one driver’s side 2nd row floor mat bracket
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
● one passenger’s side 2nd row floor mat
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
bracket
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-
tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.

CORROSION PROTECTION
Genuine NISSAN floor mats have been specially CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS MOST COMMON FACTORS
designed for your vehicle model. The floor mats CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
have grommet holes incorporated in them. Posi- CAUTION
tion each mat by placing the floor mat bracket CORROSION
hook through the floor mat grommet holes while Periodically clean the seat tracks to pre-
● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
centering the mat in the floorwell. vent reduction of ability to move the seats.
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
Periodically check to make certain the mats are Clean periodically with a high-powered vacuum and other areas.
properly positioned. cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to
adjust the seat. A wet cleansing agent may be ● Damage to paint and other protective coat-
SEAT BELTS used if necessary. ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen- CORROSION
tal restraint system” section of this manual. Moisture
WARNING Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
since these materials may severely avoid floor panel corrosion.
weaken the seat belt webbing. Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.

Temperature CAUTION
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro- ● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated. bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
Air pollution dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air ● Never allow water or other liquids to
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler- come in contact with electronic compo-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel- nents inside the vehicle as this may
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces. damage them.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
FROM CORROSION extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the and deterioration of underbody components
vehicle clean. such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
● Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation. For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
● Check the underbody for accumulation of sult a NISSAN dealer.
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.

MEMO

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . 8-11 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Variable voltage control system (if so equipped) . . . . . . 8-16 Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini- Performing general maintenance checks requires During the normal day-to-day operation of the
mum maintenance requirements with long ser- minimal mechanical skill and only a few general vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
vice intervals to save you both time and money. automotive tools. formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte- These checks or inspections can be done by you, you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis- dealer. NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
sions and engine performance. should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
Where to go for service repairs are required.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general If maintenance service is required or your vehicle When performing any checks or maintenance
maintenance, is performed. appears to malfunction, have the systems work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
tions” later in this section.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte- information through technical bulletins, service MAINTENANCE ITEMS
nance chain. tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve- Additional information on the following
Scheduled maintenance items with “ * ” is found later in this section.
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
For your convenience, both required and optional than after they have worked on it.
scheduled maintenance items are described and
Outside the vehicle
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
The maintenance items listed here should be
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure service department performs the best job to meet
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
that necessary maintenance is performed on your specified.
in a reliable and economical way.
NISSAN at regular intervals.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
General maintenance and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
General maintenance includes those items which that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
should be checked during normal day-to-day op- latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op- Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these hood from opening when the primary latch is
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed. released.
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
When driving in areas using road salt or other alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently. normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
needed. ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail ● For additional information regarding tires,
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
away from the pedal.
operating properly and installed securely. Also (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
check headlight aim. the Warranty Information Booklet. Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, basis. Check the windshield at least every six Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam- P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly
necessary. aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair steep hill check that your vehicle is held securely
facility. with the shift selector in the P (Park) position
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
without applying any brakes.
7,500 miles (12,000 km). Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly. Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces- Inside the vehicle on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
The maintenance items listed here should be applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully see a NISSAN dealer.
for damage, cuts or excessive wear. checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve- Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) hicle, etc. adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they
transmitter components Replace the TPMS operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap Additional information on the following
every position. Check that the head restraints and
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age. items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
headrests move up and down smoothly and the
tion. locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth positions.
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or operation and make sure the pedal does not bind Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
from the pedal. and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
and are installed securely. Check the belt web- NOTE: Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been
Care should be taken to avoid situations that parked for a while. Water dripping from the air
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer- can lead to potential battery discharge and conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard potential no-start conditions such as: 1. In- any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for
steering or strange noises. stallation or extended use of electronic ac- the cause and have it corrected immediately.
cessories that consume battery power when
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all the engine is not running (Phone chargers, Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
warning lights and chimes are operating properly. GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle is not the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that driven regularly and/or only driven short dis- off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
tances. In these cases, the battery may need cracks, etc.
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak. to be charged to maintain battery health. Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
Brake fluid level* Make sure that the brake fluid radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
Windshield defroster Check that the air level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in reservoir. hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or connections.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
air conditioner.
when the engine is cold. Underbody The underbody is frequently exposed
Under the hood and vehicle Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts to corrosive substances such as those used on icy
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. roads or to control dust. It is very important to
The maintenance items listed here should be remove these substances from the underbody, oth-
checked periodically (for example, each time you Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. erwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel
check the engine oil or refuel). lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It back into the oil pan. underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve- water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose accumulated. See the “Appearance and care” sec-
hicles operated in high temperatures or under
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the tion of this manual.
severe conditions require frequent checks of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
battery fluid level. exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust Windshield-washer fluid* Check that there is
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See the adequate fluid in the reservoir.
carbon monoxide warning in the “Starting and
driving” section of this manual.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance ● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- CAUTION
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent matic engine cooling fan. It may come
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to ● Do not work under the hood while the
on at any time without warning, even if
the vehicle. The following are general precau- engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
the ignition switch is in the OFF posi-
tions which should be closely observed. wait until it cools down.
tion and the engine is not running. To
avoid injury, always disconnect the ● Avoid contact with used engine oil and
WARNING negative battery cable before working coolant. Improperly disposed engine
● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- near the fan. oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ply the parking brake securely and ● If you must run the engine in an en-
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle ways conform to local regulations for
closed space such as a garage, be sure
from moving. Move the shift selector to disposal of vehicle fluid.
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
P (Park). gases to escape. ● Never leave the engine or continuously
● Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF variable transmission related compo-
● Never get under the vehicle while it is
or LOCK position when performing any nent harnesses disconnected while the
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
parts replacement or repairs. ignition switch is in the ON position.
sary to work under the vehicle, support
● If you must work with the engine run- it with safety stands. ● Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair ● Keep smoking materials, flame and
and tools away from moving fans, belts the ignition switch is in the ON position.
sparks away from the fuel tank and
and any other moving parts. battery. This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
● It is advisable to secure or remove any ● The fuel filter or fuel lines should be gives instructions regarding only those items
loose clothing and remove any jewelry, serviced by a NISSAN dealer because which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
such as rings, watches, etc. before the fuel lines are under high pressure You should be aware that incomplete or improper
working on your vehicle. even when the engine is off. servicing may result in operating difficulties or
● Always wear eye protection whenever excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
you work on your vehicle. coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
12. Radiator cap

13. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
NOTE:
Engine cover removed for clarity.
LDI2148
VQ35DE engine 6. Brake fluid reservoir
1. Power steering fluid reservoir 7. Air cleaner
2. Engine coolant reservoir 8. Fuse box
3. Drive belt location 9. Fuse box/Fusible links
4. Fuse box 10. Battery
5. Engine oil filler cap 11. Engine oil dipstick
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory ● The life expectancy of the factory-fill
CAUTION
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and ● Never use any cooling system additives
7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-
50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and such as radiator sealer. Additives may
ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con- clog the cooling system and cause
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en- damage to the engine, transmission
ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life
gine cooling system additives are not necessary. and/or cooling system.
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
● When adding or replacing coolant, be of non-distilled water will reduce the
WARNING sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
● Never remove the radiator or coolant Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or ant. Refer to the Nissan Service and
reservoir cap when the engine is hot. equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Maintenance Guide for more details.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
down. Serious burns could be caused to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
by high pressure fluid escaping from F (-37° C). If additional freeze protec-
the radiator. See precautions in “If your tion is needed due to weather where
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case you operate your vehicle, add Genuine
of emergency” section of this manual. NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the direc-
● The radiator is equipped with a pres- tions on the container. If an equivalent
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
gine damage, use only a genuine Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is
NISSAN radiator cap. used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling
system.

coolant or the use of non-distilled water will re- ● Avoid direct skin contact with used
duce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
Refer to the NISSAN Service and Maintenance thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
Guide for more details. as soon as possible.
The engine coolant reservoir is a pressur- ● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
ized tank. When installing the cap, tighten dren and pets.
it until a clicking sound is heard.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
If the cooling system frequently requires Check your local regulations.
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
LDI2086 The service procedure can be found in the
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT NISSAN Service Manual.
LEVEL Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when ing.
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If the WARNING
reservoir is empty, check the coolant level in the
radiator when the engine is cold. If there is ● To avoid the danger of being scalded,
insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator never change the coolant when the en-
with coolant up to the filler opening and also add gine is hot.
it to the reservoir up to the MAX level. ● Never remove the radiator or engine
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life coolant reservoir cap when the engine
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of is hot. Serious burns could be caused
the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles by high pressure fluid escaping from
(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of the radiator.

ENGINE OIL
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
LDI2087 WDI0214
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply L (Low) marks 䊊 B . This is the normal oper-
the parking brake.
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches the L (Low) mark 䊊 A , remove the oil filler cap
operating temperature. and pour recommended oil through the
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than opening. Do not overfill 䊊 C.
10 minutes for the oil to drain back into 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
the oil pan.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re- maintenance intervals or during the
insert it all the way. break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and 7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
oil filter” in this section. cap securely.
● Waste oil must be disposed of prop- See “Capacities and recommended
erly. fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual for
● Check your local regulations. drain and refill capacity.
WARNING The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these
● Prolonged and repeated contact with specifications for reference only. Always use
used engine oil may cause skin cancer. the dipstick to determine when the proper
● Try to avoid direct skin contact with amount of oil is in the engine.
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
LDI2145 thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
CHANGING ENGINE OIL as soon as possible. quired.
● Keep used engine oil out of reach of 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
children. 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the
the parking brake.
dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches CAUTION
operating temperature, then turn it off.
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊
A by turning it oil may be hot.
counterclockwise.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
䊊B. a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊 B with a wrench by Drain plug tightening torque:
turning it counterclockwise and completely 22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
drain the oil.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

CAUTION
a clean rag.
● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
CAUTION NS-3. Do not mix with other fluids.
● Be sure to remove any old gasket ● Using transmission fluid other than
material remaining on the sealing Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will
surface of the engine. Failure to do damage the CVT, which is not covered
so could lead to an oil leak and en- by the warranty.
gine damage.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
● The dipstick must be inserted in required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for
place to prevent oil spillage from the servicing.
dipstick hole when filling the engine
with oil.
LDI2143
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER engine oil.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply 7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
the parking brake. is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
2. Turn the engine off. 8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊
A.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
4. Loosen the oil filter 䊊 A with an oil filter 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then oil if necessary.
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID
CAUTION WARNING
● Do not overfill. ● Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
● Use of a power steering fluid other than
fluid may damage the brake system.
Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will prevent the
The use of improper fluids can damage
power steering system from operating
the brake system and affect the vehi-
properly.
cle’s stopping ability.
● Power steering fluid is poisonous and
● Clean the filler cap before removing.
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of the reach of children. ● Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers
out of reach of children.
LDI2146 CAUTION
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
The fluid level should be checked when the fluid spilled, immediately wash the surface
is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86ºF (0 to with water.
30ºC). The fluid level can be checked with the
level gauge which is attached to the cap. To
check the fluid level, remove the cap. The fluid
level should be between the MAX 䊊 1 and MIN 䊊 2
lines.
If the fluid is below the MIN 䊊
2 line, add Genuine
NISSAN E-PSF. Remove the cap and fill through
the opening.

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
● Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the paint.
● Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
LDI2147 LDI2192
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID cohol based washer fluid concentrates
fluid is below the MIN line 䊊 B , the brake warning may permanently stain the grille if
light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX
RESERVOIR
spilled while filling the windshield-
line䊊A. (See “RECOMMENDED Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi- washer fluid reservoir.
FUEL/LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES” in the “ cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
Technical and consumer information” section for ● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on. water to the manufacturer’s recom-
the recommended type of brake fluid.)
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift mended levels before pouring the fluid
If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield- into the windshield-washer fluid reser-
brake system should be thoroughly checked by a washer fluid into the reservoir opening. voir. Do not use the windshield-washer
NISSAN dealer. fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better concentrate and water.
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.

BATTERY
● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. ● Keep battery out of the reach of
WARNING
Clean the battery with a solution of baking children.
soda and water. ● Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro- ● Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
● Make certain the terminal connections are gen gas generated by the battery is ex- caps tight and the battery level.
clean and securely tightened. plosive. Explosive gases can cause
● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or blindness or injury. Do not allow battery
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics
terminal cable to prevent discharge. or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touch-
NOTE: ing a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
Care should be taken to avoid situations wash your hands. If the acid contacts
that can lead to potential battery discharge your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
and potential no-start conditions such as: flush with water for at least 15 minutes
1. Installation or extended use of electronic and seek medical attention.
accessories that consume battery power
when the engine is not running (Phone ● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.) 2. Vehicle the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
is not driven regularly and/or only driven cause a higher load on the battery
short distances. In these cases, the battery which can generate heat, reduce bat-
may need to be charged to maintain battery tery life, and in some cases lead to an
health. explosion.
● When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
WDI0224
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.
LDI0302
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall
the vent caps.

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL DRIVE BELT
The current sensor is located near the battery

along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-
trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to
ground them to a suitable body ground such as
the frame or engine block area.
LDI2132 LDI2099
CAUTION 1. Drive belt automatic tensioner

2. Generator
● Do not ground accessories directly to 3. A/C compressor
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
4 Crankshaft pulley
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not WARNING
charge completely.
Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or
● Use electrical accessories with the en- LOCK position before servicing drive belt.
gine running to avoid discharging the The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
vehicle battery.
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
control system. This system measures the in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
amount of electrical discharge from the battery or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
and controls voltage generated by the generator.

SPARK PLUGS
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-

WARNING
tion and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in your Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”. off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer for assistance.
SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regap-
ping.
● Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.

AIR CLEANER
NOTE: If replacement is required, see your NISSAN

dealer.
After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the clips.
WARNING
● Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
LDI2090 removed, and be careful when working
NOTE: on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned
and reused. ● Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
Replace the air cleaner filter according to the cleaner removed. Doing so could result
maintenance log shown in the “Warranty Informa- in serious injury.
tion and Maintenance Booklet.”
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
To remove the air cleaner filter:
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
䊊
1 Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
cover upward. some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
Remove the air cleaner filter and wipe the inside located behind the glove box. Refer to the
of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with “NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
a damp cloth. change intervals.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING 6. Return the wiper to its original position and

release it until it has made contact with the
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield.
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on CAUTION
the blade or windshield.
● After wiper blade replacement, return
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer the wiper arm to its original position;
solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is otherwise it may be damaged when the
clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear hood is opened.
water.
● Make sure the wiper blades contact the
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then aged from wind pressure.
rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-
shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades WDI0594
and using the wiper, replace the blades.
REPLACING
CAUTION Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
age the windshield and impair driver
vision. 䊊
2 Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
䊊
3 Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
5. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.

BRAKES
Rear window wiper blade If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Contact a NISSAN dealer if checking or replace-
ment is required. Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
WDI0570 checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not sound is heard.
to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
䊊A . This may cause clogging or improper wind-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
shield washer operation. If wax gets into the
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin 䊊
B.
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
FUSES
Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
LDI0455 LDI0457
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊
A is used in If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
䊊B is used in the passenger compartment fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
box. affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-
box. hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the
underhood fuse boxes.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
partment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.

LDI2149 WDI0452
ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the 5. If the fuse is open 䊊
A , replace it with a new
tab and lifting the cover up. fuse 䊊 B.
CAUTION 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
amperage rating than specified on the block in the passenger compartment. dealer.
fuse box cover. This could damage the Fusible links
electrical system or cause a fire.
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
If any electrical equipment does not come on, fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
check for an open fuse. links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.

3. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
LDI2092 WDI0452
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Type A

5. If the fuse is open 䊊A , replace it with an
CAUTION equivalent good fuse 䊊B.
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower 6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
amperage rating than specified on the 7. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
fuse box cover. This could damage the system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
electrical system or cause a fire. dealer.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the glove box to access the fuse box
cover.
How to replace the extended storage switch:
1. To remove the extended storage switch, be
sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊 1 found on each
side of the storage switch.
5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the
fuse box 䊊 2 .
LDI0456 LDI2035
Type B Extended storage switch
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage switch and check
for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-
tended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.

BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Be careful not to allow children to swallow Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-
the battery or removed parts. lows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
2. Insert a small screwdriver 䊊
A into the slit 䊊B
of the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-
lent.
● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
● Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case.
SDI1867

LIGHTS
or modifications not expressly approved by HEADLIGHTS

the party responsible for compliance could Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. If bulb replacement is required, see your NISSAN
For Canada: dealer.
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the CAUTION
following two conditions: (1) this device ● Aiming is not necessary after replacing
may not cause interference, and (2) this the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
device must accept any interference, in- necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device. ● Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
WDI0535 etc. entering the headlight body may
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated 䊊
C 䊊
D. affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation. before a replacement bulb is installed.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for ● Only touch the base when handling the
replacement. bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
FCC Notice: affect bulb life and/or headlight
For USA: performance.
This device complies with Part 15 of the ● High pressure halogen gas is sealed
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
lowing two conditions: (1) This device may break if the glass envelope is scratched
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this or the bulb is dropped.
device must accept any interference re- ● Use the same number and wattage as
ceived, including interference that may shown in the chart.
cause undesired operation. Note: Changes
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not Headlight assembly*
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect High 60 HB3
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer. Low 55 H11
Park 5 W5W
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) Turn 21 WY21W
Sidemarker 5 WY5W
Replacing the fog light bulb Front fog lights (if so equipped) 55 H11
Daytime running lights (Canada only) 19 PS19W
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
Map light* — —
dealer. Footwell light 3.4 158
Personal lights 8 P1Y
CAUTION Glove box light* 8 158
● High pressure halogen gas is sealed Step light 3.4 194
Courtesy light* — —
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
Vanity mirror light 2 —
break if the glass envelope is scratched
Cargo light — AL1X
or the bulb is dropped. High-mounted stop light* — —
● When handling the bulb, do not touch Rear combination light
the glass envelope. Tail/Stop* 5/21 7443
Turn 21 WY21W
● Use the same number and wattage as Rear sidemarker 5 W5W
originally installed as shown in the Backup (reversing)* 12 W16W
chart. License plate light* 5 W5W
● Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light * See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
for a long period of time as dust, mois-
ture and smoke may enter the fog light Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
body and affect the performance of the
fog light.

1. Headlight assembly
2 Map light
3 Personal light
4. Fog light (if so equipped)/ Daytime
running light (Canada only)
(if so equipped)
5. Cargo light
6. Courtesy light
7. Rear combination light
8. License plate light
WDI0263
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp
and/or cover.
LDI2160

Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
WDI0670 LDI2096
Personal lights Vanity mirror
Use a cloth 䊊
1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth 䊊
1 to protect the housing.

WHEELS AND TIRES
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-
“In case of emergency” section of this sure warning light” in the “Instruments and
manual. controls” section and “Flat tire” in the “In
TIRE PRESSURE case of emergency” section.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Tire inflation pressure
(TPMS) Check the tire pressures (including the
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire spare) often and always prior to long dis-
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
the spare. When the low tire pressure
or the Tire and Loading Information label
warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
WDI0206
PRESSURE warning appears in the ve- The Tire and Loading Information label is
Cargo light
hicle information display, one or more of
Use a cloth 䊊
1 to protect the housing. affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
your tires is significantly under-inflated. If pressures should be checked regularly
equipped, the system also displays pres- because:
sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on
the display screen by sending a signal ● Most tires naturally lose air over time.
from a sensor that is installed in each ● Tires can lose air suddenly when
wheel. driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
The TPMS will activate only when the
parking.
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
The tire pressures should be checked WARNING ● For additional information re-
when the tires are cold. The tires are garding tires, refer to “Important
considered COLD after the vehicle has ● Improperly inflated tires can fail Tire Safety Information” (US) or
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven suddenly and cause an accident. “Tire Safety Information”
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate ● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
speeds. (GVWR) is located on the mation Booklet.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro- tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
vides visual and audible signals outside pacity is indicated on the Tire and
the vehicle for inflating the tires to the Loading Information label. Do
recommended COLD tire pressure. For not load your vehicle beyond this
more information, see “TPMS with Easy capacity. Overloading your ve-
Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting and driving” hicle may result in reduced tire
section. life, unsafe operating conditions
due to premature tire failure, or
Incorrect tire pressure, including un- unfavorable handling character-
der inflation, may adversely affect istics and could also lead to a
tire life and vehicle handling. serious accident. Loading be-
yond the specified capacity may
also result in failure of other ve-
hicle components.
● Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.

䊊
5 Spare tire size.
䊊
6 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-
mation in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section.
LDI2083
Tire and loading information label 䊊

3 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
䊊
1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-
Tires are considered COLD after the
ber of occupants that can be seated
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
in the vehicle.
hours, or driven less than 1 mile
䊊
2 Original tire size: The size of the tires (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The
originally installed on the vehicle at recommended cold tire inflation is set
the factory. by the manufacturer to provide the
best balance of tire wear, vehicle
handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,
up to the vehicle’s GVWR.
䊊
4 Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
LDI0393 7. Check the pressure of all other tires, WDI0394
including the spare. Example

Checking tire pressure
TIRE LABELING
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the Size Cold Tire Inflation
tire. Pressure Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely Front and Rear sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
onto the valve stem. Do not press too Original Tire: 35 PSI, 240 kPa tifies and describes the fundamental
hard or force the valve stem side- 235/55R20 characteristics of the tire and also pro-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing Front and Rear vides the tire identification number (TIN)
sound of air escaping from the tire is Original Tire: 33 PSI, 230 kPa for safety standard certification. The TIN
heard while checking the pressure, 235/65R18 can be used to identify the tire in case of a
reposition the gauge to eliminate this Spare Tire: recall.
leakage. 60 PSI, 420 kPa
T165/90D18
3. Remove the gauge.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
WDI0395
Example
䊊
1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- 5. Two-digit number (15): This number
signed for passenger vehicles (not all is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
tires have this information). 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
2. Three-digit number (215): This num- number is the tire’s load index. It is a
ber gives the width in millimeters of measurement of how much weight
the tire from sidewall edge to side- each tire can support. You may not
wall edge. find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
䊊
3 Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
䊊4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-
sure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
WDI0396 flation pressure.
Example
䊊
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code 䊊
5 Maximum load rating
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX (Optional). This number indicates the maximum load
XXXX) 5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac- in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ture. ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart- on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol 6. Four numbers represent the week the same load rating as the factory in-
can be placed above, below or to the and year the tire was built. For ex- stalled tire.
left or right of the Tire Identification ample, the numbers 3103 means the
Number. 31st week of 2003. If these numbers 䊊
6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s are missing, then look on the other Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
identification mark. sidewall of the tire. ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

䊊
7 The word “radial” TYPES OF TIRES ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has WARNING on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
radial structure. traction than All Season tires and may be more
● When changing or replacing tires, be
䊊
appropriate in some areas.
8 Manufacturer or brand name sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and Summer tires
Manufacturer or brand name is shown. construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
Other Tire-related Terminology
tire type, size, speed rating and to provide superior performance on dry roads.
In addition to the many terms that are availability. Summer tire performance is substantially re-
defined throughout this section, Intended duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
● Replacement tires may have a lower
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that speed rating than the factory equipped
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering tires, and may not match the potential If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
the maximum speed rating of the tire. SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the ● Replacing tires with those not originally wheels.
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out- proper operation of the low tire pres-
Snow tires
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical sure warning system. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tire that has a particular side that must ● For additional information regarding tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
always face outward when mounted on a tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In- original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
vehicle. formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa- adversely affect the safety and handling of your
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa- vehicle.
tion Booklet.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
All season tires than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod- ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
els to provide good performance all year, includ-

If you install snow tires, they must be the same signed to meet the minimum clearances between
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or
four wheels. body component required to accommodate the
use of a winter traction device (tire chains or
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
cables). The minimum clearances are determined
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
using the factory equipped tire size. Other types
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners
local, state and provincial laws before installing
when recommended by the tire chain manufac-
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
the possibility of whipping action damage to the
TIRE CHAINS fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-
ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-
CAUTION tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your
vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling WDI0258
Tire chains/cables should not be installed and performance may be adversely affected.
on 235/55R20 size tires. Installation of the CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
tire chains/cables on 235/55R20 size tires Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
will cause damage to the vehicle. If you chains in such conditions can cause damage to Tire rotation
plan to use tire chains/cables, you should the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress. NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
install 235/65R18 size tires on your
vehicle. every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
location. Check the local laws before installing gency” section of this manual for tire re-
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure placing procedures.
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain As soon as possible, tighten the
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE wheel nuts to the specified torque
class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on with a torque wrench.
vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.
Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-
Wheel nut tightening torque: ● The original tires have built-in
83 ft-lb (113 N·m) tread wear indicators. When the
The wheel nuts must be kept tight- wear indicators are visible, the
ened to specifications at all times. It tire(s) should be replaced.
is recommended that wheel nuts be ● Tires degrade with age and use.
tightened to specification at each Have tires, including the spare,
tire rotation interval. over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
WARNING some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
● After rotating the tires, check and sary to prevent tire failure and
adjust the tire pressure. possible personal injury.
● Retighten the wheel nuts when WDI0259 ● Improper service of the spare tire
the vehicle has been driven for 1. Wear indicator may result in serious personal in-
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in 2. Location mark jury. If it is necessary to repair the
cases of a flat tire, etc.). spare tire, contact a NISSAN
Tire wear and damage dealer.
● Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation. WARNING ● For additional information re-
● For additional information regarding tires, refer to “Important
● Tires should be periodically in- Tire Safety Information” (US) or
garding tires, refer to “Important spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”
ing or objects caught in the tread. (Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
“Tire Safety Information” If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet.
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
mation Booklet. should be replaced.

Replacing wheels and tires ● If the wheels are changed for any rea- ● Do not install a damaged or deformed
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread son, always replace with wheels which wheel or tire even if it has been re-
have the same off-set dimension. paired. Such wheels or tires could have
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
Wheels of a different off-set could structural damage and could fail with-
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve- out warning.
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the hicle handling characteristics, affect
“Technical and consumer information” section of ● The use of retread tires is not
the VDC system and/or interference
this manual. recommended.
with the brake discs/drums. Such inter-
ference can lead to decreased braking ● For additional information regarding
WARNING efficiency and/or early brake pad/shoe tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
● The use of tires other than those recom- wear. Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
mended or the mixed use of tires of “Technical and consumer information” tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
different brands, construction (bias, section of this manual for wheel off-set tion Booklet.
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns dimensions.
can adversely affect the ride, braking, Four-wheel drive models
● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
handling, VDC system, ground clear- is replaced, tire pressure will not be
ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain indicated, the TPMS will not function
CAUTION
clearance, speedometer calibration, and the low tire pressure warning light Always use tires of the same type, size,
headlight aim and bumper height. will flash for approximately 1 minute. brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or
Some of these effects may lead to acci- The light will remain on after 1 minute. radial), and tread pattern on all four
dents and could result in serious per- Contact your NISSAN retailer as soon wheels. Failure to do so may result in a
sonal injury. as possible for tire replacement and/or circumference difference between tires
● If your vehicle was originally equipped system resetting. on the front and rear axles which will
with 4 tires that were the same size and cause excessive tire wear and may dam-
● Replacing tires with those not originally
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires, age the transmission, transfer case and
install the new tires on the rear axle. differential gears.
proper operation of the TPMS.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an acci-
dent and personal injury.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended Care of wheels
that all four tires be replaced with tires of the
same size, brand, construction and tread pattern. ● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
The tire pressure and wheel alignment should to maintain their appearance.
also be checked and corrected as necessary. ● Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
wheel is changed or the underside of the
Wheel balance vehicle is washed.
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling ● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get the wheels.
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
anced as required.
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
Wheel balance service should be per- pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle ● NISSAN recommends waxing the road
could lead to mechanical damage. wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
● For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.

9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
When traveling or registering your vehicle in Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Vehicle identification number Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-31
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-32
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure Imp measure Liter
Fuel 19-1/2 gal 16-1/4 gal 74 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.
Engine oil *7
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8 • Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1, *2
Without oil filter 4-3/4 qt 4 qt 4.5 • Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1, *2
change
Cooling system
With reservoir 2-1/2 gal 2-1/8 gal 9.8 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 *3
Power steering fluid (PSF) — — — Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.*4
Differential gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super Semi-Synthetic API GL-5,
Viscosity SAE 75W-90 *8
Transfer fluid — — — API GL-5, Viscosity SAE 80W-90 or equivalent
Brake fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *5 or equivalent DOT 3
Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *6
Air conditioning system oil — — — Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *6
Windshield-washer fluid 1 gal 7/8 gal 3.8 Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze
fluid or equivalent
*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.
*2: NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester Oil available at a NISSAN dealer.
*3: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*4: Use of power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly.
*5: Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
*7: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
*8: The use of differential gear oil other than the specified may cause vehicle malfunctions and result in non-warranty vehicle repairs.
9-2 Technical and consumer information

FUEL RECOMMENDATION ● U.S. government regulations require patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi- termined. If in doubt, ask your service station
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane manager.
fied by a small, square, orange and
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
black label with the common abbrevia- If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
ber (Research octane number 91).
tion or the appropriate percentage for the following precautions as the usage of such
that region. fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
CAUTION
Gasoline specifications and/or fuel system damage.
● Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door
label can operate on E-85. Fuel system ● The fuel should be unleaded and have
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
or other damage can occur if E-85 is the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi- an octane rating no lower than that
used in vehicles that are not designed cations where it is available. Many of the automo- recommended for unleaded gasoline.
to run on E-85. bile manufacturers developed this specification ● If an oxygenate-blend other than
● Using a fuel other than that specified to improve emission control system and vehicle methanol blend is used, it should con-
could adversely affect the emission performance. Ask your service station manager if tain no more than 10% oxygenate.
control system, and may also affect the the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications. (MTBE may, however, be added up to
warranty coverage. 15%.)
Reformulated gasoline
● Under no circumstances should a
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu- ● E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-
leaded gasoline be used, because this
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect
will damage the three-way catalyst.
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN the emission control devices and sys-
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug- tems of the vehicle and should not be
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to gests that you use reformulated gasoline when used. Damage caused by such fuel is
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or available. not covered by the NISSAN new ve-
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically hicle limited warranty.
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad- Gasoline containing oxygenates
versely affect the emission control de-
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
age caused by such fuel is not covered
with or without advertising their presence.
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
warranty.
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-
Technical and consumer information 9-3
● If a methanol blend is used, it should orange and black label with the common abbre- detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
contain no more than 5% methanol viation or the appropriate percentage for that when using gasoline of the stated octane
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It region. rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
should also contain a suitable amount while holding a steady speed on level
of appropriate cosolvents and corro- E–85 fuel roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu- condition. Failure to correct the condition
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
lated with appropriate cosolvents and is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol is not responsible.
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
blends may cause fuel system damage Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
and/or vehicle performance problems. knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
At this time, sufficient data is not avail- regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
able to ensure that all methanol blends damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve- and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region. countered, have your vehicle checked at a
hicles. NISSAN dealer.
If any driveability problems such as engine stall- Aftermarket fuel additives However, now and then you may notice
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after light spark knock for a short time while
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a cause for concern, because you get the
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
low blend of MTBE. greatest fuel benefit when there is light
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu- Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish spark knock for a short time under heavy
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can or deposit removal may contain active solvents or engine load.
cause paint damage. similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
E–15 fuel
Octane rating tips
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel
ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 rating lower than recommended can cause
fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov- persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens- knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
ing pumps to be identified with small, square, vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
LTI2024 equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
RECOMMENDATIONS cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica- Change intervals
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
Selecting the correct oil do not have the specified quality label should not
engine are based on the use of the specified
be used as they could cause engine damage.
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory Oil additives that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
engine life and performance. See “Capacities recommended oil and filter change intervals
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces- caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
sary when the proper oil type is used and main- rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
tenance intervals are followed. covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
economy.
ranty.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
Select only engine oils that meet the American
previously used should not be used.
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
CAUTION
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend cause severe damage to the air condition-
upon how you use your vehicle. ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system
Operation under the following conditions may components.
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
● repeated short distance driving at cold out- NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
side temperatures layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
● driving in dusty conditions
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
● extensive idling refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
● towing a trailer technicians and equipment needed to recover
● stop and go commuting and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule. Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.

SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model VQ35DE
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.780 x 3.189 (96 x 81)
Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)
Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6
Idle speed
CVT (in “N” position)
No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug FXE22HR-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Wheel type Offset in (mm) Size Overall length in (mm) 197.2 (5,008.4)
Overall width in (mm) 77.2 (1,960)
Aluminum 1.97 (50) 18 x 7.5J Overall height
without roof rack in (mm) 69.6 (1,67.5)
1.97 (50) 20 x 7.5J with roof rack in (mm) 75.4 (1,914.2)
Spare Wheel - Steel 18 x4T Front and Rear Track in (mm) 65.7 (1,670)
Wheelbase in (mm) 1 14.2 (2,900)
Tire size 235/65R18
Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.
235/55R20 Gross axle weight rating S.S. certification label” on the
Front lb (kg) center pillar between the
Spare tire T165/90D18 driver’s side front and rear
Rear lb (kg) doors.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
TI1050M LTI2028
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
to the country, state, province or district; there- (VIN) PLATE (chassis number)
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is The vehicle identification number is located as
When any vehicle is to be taken into an- located as shown. This number is the identifica- shown.
other country, state, province or district tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
and registered, its modifications, transpor- registration.
tation, and registration are the responsibil-
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible The vehicle identification number (VIN) number is
for any inconvenience that may result. also available through the center display screen.
See your “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”
for further information.

LTI2034 WTI0058 WTI0167
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. EMISSION CONTROL
The number is stamped on the engine as shown. CERTIFICATION LABEL INFORMATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety The emission control information label is at-
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la- tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.

LTI0084 WTI0173
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
Loading Information label. The label is located as the underside of the hood as shown.
shown.

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
Use the following steps to mount the front license

plate:
Before mounting the license plate, confirm that
the following parts are enclosed in the plastic
bag:
● License plate bracket
● License plate bracket (J-nut) screws x 2
● License plate screws x 2
● Screw grommets x 2
1. Park the vehicle on flat, level ground.
2. Locate the center position 䊊A as illustrated.
Line up the license plate bracket under the
top of the front bumper 䊊
B with the tabs 䊊 C.
Hold the license plate bracket in place.
3. Mark the center of the hole 䊊
D with a felt-tip
pen.
4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using a 0.39 in
(10 mm) drill bit at the marked locations. (Be
sure that the drill only goes through the
bumper fascia.)
5. Insert the grommets into the holes in the
bumper fascia.
6. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into
the grommet hole to turn the threaded part of
LTI2039 the grommet 90° 䊊 E .

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING ● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of
● It is extremely dangerous to ride passengers and cargo.
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these ● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
areas are more likely to be seri- ing) - maximum total combined
ously injured or killed. weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
● Do not allow people to ride in any sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
area of your vehicle that is not tongue load and any other optional
equipped with seats and seat equipment. This information is lo-
belts. cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
● Be sure everyone in your vehicle certification label.
is in a seat and using a seat belt
LTI2033
properly. ● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
Mark the center of the hole 䊊
F on both sides with maximum weight (load) limit specified
a felt-tip pen. Remove the bracket from the bum- TERMS for the front or rear axle. This informa-
per, and then open 0.79 in (20 mm) diameter
holes on the bumper using the marks 䊊 F as a It is important to familiarize yourself with tion is located on the
center. the following terms before loading your F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
7. Insert a J-nut into the license plate bracket vehicle: label.
before placing the license plate bracket on
● Curb Weight (actual weight of your ● GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
the fascia.
vehicle) - vehicle weight including: rating) - The maximum total weight
8. Install the license plate bracket with screws. rating of the vehicle, passengers,
standard and optional equipment, flu-
9. Install the license plate with bolts that are no ids, emergency tools, and spare tire cargo, and trailer.
longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.

● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, To get “the combined weight of occu-
Total load capacity - maximum total pants and cargo”, add the weight of all
weight limit specified of the load occupants, then add the total luggage
(passengers and cargo) for the ve- weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
hicle. This is the maximum combined ing illustration.
weight of occupants and cargo that
can be loaded into the vehicle. If the
vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the
trailer tongue weight must be in-
cluded as part of the cargo load. This
information is located on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
● Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
hicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-
ing Information label.

Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX
kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX lbs
or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
LTI0152
Example
5. Determine the combined weight of WARNING
luggage and cargo being loaded on
● Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
the vehicle. That weight may not straps to help prevent it from sliding or
safely exceed the available cargo and shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
luggage load capacity calculated in the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
Step 4. lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans- ● The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with items in
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this the cargo area. Secure any items in the
manual to determine how this re- cargo area. Your child could be seri-
duces the available cargo and lug- ously injured or killed in a collision if
gage load capacity of your vehicle. the top tether strap is damaged.
LTI2029
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm Cargo area luggage hooks ● Do not load your vehicle any heavier
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle than the GVWR or the maximum front
SECURING THE LOAD and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle vehicle can break, tire damage could
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. There are luggage hooks located in the cargo
occur, or it can change the way your
See “Measurement of weights” later in area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure
vehicle handles. This could result in
this section. cargo with ropes or other types of straps. loss of control and cause personal
Do not apply a total load of more than injury.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single metal floor hook
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa- when securing cargo.
tion label.

TOWING A TRAILER
LOADING TIPS ● Overloading not only can shorten WARNING

● The GVW must not exceed GVWR the life of your vehicle and the Overloading or improper loading of a
or GAWR as specified on the tire, but can also cause unsafe trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling and longer brak- vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification ing distances. This may cause a mance and may lead to accidents.
label. premature tire failure which
● Do not load the front and rear axle to could result in a serious accident CAUTION
and personal injury. Failures
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the caused by overloading are not ● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
GVWR. covered by the vehicle’s for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
warranty.
WARNING damaged.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS ● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
● Properly secure all cargo with
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
ropes or straps to help prevent it Secure loose items to prevent weight
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
from sliding or shifting. Do not shifts that could affect the balance of your throttle. This helps the engine and other
place cargo higher than the seat- vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive parts of your vehicle wear in at the
backs. In a sudden stop or colli- to a scale and weigh the front and the rear heavier loads.
sion, unsecured cargo could wheels separately to determine axle
cause personal injury. Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex- marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
● Do not load your vehicle any ceed either of the gross axle weight rat- that towing a trailer places additional loads on
heavier than the GVWR or the ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-
maximum front and rear GAWRs. should not exceed the gross vehicle ing and other systems.
If you do, parts of your vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
can break, tire damage could oc- given on the vehicle certification label. If on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
cur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result weight ratings are exceeded, move or re- guide includes information on trailer towing ca-
move items to bring all weights below the pability and the special equipment required for
in loss of control and cause per- proper towing.
sonal injury. ratings.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
Maximum trailer loads For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the performance and cause overheating. The engine
value specified in the following Towing protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
Load/Specification Chart found later in this sec- of engine damage, could activate and automati-
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
plus its cargo weight. decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
● When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.
and road conditions.
(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system MUST be used.
WARNING
The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified Overheating can result in reduced engine
in the following Towing Load/Specification power and vehicle speed. The reduced
LTI2041
Chart. speed may be lower than other traffic,
The GCWR equals the combined weight of the which could increase the chance of a col-
towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo) lision. Be especially careful when driving.
plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-
than these or using improper towing equipment ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a
could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking safe area. Allow the engine to cool and
and performance. return to normal operation. See “If your
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also gency” section of this manual.
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-
priate for level highway driving may have to be CAUTION
reduced for low traction situations (for example, Vehicle damage resulting from improper
on slippery boat ramps). towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
WTI0160 LTI2042
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
Tongue load Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight supply centers or salvage yards.
When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib- (GVW)/maximum Gross Axle Weight To determine the available payload capacity for
uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 - (GAW) tongue/king pin load, use the following proce-
15 percent of the total trailer load or use the dure.
trailer tongue load specified by the trailer manu- The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
facturer. The tongue load must be within the the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 1. Locate the GVWR on the
maximum tongue load limits shown in the follow- shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
ing “Towing Load/Specification” chart. If the label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, 2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
tongue load becomes excessive, rearrange cargo
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional the passengers and cargo that are normally
to allow for proper tongue load.
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating 3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
certification label. able maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, use ● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from The available towing capacity may be less than
the following procedure. F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label - the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-
7,250 lb. (3,289 kg). ger and cargo load in the vehicle.
1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the
⬙Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart found ● Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR) Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-
later in this section. from “Towing Load/Specification⬙ chart - tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the
15,100 lb. (6,849 kg). trailer tongue load specification recommended
2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load
GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail- ● Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow- becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-
able maximum towing capacity. ing Load/Specification⬙ chart - 9,100 lb. tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
(4,128 kg). maximum tongue weight specification shown in
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and 7,250 lb. (3,289 kg) GVWR
calculated available tongue weight is greater
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is – 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown = 900 lb. (409 kg) Available for tongue
match the available tongue weight.
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated weight
available maximum towing capacity. Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to 15,100 lb. (6,849 kg) GCWR
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear – 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight = 9,123 lb. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. towing
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat- 900 lb. (409 kg) Available tongue weight
ings.
/ 8,750 lb. (3,969 kg) Available capacity
Example:
= 10 % tongue weight
● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg).
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION TOWING SAFETY
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART
Trailer hitch
U.S. and Canada Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional
Maximum Towing Capacity*1 5,000lb. trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-
(2,268 kg) cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This
Maximum Tongue Load 500 lb. hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of
(227 kg) this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is
Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 10,000 lb. used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball
(4, 536 kg)
that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine
*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available
the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehi-
from your NISSAN dealer.
cle’s maximum towing capacity.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of
your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame
mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your
vehicle and trailer. A genuine NISSAN trailer
hitch is available from your NISSAN dealer . Make
sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the
vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property
damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Ball mount manufacturers to determine if they recommend
WARNING
the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.
Trailer hitch components have specific The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca- the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver. NOTE:
pable of towing a trailer heavier than the Choose a proper class ball mount based on the
weight rating of the hitch components. trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should A weight-distributing hitch system may af-
Never exceed the weight rating of the be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If
hitch components. Doing so can cause ground. you are considering use of a weight-
serious personal injury or property distributing hitch system with a surge
damage. Weight carrying hitches brake-equipped trailer, check with the
surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer
Hitch ball A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is to determine if and how this can be done.
one that is designed to carry the whole amount of
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight tongue weight and gross weight directly on the Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-
rating for your trailer: ball mount and on the receiver. turer for installing and using the weight-
distributing hitch system.
● The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
Weight distribution hitch General set-up instructions are as follows:
have the size printed on the top of the ball. This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling” or 1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.
● Choose the proper class hitch ball based on “equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball With the ignition on and the doors closed,
the trailer weight. mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes
weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve- so that it can level.
● The diameter of the threaded shank of the hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount trailer, and need some of the tongue weight 2. Measure the height of a reference point on
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should transferred through the frame and pushing down the front and rear bumpers at the center of
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow the vehicle.
in the ball mount.
vehicle. 3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust
● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper
A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is
long enough to be properly secured to the height is within 0 - .5 inches (0 – 13 mm) of
ball mount. There should be at least 2 recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a the reference height measured in step 2. The
threads showing beyond the lock washer maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) . rear bumper should be no higher than the
and nut. Check with the trailer and towing equipment reference height measured in step 2.
WARNING Class II hitch Trailer lights
Properly adjust the weight distributing Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
CAUTION
hitch so the rear of the bumper is no mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
higher than the measured reference of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg). When splicing into the vehicle electrical
height when the trailer is attached. If the system, a commercially available power-
rear bumper is higher than the measured Class III hitch type module/converter must be used to
reference height when loaded, the vehicle Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball provide power for all trailer lighting. This
may handle unpredictably which could mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
cause a loss of vehicle control and cause of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg). power source for all trailer lights while
serious personal injury or property using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
damage. Tire pressures turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
Sway control device ● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve- that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
hicle tires to the recommended cold lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting tire pressure indicated on the tire that exceeds these power requirements
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han- may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-
placard.
dling. Sway control devices may be used to help tem. See a reputable trailer retailer to
control these affects. If you choose to use one, ● Trailer tire condition, size, load rating obtain the proper equipment and to have
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make and proper inflation pressure should it installed.
sure the sway control device will work with the be in accordance with the trailer and
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys- Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
tire manufacturer’s specifications. local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
tem. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway Safety chains trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-
control device. table trailer retailer. Vehicles equipped with the
Always use suitable safety chains between your optional trailer tow package are equipped with a
Class I hitch vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should be 7-pin trailer harness connector. If your trailer is
crossed and should be attached to the hitch, not to equipped with a flat 4-pin connector, an adapter
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety chains can
will be needed to connect the trailer lights to the
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers be attached to the bumper if the hitch ball is
vehicle. Adapters are available at auto parts
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg). mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave enough
slack in the chains to permit turning corners. stores and hitch retailers.

Trailer brakes WARNING
When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs. Never connect a trailer brake system di-
(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake rectly to the vehicle brake system.
system MUST be used. However, most states
require a separate braking system on trailers with
a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make
sure the trailer meets the local regulations and
the regulations where you plan to tow.
Several types of braking systems are available.
Surge Brakes -The surge brake actuator is
mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line
running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are
activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch LTI0117
ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic example
surge brakes are common on rental trailers and Electric trailer brake controller
some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is
no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op- Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re-
eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer. quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer
brake controller.
Electric Trailer Brakes -Electric braking sys-
tems are activated by an electronic signal sent Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and
from a trailer brake controller (special brake- jumper harness that is specifically designed to be
sensing module). If electric trailer brakes are used when installing an aftermarket brake controller.
used, see “Electric trailer brake controller” in this To install the electric trailer brake controller jumper
section. harness, perform the following procedure:
Have a professional supplier of towing equip- 1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to the
ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly rearmost position.
installed and demonstrate proper brake function
testing.
Wire color designation for electric trailer brake
controller jumper harness.
WIRE COLOR NOTE
WHITE Vehicle stop lamp switch
to trailer brake controller.
BLACK Brake controller ground
(-).
WHITE Trailer brake controller
switched output.
GREEN Fused trailer brake con-
troller battery feed (B+).
3. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper

harness to the connector .
LTI2045 LTI2046
2. Locate the jumper harness connector under 4. Release the parking brake.
the lower portion of the instrument panel. 5. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake
The connector is taped to the wiring harness controller according to the manufacturer’s
䊊1 as indicated. instructions.
● The connector is marked with a white tag Pre-towing tips
with “elec brake conn”.
● Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
● Keep the cargo load as low as possible in ● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or 3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity lock to prevent the coupler from inadver- release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-
low. tently becoming unlatched. sorb the vehicle load.
● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the ● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops. 4. Apply the parking brake.
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes. 5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side. ● Always drive your vehicle at a moderate 6. Turn off the engine.
speed.
● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve- To drive away:
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and ● When backing up, hold the bottom of the
1. Start the vehicle.
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a steering wheel with one hand. Move your
trailer to the vehicle. hand in the direction in which you want the 2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to 3. Shift the transmission into gear.
all federal, state or local regulations. If not, back up slowly. If possible, have someone
install any mirrors required for towing before guide you when you are backing up. 4. Release the parking brake.
driving the vehicle. Always block the wheels on both vehicle and 5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
● Determine the overall height of the vehicle trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not clear from the blocks.
and trailer so the required clearance is recommended; however, if you must do so:
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
known.
CAUTION 7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
Trailer towing tips
If you move the shift selector to the P
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the (Park) position before blocking the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning, wheels and applying the parking brake,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free transmission damage could occur.
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-
mance will be somewhat different than under 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
normal driving conditions. 2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
● Always secure items in the trailer to prevent side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
load shift while driving.
● While going downhill, the weight of the ● When making a turn, your trailer wheels will ● Be careful when passing other vehicles.
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de- be closer to the inside of the turn than your Passing while towing a trailer requires con-
crease overall stability. Therefore, to main- vehicle wheels. To compensate for this, siderably more distance than normal pass-
tain adequate control, reduce your speed make a larger than normal turning radius ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or during the turn. also pass the other vehicle before you can
repeated use of the brakes when descend- safely change lanes.
● Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus- ● Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-
and could cause overheating. Shifting to a
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by mission to a lower gear for engine braking
lower gear instead provides “engine brak-
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible when driving down steep or long hills. This
ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve- will help slow the vehicle without applying
quently.
hicle handling. the brakes.
● If the engine coolant temperature rises to a
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway: ● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle
or too frequently. This could cause the
overheats” in the “In case of emergency” 1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
section of this owner’s manual. allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
braking efficiency.
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
This combination will help stabilize the ve- ● Increase your following distance to allow for
circumstances.
hicle greater stopping distances while towing a
● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
500 miles (805 km).
applying the brakes. ● NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-
● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do trol not be used while towing a trailer.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a ● Some states or provinces have specific
● Have your vehicle serviced more often than safe area. regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
at intervals specified in the recommended are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser- limits.
anced as described earlier in this section.
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after
50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa- ● Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automati-
CAUTION
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or cally downshifts when driving down a grade
rear bumper. with a trailer or heavy load to help control ● Failure to follow these guidelines can
vehicle speed. result in severe transmission damage.
● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no ● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
the trailer lights may burn out. trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause ways tow forward, never backward.
any damage. However, fuel economy may be ● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil reduced and the transmission/engine driving sion vehicle with all four wheels on the
should be replaced and transmission characteristics may feel unusual. ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL
oil/fluid should be changed more fre- DAMAGE internal transmission parts
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
quently. For additional information, see the due to lack of transmission lubrication.
should be replaced and transmission
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
oil/fluid should be changed more fre- ● For emergency towing procedures refer
earlier in this manual. quently. For additional information, see the to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
Tow mode “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section in the “In case of emergency” section of
earlier in this manual. this manual.
Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a
heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press the FLAT TOWING Continuously Variable Transmission
TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously
indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi- ground is sometimes called flat towing. This variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle
nates when tow mode is selected. Press the method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s
TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off. behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-
Tow mode is automatically cancelled when the home. turer’s recommendations when using their prod-
ignition switch is turned OFF. uct.
Tow mode includes the following features:
● Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shifts
when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a
grade.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

WARNING WARNING
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these The traction grade assigned to this tire is The temperature grade for this tire is es-
grades. based on straight-ahead braking traction tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
tests, and does not include acceleration, and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
Quality grades can be found where applicable on cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and characteristics. ther separately or in combination, can
maximum section width. For example: cause heat build-up and possible tire
Temperature A, B and C failure.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
Treadwear
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested when tested under controlled conditions on a
under controlled conditions on a specified gov- specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded high temperature can cause the material of the
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
as well on the government course as a tire graded sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
100. The relative performance of tires depends The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, mance which all passenger car tires must meet
and may depart significantly from the norm due to under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
variations in driving habits, service practices and
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
differences in road characteristics and climate.
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
Traction AA, A, B and C the minimum required by law.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
WARRANTY
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following For USA You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
emission warranties: Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
For USA 1-800-NISSAN-1.
fect which could cause a crash or could
1. Emission Defects Warranty cause injury or death, you should immedi- For Canada
2. Emissions Performance Warranty ately inform the National Highway Traffic If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
Details of this warranty may be found with other Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi- fect which could cause a crash or could
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information tion to notifying NISSAN. cause injury or death, you should immedi-
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it ately inform Transport Canada in addition
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace- may open an investigation, and if it finds to notifying NISSAN.
ment by writing to: that a safety defect exists in a group of If Transport Canada receives complaints,
● Nissan North America, Inc. vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy it may open an investigation, and if it finds
Consumer Affairs Department campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be- that a safety defect exists in a group of
P.O. Box 685003 come involved in individual problems be- vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-
Franklin, TN 37068-5003 tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN. duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-
For Canada
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve- port Canada cannot become involved in
Emission Control System Warranty hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- individual problems between you, your
Details of this warranty may be found with other 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go dealer, or NISSAN.
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: You may contact Transport Canada’s De-
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
If you did not receive a Warranty Information fect Investigations and Recalls Division
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may
ment by writing to: You can also obtain other information also report safety defects online at:
about motor vehicle safety from
● Nissan Canada Inc. https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-
5290 Orbitor Drive http://www.safercar.gov. Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
Additional information concerning motor If a powertrain system component is repaired or the

WARNING
vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans- battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to
A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel Drive a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test,
port Canada’s Road Safety Information (4WD) should never be tested using a two check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at wheel dynamometer (such as the dyna- readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak- mometers used by some states for emis- ON position without starting the engine. If the
ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere sions testing), or similar equipment. Make Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady
(French speakers). sure you inform the test facility personnel for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the
that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns before it is placed on a dynamometer. blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
please contact our Consumer Information Using the wrong test equipment may re- “ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready
Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122. sult in transmission damage or unex- condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
pected vehicle movement which could re-
sult in serious vehicle damage or personal
injury.
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re- the type of personally identifying data routinely Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to acquired during a crash investigation. year and prior can be purchased. A genuine
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa- NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a service and repair information for your vehicle.
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand- This manual is the same one used by the factory-
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer-
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
is designed to record data related to vehicle ships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of also be purchased.
ment, can read the information if they have ac-
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only For USA
vehicle is designed to record such data as: be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
For current pricing and availability of genuine
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-
● How various systems in your vehicle were NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
mitted by law.
operating;
1-800-450-9491
● Whether or not the driver and passenger www.nissan-techinfo.com
safety belts were buckled/fastened; For current pricing and availability of genuine
● How far (if at all) the driver was depressing NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, 1-800-247-5321
● How fast the vehicle was traveling. For Canada
● Sounds are not recorded. To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-
These data can help provide a better understand- vice Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model
year and prior, please contact your nearest
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and loca-
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist
normal driving conditions and no personal data you.
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
10 Index
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player. .4-87 Brake
A FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD) Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . .5-27
player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Air bag (See supplemental restraint Audio System Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-27
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . .4-103, 4-105 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Air bag system Audio system Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Front (See supplemental front impact Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-17, 8-20
air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-56 Audio System Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-81, 4-87 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-14 Audio system Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-112 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Air conditioner USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . .4-98, 4-99 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-15, 4-30
Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-58 Autolight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Brightness control
Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11 Automatic Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Air conditioner system refrigerant and Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-35 Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10
oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6 Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-53 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Heater and air conditioner Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . . . . . .3-32
controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50, 4-55 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-52 AUX jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-79 C
Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Alarm system Capacities and recommended
(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-27 B fuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-34 Cargo light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-114 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-10, 2-11 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). . . . . . . .5-27 Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 CD care and cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-111
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 CD changer (See audio system) . . . . . . .4-77
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-59 Block heater CD player (See audio system) . . . . .4-83, 4-91
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Check tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . .4-77 Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-108 Child restraints. . . . . . .1-28, 1-29, 1-30, 1-32
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . .4-83, 4-91 Bluetooth® hands-free phone Precautions on child
FM-AM radio with compact disc system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127, 4-141 restraints . . . . . . . .1-30, 1-37, 1-41, 1-46
(CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46 Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-34
Child restraint with top tether strap. . . . . . .1-34 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 D Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-17 Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6
Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-34 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
Clock Defroster switch Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
(models with navigation system) . . .4-11, 4-26 Rear window and outside mirror defroster Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11, 4-26 switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player . . . . . . .4-95 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . .4-83, 4-91 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-35 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7
Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Display controls Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-14 (see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-16 Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-16
Continuously Variable Transmission Distance to empty . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-20 Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
(CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . .5-2
Driving with Continuously Variable Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Drive positioner, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16 Driving
Brightness/contrast button. . . . . .4-15, 4-30 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-16 F
Driving with Continuously Variable
Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-23 Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Without navigation system . . . . . . . . . .4-4 Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Controls Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-112 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Heater and air conditioner controls .4-50, 4-55 E Fluid
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-52 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Coolant Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Capacities and recommended
Capacities and recommended Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-30 Continuously Variable Transmission
Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 Engine (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . .8-8 Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-13 Engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5 Block heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6 Capacities and recommended Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-8 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . . .9-10
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11
10-2
Front air bag system Inside automatic anti-glare mirror . . . . . . . .3-32
(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . .1-56 H Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Fuel Hands-free phone system, Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2
Capacities and recommended Bluetooth®. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127, 4-141 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-35
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . .6-2 Intelligent Key system
Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . .2-32 Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 2-38, 2-41 Remote keyless entry operation. . . . . . .3-13
Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . .2-26, 3-28 Heater
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Heater and air conditioner Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57
Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22 controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-50, 4-55 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-103, 4-105
Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-51, 4-55 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32
Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-52
G
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . . .2-59, 2-63 J
Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal
Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59, 2-63
Hook Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Gauge
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5
K
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 I Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Keyless entry
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Ignition Switch With Intelligent Key system
Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Push-Button Ignition Switch . . . . . . . .5-10 (See Intelligent Key system). . . . . . . . .3-13
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Image viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 Keys, For Intelligent Key system. . . . . . .3-2, 3-7
Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . .2-28, 3-4, 5-13
Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Important vehicle information label . . . . . . .9-10
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 L
Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Indicator lights and audible reminders Labels
(See warning/indicator lights and audible Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11
reminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10
10-3
Emission control information label . . . . .9-10 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5 Mirror
Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10 Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . . . . .3-32
F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . .9-10 Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Inside mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9 Loose fuel cap warning. . . . . . . . . .2-26, 3-28 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-64 Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-25 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . .2-12 Moonroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-32 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-25
License plate Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . . . . . . .2-50 N
Lift gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13
Lift gate release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Luggage storage NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system . . .2-28, 3-4,
Light (see vehicle loading information) . . . . . . . .2-50 5-13
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-14 NISSAN voice recognition system . . . . . .4-152
Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-27
Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . . .2-10 M
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 O
Maintenance
Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Changing the maintenance interval . .4-8, 4-22 Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . . . . .9-4
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-32 Displaying the maintenance notice Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-22 Oil
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Capacities and recommended
Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-57 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-26 Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning Resetting the maintenance interval . .4-8, 4-22 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25 Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-28 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8, 4-21
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-58 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4
Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-58 Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Warning/indicator lights and audible Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10 Overheat
Lights Map pocket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58 Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Lock Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . .2-35
Owner’s manual/service manual order
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7 information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
10-4
Seat adjustment
P R Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2
Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-4
Parking Radio Second row bench seats . . . . . . . .1-6, 1-8
Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-127 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45
Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . . . . . .4-77 Seat belt
Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free FM-AM radio with compact disc Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-127, 4-141 (CD) changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-75 Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Power FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player . .4-87 Injured Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-80 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-21
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42, 2-44 Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-112 Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Readiness for inspection maintenance Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . .1-63
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Seat belt maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Rear seat air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52 Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34 Three-point type with retractor . . . . . . .1-24
Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 Rear window and outside mirror defroster Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Precautions switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 Seats
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-30 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
On-pavement and off-road driving Recorders Automatic drive positioner. . . . . . . . . .3-35
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6 Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
Precautions on child Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . . .9-6 Heated seats . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 2-38, 2-41
restraints. . . . . . . . .1-30, 1-37, 1-41, 1-46 Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . .1-2
Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-21 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . .9-30 Security indicator light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Precautions on supplemental restraint Resetting the fuel economy . . . . . . . .4-7, 4-21 Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 system), engine start . . . . . . . .2-28, 3-4, 5-13
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Pre-tensioner seat belt system . . . . . . . . .1-63 Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Programmable features . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-23 S
Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9, 4-23
Safety
Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Child seat belts . . . . .1-30, 1-37, 1-41, 1-46
Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . .9-30
SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-64
10-5
Starting Rear window and outside mirror defroster Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28
Before starting the engine. . . . . . . . . .5-13 switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31 Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9 Rear window wiper and washer Tow truck towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2 switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Tow mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch .2-41 Transceiver
Steering Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-29 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . .2-59, 2-63
Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .2-39 Transmission
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12 Continuously Variable Transmission
Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 T (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . .4-112 Driving with Continuously Variable
Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4 Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44 Temperature gauge Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
Storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50 Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5 country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Sunglasses case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system), Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28, 3-4, 5-13 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
Sunroof (see Moonroof) . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Tire
Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . .1-64 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3 U
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-64, 2-14 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-56 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . .9-11 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . .9-29
Supplemental restraint system Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37 USB interface
Information and warning labels . . . . . . .1-64 Tire placard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11 Audio file operation . . . . . . . . .4-98, 4-100
Precautions on supplemental restraint Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Video file operation. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-101
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-49 Tire rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-37
Supplemental restraint system Tires of 4-wheel drive . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39
(Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . . . .1-49 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36 V
Switch Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . .9-29
Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Automatic power window switch . . . . . .2-53 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . .8-16
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36 Tire pressure Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . .9-8
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-41
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-32 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3 Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system. . . . .5-29
Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-34 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Towing Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Power inverter switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41 4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 (Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
10-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9 Wheel/tire size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 When traveling or registering your vehicle in
Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14, 6-15 another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27 Windows
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-52
immobilizer system), engine start. .2-28, 3-4, 5-13 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-49 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . .4-152 Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-29
Wiper
W Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Warning Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-29
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-64, 2-14 Wiper blades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . .2-10, 2-11
Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11
Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . .6-2
Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . .2-13, 2-25
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Passenger air bag and status light . . . . .1-58
Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Warning labels (for SRS) . . . . . . . . . .1-64
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-29
Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . . .9-8
Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-30
10-7
GAS STATION INFORMATION
RECOMMENDED FUEL: ● U.S. government regulations require RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi- BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
fied by a small, square, orange and
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num- During the first 1,200 mi (2,000 km) of vehicle
black label with the common abbrevia-
ber (Research octane number 91). use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region. “Break-in schedule” information found in the
CAUTION “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-
For additional information, see “Capacities and low these recommendations for the future reli-
● Using a fuel other than that specified
recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
could adversely affect the emission
and consumer information” section. to follow these recommendations may result in
control system, and may also affect the
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
warranty coverage. RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
● Under no circumstances should a •Engine oil with API Certification Mark
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst. •Viscosity SAE 5W-30
● Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in
vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or tion of this manual.
E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically
designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad- COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
versely affect the emission control de- See Tire and Loading Information label.
vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-
age caused by such fuel is not covered The label is typically located on the driver side
by the NISSAN new vehicle limited center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
warranty. information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
Printing : March 2013 (03)
Publication No.: OM3E
OM1E 0R52U2
0R51U0
Printed in U.S.A. R52-D

Nissan Pathfinder

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Nissan Pathfinder

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

®

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Front view camera (if so equipped)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Moonroof (if so equipped)/panoramic

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Glove box, Console box (P. 2-48)

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch and

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Indicator Name Page

Anti-lock Braking 2-11 Supplemental air 2-15 Security indicator 2-16

or Indicator Name Page Tow mode ON indi- 2-16

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29

● The seatback should not be reclined

ARS1152 FRONT MANUAL SEAT

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

See “Automatic drive positioner” in “Pre-driving

Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Manual (if so equipped)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever 䊊 2

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position:

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE ● Forward-facing child restraint

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

– Infants and children should never be

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45